Home

machining center/transfer machine type

1. ssseesseessieesreesressrnnstrtttrrtrrinernnsttntrtnnrtnneennsnn 16 4 Buffer RegiStef isisisi cnacncevavevcucsaacadeudcavennes canmedanceasnucch aeucevauucensuaarsdhsawseweersneasuediveastacuauectaaiues 17 4i Preread DU f O S e a a E a aa a a raae Ee A EE E Ea aaa 17 5 Positi n CoM MaN d S eae aa aaa aa aera aa aaaea nd VE aaa Eaa cas aa TENE aAa 18 5 1 Position command methods G90 G91 assessnnseeseeserrrresrseserrrrrrrnnrsrrnrrrnrnsrerrrrrrnrnrererne 18 5 2 Inch metric command change G20 G21 sccsscsidesuccet octuilenerunes nihauamen tees Gvcasedlend 20 5 3 Decimal POINT WOU rinena a oa Aae raa E Saa EE AEEA EATE AEA 21 6 Interpolation Functions iisactii sant Gncewascdietrcetanaweudedin assicientaccadancrvsnnerasdinicacmenanenseaclsaasmeuwateesedane 25 6 1 Positioning Rapid traverse GOO ck cies ieent edeets neater wee ceed eet eas 25 6 2 Linear interpolation G01 oss acces sas cecesseods cet ei cescpade ceases teneonsassaccanslaptieade artaelaueueseeeeacaagtauentenie 31 6 3 Plane selection G17 G18 G19 oo ccecccssseeceeceeeccsessseaeeeseseeeseneesueeseeeeeesesssseaneeeneess 33 6 4 Circular interpolation G02 GOS co siieicssssicas ini Sanv aunts einyathenunteieasealva len amemsmoaealas 35 6 5 R specified circular interpolation G02 GOS ecccessceesseceseeesseeeeesaeeeseeeeeseeeessneeesenees 39 6 6 Helical interpolation G17 to G19 G02 GOS ccecceeseeeseneeeseeeeeseeessseeesseeesseeeeenees 41 6 7 Thread CU
2. Synchronized operation 2 Command for synchronizing among three part systems Inm Ll n m Part system number n m Synchronizing number 01 to 9999 1 12 13L1 Synchronized operation 2 11 2L1 267 Synchronized 1113L1 ie 13 Program Support Functions 13 13 Synchronizing operation between part systems fi Detailed description 1 When the nLI code is issued from the part system i the operation of that program will wait until the iLI code is issued from the part system n When the IiLI code is issued the programs of both part systems i and n will start running simultaneously Part system n Part system m program program program Pi4 Pn4 Pm InLl Synchronized operation iLE Pip Pno Pi iti Pi Part system i Waiting 2 f Simultaneous start Part system n j Part system m 2 Synchronizing among three part systems is as follows When the n mLI command is issued from the part system i the program of part system i operation will wait until the i mLI command is issued from the part system n and the i nLI command is issued from the part system m When the synchronizing commands are issued programs of part systems i n and m will start operating simultaneously Part system n Part system m rogram rogram rogram Piy
3. 154 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles c G83 Deep hole drilling cycle Program G83 Xx Yy ZZ Rr Qq Ffi lii Jji Q This designates the cutting amount per pass and is always designated with an incremental value 1 GO 2 GO 3 G1 4 GO 5 GO 6 7 8 9 1 Gi Z q m Ff GO Z 2 q G98 G99 GO Z 2 q m mode mode Gi Z q m Ff 0 GO Z 3 q n G98 mode GOZ z1 r G99 mode GOZ z Operation pattern 1 Valid Invalid rk Invalid Invalid alallala la o R oO Ne Ruse Rae Z E Invalid s Invalid Invalid eae peas rb Invalid ak oO Invalid 10 Invalid Mmo vai When executing a second and following cutting in the G83 as shown above the movement will change from rapid traverse to cutting feed several mm before the position machined last When the hole bottom is reached the axis will return according to the G98 or G99 mode m will differ according to the parameter 8013 G83 n Program so that q gt m The operation stops at after the 1 2 and n commands during single block operation 5 z 4 155 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles d G84 Tapping cycle Program G84 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ff Pp Ss Ss Rro lii Jj P Dwell designation M4 Spindle reverse rotation G1 Z Z1 Ff G4 Pp M3 Spindle forward rotation ese mode GO0Z r G99 mode No movement Operation pa
4. i i i i i i i i i System No of Interface variable points output signal Register R124 bit 0 Register R124 bit 1 Register R124 bit 2 Register R124 bit 3 Register R124 bit 4 Register R124 bit 5 Register R124 bit 6 Register R124 bit 7 Register R124 bit 8 Register R124 bit 9 Register R124 bit 10 Register R124 bit 11 Register R124 bit 12 Register R124 bit 13 Register R124 bit 14 Register R124 bit 15 Register R124 R125 Register R126 R127 Register R128 R129 Register R130 R131 198 a b h b b h b ee Cr Seer Cae Caer Cer Geer Cae Register R125 bit 0 Register R125 bit 1 Register R125 bit 2 Register R125 bit 3 Register R125 bit 4 Register R125 bit 5 Register R125 bit 6 Register R125 bit 7 Register R125 bit 8 Register R125 bit 9 Register R125 bit 10 Register R125 bit 11 Register R125 bit 12 Register R125 bit 13 Register R125 bit 14 Register R125 bit 15 13 Program Support Functions Note 1 13 5 User macro specifications They are not cleared even with resetting Note 2 1131 lt Vacant gt is treated as 0 Any number except 0 and lt vacant gt is treated as 1 Any value less than 0 00000001 is indefinite System Interface System Interface variable p output signal variable p output signal gt j j j i i j i i 5 F i Register R126 bit 0 Register R126 bit 1 Register R126 bit 2 Register R126 bit 3 Register R126 bit 4 Register R126 bit 5
5. 4 Movement during other commands in tool length offset modal a If reference point return is executed with G28 and manual operation the tool length offset will be canceled when the reference point return is completed Example 7 G43 Zz1 Hh1 G28 222 AEETIS TEE ET Canceled when reference point is reached G43 Zz2 Hh2 Same as G49 G49 G28 LP Kiei After the Z axis is canceled reference point return is executed b The movement is commanded to the G53 machine coordinate system the axis will move to the machine position when the tool offset amount is canceled When the G54 to G49 workpiece coordinate system is returned to the position returned to will be the coordinates shifted by the tool offset amount 104 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 12 3 Tool radius compensation kJ FF Function and purpose This function compensates the radius of the tool The compensation can be done in the random vector direction by the radius amount of the tool selected with the G command G38 to G42 and the D command Command format 3 Tool radius compensation cancel ____ 3 Tool radius compensation left 5 Tool radius compensation right Change or hold of compensation vector Can be commanded only during the radius compensation mode Corner changeover Detailed description The No of compensation sets will differ according to the machine model The No of sets is the total of the tool
6. Device No Signal name Abbrev Explanation R56 Phase error The phase error during spindle phase monitor synchronous control is output as a pulse unit R57 Phase error The lower limit value of the phase error during monitor lower spindle phase synchronous control is output limit value as a pulse unit R59 Phase error The upper limit value of the phase error during monitor upper spindle phase synchronous control is output limit value as a pulse unit T Multi speed acceleration deceleration Up to eight steps of acceleration deceleration time constants for spindle synchronization can be selected according to the spindle rotation speed Rotation speed Sptc3 1 Time required from stopped state to sptc1 setting rotation speed spt sptc1 maximum rotation speed 2 Time required from sptc1 to sptc2 setting rotation speed spt sptc2 sptc1 maximum rotation speed spdiv1 3 Time required from sptc2 to sptc3 setting rotation speed spt sptc3 sptc2 maximum rotation speed spdiv2 Sptc2 Sptc1 Time 95 10 Spindle Functions I w Precautions and restrictions 1 When carrying out spindle synchronization a rotation command must be issued to both the basic spindle and synchronous spindle The synchronous spindle s rotation direction will follow the basic spindle rotation direction and spindle synchronization rotation direction designation regardless of whether a forward or rev
7. SPINDLE S 0 e Review the program No spindle speed command has been input CONTROL AXIS NO ERR e Review the parameter specified for the An invalid constant surface speed control constant surface speed control axis axis has been specified NO C CMP SPEC e Check the specifications e A tool radius compensation command G41 G42 has been issued though there are no tool radius compensation specifications e Anose R compensation command G41 G42 G46 has been issued though there are no nose R compensation specifications G2 3 CMP ERR e Issue the linear command G01 or rapid A compensation command G40 G41 traverse command G00 in the G42 G43 G44 G46 has been issued in compensation command block or cancel the arc mode G02 G03 block Set the modal to linear interpolation I S P NOTHING e Review the program In interference block processing during execution of a tool radius compensation G41 or G42 or nose radius compensation G41 G42 or G46 command the intersection point after one block is skipped cannot be determined I F ERROR e Review the program An interference error has arisen while the tool radius compensation command G41 G42 or nose radius compensation command G41 G42 G46 was being executed F CYC ERR CC e The tool radius compensation mode is A fixed cycle command has been issued in established when a fixed cycle command is the tool radius compensation mode executed and so the tool
8. 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 2 Basic machine work and local coordinate systems 14 2 Basic machine work and local coordinate systems Ej Function and purpose The basic machine coordinate system is fixed in the machine and it denotes that position which is determined inherently by the machine The work coordinate systems are used for programming and in these systems the reference point on the workpiece is set as the coordinate zero point the local coordinate systems are created on the work coordinate systems and they are designed to facilitate the programs for parts machining 9 W3 Workpiece 3 W4 Workpiece 4 coordinate system coordinate system P W2 Workpiece 2 coordinate syste 279 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 3 Machine zero point and 2nd 3rd 4th reference points Zero point 14 3 Machine zero point and 2nd 3rd 4th reference points Zero point Ej Function and purpose The machine zero point serves as the reference for the basic machine coordinate system It is inherent to the machine and is determined by the reference zero point return 2nd 3rd and 4th reference zero points points zero points relate to the position of the coordinates which have been set beforehand by parameter from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate system Basic machine coordinate 2nd reference point system Machine zero point 1st reference point 3rd reference point 4th reference point L
9. ARC CENTER The arc center is not sought during R specified circular interpolation NO HELICAL SPC A helical command has been issued though it is not included in the specifications NO THREAD SPEC A thread cutting command has been issued though it is not included in the specifications SCREW PITCH ERR The screw pitch has not been set correctly when the thread cutting command is issued PLANE CHG CR A plane selection command G17 G18 G19 was issued during the coordinate rotation command G68 PLANE CHG CC e A plane selection command G17 G18 G19 has been issued when the tool radius compensation command G41 G42 or nose radius compensation command G41 G42 G46 is issued After nose R compensation was completed there was no axis movement command after G40 and the plane selection command was issued before the compensation was canceled ILLEGAL PLANE The arc command axis is not on the selected plane 324 e Review the axis address command range e The default movement modal command at power on is Q01 This causes the machine to move without a G01 command if a movement command is issued in the program and an alarm results Use an F command to specify the feedrate Specify F with a thread lead command Check the numerical values of the addresses that specify the start and end points as well as the arc center in the program Check the and directions of the address numerical va
10. G42 X100 Y100 110 X100 Y 100 G40 MO2 3 The vectors differ for the G38 I _J_ K_ command and the G41 G42 _J_ K_ command Pot GB IG 2 2 G41 G41 2 2 G38 G91 X100 150 J50 G41 G91 X100 150 J50 2 2 I J AIS Offset amount Offset amount Vector in lJ direction having an offset Vector perpendicular in IJ direction and amount size having an offset amount size 128 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 4 Refer to the following table for the offset methods based on the presence and or absence of the G41 and G42 commands and l J K command G41 G42 I J K Offset method Intersection point calculation type vector Intersection point calculation type vector Intersection point calculation type vector J type vector No insertion block G91 G01 G41 X200 D1 F1000 X 150 Y150 G41 X300 150 X 150 Y 150 G40 X 200 During the J type vector compensation the A insertion block will not exist 129 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 12 3 4 Interrupts during tool radius compensation fe MDI interrupt Tool radius compensation is valid in any automatic operation mode whether memory or MDI operation An interrupt based on MDI will give the result as in the figure below after block stop during memory operation 1 Interrupt without movement tool path does not change N1 G41D1 ____S Stopping position N2 X20
11. Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection Workpiece coordinate system selection 48 sets expanded Uni directional positioning Exact stop check mode High accuracy control mode Automatic corner override Tapping mode Cutting mode User macro call User macro modal call A User macro modal call B User macro modal call cancel User fixed cycle User fixed cycle User fixed cycle Fixed cycle step Fixed cycle reverse tap User fixed cycle Fixed cycle fine boring User fixed cycle User fixed cycle User fixed cycle Fixed cycle cancel Fixed cycle drill spot drill 4 3 Data Formats 3 8 Gcode lists G code Group 82 09 Fixed cycle drill counter boring 83 09 84 09 85 09 86 09 87 09 88 09 89 09 91 03 92 00 93 are eg a 94 05 97 17 98 10 99 10 113 00 114 1 00 115 00 116 00 117 00 100 255 00 User macro G code call Max 10 Note 1 A symbol indicates the G code to be selected in each group when the power is turned ON or when a reset is executed to initialize the modal Note 2 A A symbol indicates the G code for which parameters selection is possible as an initialization status when the power is turned ON or when a reset is executed to initialize the modal Note that inch metric changeover can only be selected when the power is turned ON Note 3 A e symbol indicates a function dedicated for multi part system macro Re
12. 1 2 3 s 5 s s7 pa ROA R1071 R1171 R1271 R1371 R1471 R1571 ystem No of Interface input signal variable points 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R971 R1071 R1171 R1271 R1371 R1471 R1571 R973 R1073 R1173 R1273 R1373 R1473 R1573 R975 R1075 R1175 R1275 R1375 R1475 R1575 R977 R1077 R1177 R1277 R1377 R1477 R1577 197 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications ff Macro interface outputs 1100 to 1135 1300 to 1395 NC gt PLC The interface output signals can be sent by substituting values in variable numbers 1 100 to 1135 1300 to 1395 An output signal can be only 0 or 1 All the output signals from 1100 to 1131 can be sent at once by substituting a value in variable number 1 132 Similarly the output signals 1300 to 1311 1332 to 1363 and 1364 to 1395 can be sent by assigning values to the variable numbers 1133 to 1135 2 2 The status of the writing and output signals can be read in order to offset the 1100 to 1135 1300 to 1395 output signals Output here refers to the output from the NC To use the macro interface function by part system set the bit selection parameter 6454 bitO Refer to 2 for the signals provided for each part system Macro interface common to part systems output ae No of Interface System No of Interface variable points output signal variable points output signal i i i i i
13. 22 100 100 10000 000 23 100 100 10000 000 24 100 100 10000 000 25 100 100 1 000 26 100 100 1 000 27 100 100 1 000 28 100 100 1 000 29 5041 101 1000 000 30 5041 102 0 050 7 Remainder MOD 8 Logical product 9 100 AND 10 9AND15 15 00001111 9 Sin SIN 501 SIN 60 0 860 502 SIN 60 0 860 503 1000 SIN 60 866 025 504 1000 SIN 60 866 025 505 1000 SIN 60 866 025 506 1000 SIN 60 866 025 Note SIN 60 is equivalent to SIN 60 10 Cosine COS 541 COS 45 0 707 542 COS 45 0 707 543 1000 COS 45 707 107 544 1000 COS 45 707 107 545 1000 COS 45 707 107 546 1000 COS 45 707 107 Note COS 45 is equivalent to COS 45 11 Tangent TAN 551 TAN 60 1 732 552 TAN 60 1 732 553 1000 TAN 60 1732 051 554 1000 TAN 60 1732 051 555 1000 TAN 60 1732 051 556 1000 TAN 60 1732 051 Note TAN 60 is equivalent to TAN 60 12 Arctangent 561 ATAN 173205 100000 ATAN or ATN 562 ATAN 173205 100 563 ATAN 173 205 100000 564 ATAN 173 205 100 565 ATAN 1 732 221 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 13 Arc cosine ACOS 521 ACOS 100 141 421 522 ACOS 100 141 421 523 ACOS 1000 1414 213 523 524 ACOS 10 14 142 525 ACOS 0 707 571 SQRT 1000 572 SQRT 1000 573 SQRT 10 10 20
14. G64 a Senses a a dene thatenestenads a aaa A a A a AAE EA AE AA AE A MaE AEAEE Ate 69 Bi DVE a e a aa E raa a a aAA a Ea Sar a aa aaa aa Enana AASER E aa 70 8 1 Per sec nd dwells G04 ss c cect sisi a nag Sa ak Ae a araa 70 9 Miscellaneous FUNCTIONS ccseeeeeceseeeeeenseeeeeeeneeneeeenseeeeeensneeeeessnaneeessaseaneseeseaneeeensseeneenees 72 9 1 Miscellaneous functions M8 digits BCD ccceeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaeeaeeeneneeeeeeas 72 9 2 Secondary miscellaneous functions B8 digits A8 or C8 digitS cceeceeeeeeeeeereeee 74 10 Spindle FUNCIONS ji ccctio hale ie eee E ai 75 10 1 Spindle functions S2 digits BCD During standard PLC specifications 75 10 2 Spindle functions S6 digits ANAlOg sictacccecsctceis ck cttacdaceeeds A shied casueetAcsthon ceaicch Senpeedl ate 75 10 3 Spindle functions S8 digits 0 0nneoneone teense eenoenee neeese rnrreernnrrnrrnnrnerrnrenernnenrneeen nene 76 10 4 Multiple spindle control essseeseeneesseeeseeeerereretesrrstrrsrtnttrnssinsstntttintetnnetrnsttnnttnnennnsnn nan 77 10 4 1 Multiple spindle control eseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeesresreteieterinsttrstitttineinsstnnntnnatnnnenenennnnana 77 10 4 2 Spindle selection command ccecceeeteeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaceesaeeaeeseeeseaeeeeeeeeeneaaeeaas 78 10 5 Constant surface speed Control G96 G97 00 cee ceceeceeceseceeseeeeeseeeesseeeeceeeesneeeesnaeeees 80 10 5 1 Consta
15. N6 G98 G84 X 125 Y 75 Z 150 R 100 F40 X 175 Y 125 T X 125 Y 175 eee X 75 Y 125 G80 3 Positioning program main G28 X0 YO ZO fen power is turned ON N1 G90 G54 M98 P100 N2 G55 M98 P100 N3 G57 M98 P100 N4 G56 M98 P100 N5 G58 M98 P100 NG G59 M98 P100 N7 G28 X0 YO ZO N8 M02 298 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset WWO0S WWO0e Scb z 80910410 1 a2 dy10 M Jonim PS9 al wwog SY W00 lt AN D W O wwoot WWOO0S WWO06 p a2 dy10 M e a2 dyo M 9 a 2 dy10 M g 2 dy10 M 299 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 11 Local coordinate system setting 14 11 Local coordinate system setting G52 Ej Function and purpose The local coordinate systems can be set independently on the G54 through G59 workpiece coordinate systems using the G52 command so that the commanded position serves as the programmed zero point The G52 command can also be used instead of the G92 command to change the deviation between the zero point in the machining program and the machining workpiece zero point Command format G54 54 to G59 G52Xx Yy ZZ aa ad Additional axis Detailed description 1 The G52 command is valid until a new G52 command is issued and the tool does not move This command comes in handy for employing another coord
16. No d bit OFF or d1 No d bit ON d 0 7 0 01 s e N No corresponds to the constant No No on the PLC constant screen e Each N No corresponds to the No on the PLC timer screen e N No corresponds to the No on the PLC counter screen e N No corresponds to the No on the bit selection screen e N Nos 49 to 96 are used by the machine maker and Mitsubishi These must not be used by the user Appendix 1 Program Parameter Input N No Correspondence Table P No 11 Axis common parameters per part system Parameter Data f Paar E 8004 Automatic tool length 844 2 word 1 60000 mm min Machining measurement parameter instrument speed i 8005 Automatic tool length 836 2 word 0 99999999 x Interpolation Machining measurement 2 junit parameter deceleration range r Automatic tool length 840 2 word 0 99999999 x Interpolation Machining measurement junit parameter deceleration range d i 8008 Automatic corner 756 2 word l Machining override max angle parameter Automatic corner 760 2 word 0 99999999 Interpolation Machining override precorner junit parameter length i 8010 Wear data input max 776 2 word 0 99999 Interpolation Machining value junit parameter 8011 Wear data input max 780 2 word 0 99999 Interpolation Machining addition unit parameter 8013 G83 return amount 832 2 word 0 99999999 x Interpolation Machinin
17. Parameter settings Skip condition Skip speed G31 1 7 20 0mm min f1 G31 2 3 5 0mm min f2 G31 3 1 1 0mm min f3 Program example N10G31 1 X200 0 N20G31 2 X40 0 N30G31 3 X1 0 Operation Measurement distance Skip speed Input of skip signal 3 Input of skip signal 2 Input of skip signal 1 Note 1 If skip signal 1 is input before skip signal 2 in the above operation N20 is skipped at that point and N30 is also ignored 2 If a skip signal with the condition set during G04 dwell is input the remaining dwell time is canceled and the following block is executed 314 15 Measurement Support Functions 15 4 Multi step skip function 2 15 4 Multi step skip function 2 G31 Ej Function and purpose During linear interpolation command operation is skipped if skip signal parameter Pp specified with a skip command G31 which indicates external skip signals 1 to 4 is met If multi step skip commands are issued simultaneously in different part systems both part systems perform skip operation simultaneously if the input skip signals are the same or they perform skip operation separately if the input skip signals are different The skip operation is the same as with a normal skip command G31 without P parameter Skip signal 1 Part system 1 Skip signal 1 2 wn gt n t f ai A D D D gt a t A Part system 2 Skip signal 2 a X2 a Skip signals input 10
18. Relations between skip and multi step skip Skip specifications Sepspectteaions l a E Condition Speed condition Speed aa X100 Without P and F Program error P601 Skip 1 G31 X100 P5 Command G31 X100 F100 Command Without P Program error P601 Skip 1 G31 X100 P5 F100 Program error P602 Command Command value value Note Parameter in the above table indicates that specified with a skip command G31 5 If skip specification is effective and P is specified as an axis address skip signal parameter P is given priority and axis address P is ignored Example G31 P500 F100 This is regarded as a skip signal parameter and program error P35 results 6 Those items other than 1 to 5 are the same with the ordinary skip function G31 without P 317 Appendix 1 Program Parameter Input N No Correspondence Table Appendix 1 Program Parameter Input N No Correspondence Table Note 1 The units in the table indicate the minimum setting units for the parameter data Note 2 The setting ranges given in the table are the setting ranges on the screen Designate parameters related to the length by doubling the input setting unit However the parameters with in etc column ZERO RTN PARAM 2027 2028 2029 must be excluded Example 1 To set 30mm in a parameter when the input setup unit is B 0 001mm and metric system L60000 Example 2 To set 5 inch in a parameter when the input setup
19. System No of Interface output signal points 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R274 R371 R471 R571 R671 _ R771 R871 116 1 bio bitoj ito bitoj _ bito ito bito 1131 1 bitis biti5 bitis bitis biti5s biti5 bit 5 System No of ee T ee TEn variable points 1 foe ee ee ee eee R271 R371 R471 R571 R671 R771 R871 O Be Be E ie e AA R273 R373 R473 R573 R673 R773 R873 R275 R375 R475 R575 R675 R775 R875 R277 R377 R477 R577 R677 R777 R877 201 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 1032 R24 R25 1132 R124 R125 Input signal Output signa TT Td lt lt lt _ 1035 R30 R31 202 13 Program Support Functions ff Tool offset 13 5 User macro specifications Variable number range Type 1 Type 2 10001 to 10000 n 2001 to 2000 n O Length dimension 11001 to 11000 n 2201t0 2200 n x O O Length wear 16001 to 16000 n 2401 to 2400 n E e ineeon 17001 to 17000 n 2601 to 2600 n Tr wear Tool data can be read and values substituted using the variable numbers Either the numbers in the 10000 order or 2000 order can be used The last 3 digits of the variable numbers correspond to the tool offset number n corresponds to the No of tool offset sets If there are 400 tool offset sets and type 2 is being used avoid variable Nos in the 2000 order and instead use the
20. X12 345mm G0X12345 last digit is 14m X123 450mm X12345 000mm unit 111 123 112 5 55 X123 000mm X123 000mm X123 000mm X 111 Y 112 5 5550mm 5 550mm Y5 550mm 113 111 112 113 128 550 113 128 550 113 128 550 addition ieee 114 117 450 114 117 450 114 117 450 subtraction HAS SANITET 115 682 650 115 682 650 115 682 650 multiplication ae A al 116 22 162 116 22 162 116 22 162 He 112111 117 0 045 117 0 045 117 0 045 division Decimal point input I Il and decimal point command valid invalid If acommand does not use a decimal point at an address where a decimal point command is valid in the table on the following page it is handled differently between decimal point input and II modes as explained below A command using a decimal point is handled the same way in either the decimal point input I or II mode 1 Decimal point input I The least significant digit place of command data corresponds to the command unit Example Command X1 in the 1um system is equivalent to command X0 001 2 Decimal point input Il The least significant digit place of command data corresponds to the decimal point Example Command X1 in the 1um system is equivalent to command X1 Note When a four rules operator is contained the data will be handled as that with a decimal point Example When the min input command unit is 1um GO x 123 0 X axis 123mm co
21. a The relation of the G98 G99 mode and No of repetition designation is as shown below G98 No of hole Program At power ON at cancel G99 drilling example with M02 M30 and reset button G81X100 Y100 y Initial point Z Initial point Z 50 Only one R25 R point gt R point execution F1000 Initial level return is executed R point level return is executed G81X100 Y100 an a R25 Second and L5F1000 following e ge ae ee Y_ executions ES First Second Final First Second Final time time time time time time Initial level return is executed for all times EJ Example of program Example 1 Record only the hold machining data G82 Zz Rr Pp Ff LO Done e eee Execute hole drilling operation with The No of canned cycle repetitions is designated with L If L1 is designated or L not designated the canned cycle will be executed once The setting range is 1 to 9999 If LO is commanded only the hole machining data will be recorded G8A 7A XXx1 Yy Zz Rr Pp Qa Ff Ll 166 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles The ideology of the data differs between the absolute value mode G90 and incremental value mode G91 as shown below Z axis R absolute value z zero point Absolute value mode G90 Incremental value mode G91 Designate a command value with a symbol for X Y and Z R indicates the coordinate value from the zero point in the
22. ff Detailed description 6 6 Helical interpolation P4 time Zi Second time First l For this command command a linear axis multiple axes can be commanded that does not contain a circular axis in the circular interpolation command For feedrate F command the X Y Z axis composite element directions speed Pitch is obtained with the following expression f Zi 2r P1 0 2r _ _ 1 ye _ 1 YS 6 0E 6s tan ETN tan e 0 lt 90 lt 2r Where xs ys are the start point coordinates from the arc center xe ye are the end point coordinates from the arc center If pitch No is 0 address P can be omitted Note The pitch No P command range is 0 to 99 The pitch No designation P command cannot be made with the R specified arc Plane selection The helical interpolation arc plane selection is determined with the plane selection mode and axis address as for the circular interpolation For the helical interpolation command the plane where circular interpolation is executed is commanded with the plane selection G code G17 G18 G19 and the 2 circular interpolation axes and linear interpolation axis axis that intersects with circular plane 3 axis addresses are commanded XY plane circular Z axis linear Command the X Y and Z axis addresses in the G02 G03 and G17 plane selection G code mode ZX plane circular Y axis linear Command the X Y and Z axis addresses in the G02 G03 and G18 plane selecti
23. 1 2 6 and 9 commands during single block operation i G89 Boring Program G89 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ff Pp GO XX Yy GO Zr G1 221 Ff G4 Pp G1 Z Z1 Ff tee mode GO0Z 1 G99 mode No movement OB ARON O 4 G98 G99 mode mode The operation stops at after the 1 2 and 5 or 6 commands during single block operation 161 13 Program Support Functions i 13 1 Canned cycles G73 Step cycle Program G73 Xx Yy ZZ Qq Rr Ff Pp G98 G99 Z qi m Ff mode mode G98 mode GOZ 21 G99 mode GOZ z When executing a second and following cutting in the G73 as shown above the movement will return several m mm with rapid traverse and then will change to cutting feed The return amount m will differ according to the parameter 8012 G73 n The operation stops at after the 1 2 and n commands during single block operation 162 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles k G74 Reverse tapping cycle Program G74 Xx Yy ZZ Rr Pp Ss Sso Rro li Jj4 GO Xx Yy GO Zr G1 ZZ Ff G4 Pp M3 Spindle forward rotation G1 Z Z1 Ff G4 Pp M4 Spindle reverse rotation Bee mode GOZ r G99 mode No movement tN Ni aa a e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Oo aS G98 G99 mode mode When r2 1 the synchronous tapping mode will be entered and when r 0 the asynchronous tapping mode will be entered When G74 is execute
24. 1 when spindle tool data group No and designated group No match 60006 Cutting time Indicates the time that this group is used in the cumulative value program being executed minute 60007 Life end signal 1 when lives of all tools in this group have been 0 1 reached 1 when all tools registered in designated group reach lives 60008 Life prediction 1 when new tool is selected with next command 0 1 signal in this group 1 when there is a tool for which ST is 0 Not used in the designated group and there are no tools for which ST is 1 Tools in use 215 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications Variable No Item Type Details Data range ea registration No Designate the 61500 Tool data flag group No Usage data count method length compensation 0 to FF H gt 60000 and method radius compensation method etc registration No parameters kkk bit 0 1 Tool length compensation data format Note the group 3 No method bit 2 3 Tool radius compensation data format and life are 0 Compensation No method common for the 1 Incremental value compensation groups amount method 2 Absolute value compensation amount method bit 4 5 Tool life management method 0 Usage time 1 No of mounts 2 No of usages 62000 Tool status Tool usage state 0 to 4 eee 0 Not used tool 1 Tool being used 2 Normal life tool 3 Tool error 1 4 Tool error 2 62500 Life data Life time or N
25. 1 NE 0 GOTO 100 3000 70 CALLHPROGRAMMER TEL 530 N100 lt Operator message gt CALL PROGRAMMER TEL 530 70 Note 1 Alarm number 0 is not displayed and any number exceeding 9999 cannot be indicated Note 2 The characters following the first alphabet letter in the right member is treated as the alarm message Therefore a number cannot be designated as the first character of an alarm message It is recommended that the alarm messages be enclosed in round parentheses 205 13 Program Support Functions ff Integrating run out time 3001 3002 13 5 User macro specifications The integrating run out time can be read during automatic operation or automatic start or values can be substituted by using variable numbers 3001 and 3002 Contents when power is switched Variable number Integrating run out time 1 Integrating run out time 2 Ge5P90i0 T alowable ns Entered in local Local variable variable 20 Initialization of contents 3001 0 Count condition At all times while power is ON In automatic start WHILE 3001LE 20 DO1 END1 M99 Allowable time portion DO1 END is repeated and when allowable time is reached operations jumps to M99 ff Suppression of single block stop and miscellaneous function finish signal waiting By substituting the values below in variable number 3003 it is possible to suppress single block stop in the subsequent bl
26. 1109 subs_M used to enable the alternate M codes is not selected the M96 and M97 codes remain effective for user macro interrupt control In either case the M codes for user macro interrupt control are processed internally and not output to the outside 251 13 Program Support Functions lY 13 10 Macro interrupt Parameters Refer to the Instruction Manual for details on the setting methods 1 2 Subprogram call validity 1229 set 01 bit 0 1 Subprogram type user macro interrupt 0 Macro type user macro interrupt Status trigger mode validity 1112 S_TRG 1 Status trigger mode 0 Edge trigger mode Interrupt type 2 validity 1113 INT_2 1 The executable statements in the interrupt program are executed after completion of execution of the current block Type 2 O The executable statements in the interrupt program are executed before completion of execution of the current block Type 1 Validity of alternate M code for user macro interrupt control 1109 subs_M 1 Valid 0 Invalid Alternate M codes for user macro interrupt Interrupt enable M code equivalent to M96 1110 M96_M Interrupt disable M code equivalent to M97 1111 M97_M M codes 03 to 97 except 30 are available Restrictions 1 2 If the user macro interrupt program uses system variables 5001 and after position information to read coordinates the coordinates pre read in the buffer are used If an interrupt is c
27. 1206 G1bF 1207 GibtL In this case the speed pattern is as follows The optimum corner speed is represented by VO VO is obtained from the pre interpolation acceleration deceleration tolerable value AV and the corner angle outside angle 0 i N01 G01X100 Y1 F500 N02 G01X100 Y 1 F500 av _GlbF GibtL To further reduce the corner speed VO to further improve the edge accuracy AC the VO value can be reduced in the vo Vo J Vox Voy machining parameter 8019 R COMPEN VO x 100 Ks 100 Ks R COMPEN VO Note In this case the cycle time may increase due to the increase in the time required for acceleration deceleration 260 13 Program Support Functions 13 12 High accuracy control 2 Arc speed clamp During circular interpolation even when moving at a constant speed acceleration is generated as the advance direction constantly changes When the arc radius is large compared to the commanded speed control is carried out at the commanded speed However when the arc radius is relatively small the speed is clamped so that the generated acceleration does not exceed the tolerable acceleration deceleration speed before interpolation calculated with the parameters This allows arc cutting to be carried out at an optimum speed for the arc radius F Commanded speed mm min F R Commanded arc radius mm F A0 Angle change per interpolation unit F AV AV Speed change per i
28. 3 threads inch 8 46666 When programmed with amp 10mm 2 10mm using metric input 6 7 Thread cutting N210 G90 GOX 200 Y 200 S50M3 S O PN211Z110 Cid N211 Z110 D N2135 MTS n KAO KAA N216 X 200 DC Mo o DATE 6 8 Uni directional positioning G60 Ej Function and purpose The G60 command can position the tool at a high degree of precision without backlash error by locating the final tool position from a single determined direction 49 6 Interpolation Functions Fa Command format G60 Xx Yy ZZ aa a 6 8 Uni directional positioning Additional axis ff Detailed description 1 2 The creep distance for the final positioning as well as the final positioning direction is set by parameter After the tool has moved at the rapid traverse rate to the position separated from the final position by an amount equivalent to the creep distance it move to the final position in accordance with the rapid traverse setting where its positioning is completed Positioning position gt Final advance direction Ag Start point gt Start point Stop once le G60creep distance The above positioning operation is performed even when Z axis commands have been assigned for Z axis cancel and machine lock Display only When the mirror image function is ON the tool will move in the opposite direction as far as the intermediate position due to the mirror image funct
29. 5041 5061 5101 5002 5022 5042 5062 5102 4103 4303 413 4313 Miscellaneous function M 5003 5023 5043 5063 5103 5004 5024 5044 5064 5104 5000 n 5020 n 5040 4n 5060 4n 5100 n Remarks reading during Yes No No Yes Yes movement Note1 The number of axes which can be controlled differs according to the specifications Note2 The last digit of the variable number corresponds to the control axis number 209 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications Basic machine coordinate system M Work coordinate system W Read i command End point coordinates i i W Work coordinate system Work R coordinates i Machine coordinate system Machine oe M coordinates 1 The positions of the end point coordinates and skip coordinates are positions in the work coordinate system 2 The end point coordinates skip coordinates and servo deviation amounts can be read even during movement However it must first be checked that movement has stopped before reading the machine coordinates and the work coordinates 3 The position where the skip signal is turned ON in the G31 block is indicated for the skip coordinates The end point position is indicated when the skip signal has not been turned ON For further details refer to the section on tool length measurement gommand Gauge etc Skip coordinates 210 1
30. 6 Interpolation Functions fez Example of program 6 2 Linear interpolation Example 1 Cutting in the sequence of P gt P2 P gt P gt P4 at 300 mm min feedrate Po gt P is for tool positioning Unit mm Input setting unit 0 001mm G90 GOO X20000 Y20000 Po gt Py G01 X20000 Y30000 F300 P gt P X30000 P2 gt P3 X 20000 Y 30000 P gt P X 30000 P gt P ff Programmable in position width command for linear interpolation This command commands the in position width for the linear interpolation command from the machining program The commanded in position width is valid in the linear interpolation command only when carrying out deceleration check e When the error detect switch is ON e When GO9 exact stop check is commanded in the same block e When G61 exact stop check mode is selected atta data dets AIR In position width Feedrate Linear interpolation coordinate value of each axis Note 1 Refer to the section 6 1 Positioning rapid traverse GOO for details on the in position check operation 32 6 Interpolation Functions 6 3 Plane selection 6 3 Plane selection G17 G18 G19 Ej Function and purpose The plane to which the movement of the tool during the circle interpolation including helical cutting and tool diameter compensation command belongs is selected By registering the basic three axes and the corresponding parallel axis as parameters a plane
31. G31 2 G31 3 and G04 and the correspondence between the G commands and skip signals can be set by parameters Command format G31 1 Xx Yy Zz ao Ff Xx Yy Zz ao Command format axis coordinate word and target coordinates Ff Feedrate mm min Same with G31 2 and G31 3 Ff is not required with G04 As with the G31 command this command executes linear interpolation and when the preset skip signal conditions have been met the machine is stopped the remaining commands are canceled and the next block is executed Detailed description 1 Feedrate G31 1 set with the parameter corresponds to 1176 skip1f G31 2 corresponds to 1178 skip2f and G31 3 corresponds to 1180 skip3f 2 Acommand is skipped if it meets the specified skip signal condition 3 The G31 n and G04 commands work the same as the G31 command for other than 1 and 2 above 4 The feedrates corresponding to the G31 1 G31 2 and G31 3 commands can be set by parameters 5 The skip conditions logical sum of skip signals which have been set corresponding to the G31 1 G31 2 G31 3 and G04 commands can be set by parameters Parameter setting Valid sklp slanal Skip when O signal is input 313 15 Measurement Support Functions EJ Example of operation 1 The multi step skip function enables the following control thereby improving measurement accuracy and shortening the time required for measurement 15 3 Multi step skip function1
32. G36 13 2 Special canned cycle G36 X x1 Y yl IrJOP AOKn X Y l Center coordinates of arc This will be affected by G90 G91 Radius r of arc The unit follows the input setting unit and is given with a positive No J Angle 8 of the point to be drilled first The CCW direction is positive The decimal point position will be the degree class If there is no decimal point the unit will be 0 001 Angle interval A0 When the value is positive the drilling will take place in the CCW direction and in the CW direction when negative The decimal point position will be the degree class If there is no decimal point the unit will be 0 001 No of holes n to be drilled 1 to 9999 can be designated The n holes aligned at the angle interval A9 will be drilled starting at point created by the X axis and angle 8 The circumference is that of the radius R centering on the coordinates designated with XX and Y As with the bolt hole circle the hole drilling operation at each hole will depend on the standard canned cycle The movement between hole positions will all be done in the GOO mode G36 will not hold the data even when the command is completed Example When input setting unit is 0 001mm NoO1 G91 No02 G81 Z 10000 R5000 F100 N003 G36 X300000 Y100000 300000 J10000 P15000 K6 Position before G36 is executed X 300mm 170 13 Program Support Functions ff Grid G37 1 13 2 Special canned cycle
33. Program Error PRAM IN ERROR e The specified parameter number or set data is illegal e An illegal G command address was input in parameter input mode e A parameter input command was input during fixed cycle modal or nose R compensation AXIS NOT RET e Acommand was issued to move an axis which has not returned to the reference point away from that reference point e Acommand was issued to an axis removal axis NO 2ND REF A command for second third or fourth reference point return was issued though there are no such command specifications COLLATION ERR One of the axes did not return to the start position when the origin point collate command G27 was executed G27 M ERROR An M command was issued simultaneously in the G27 command block G29 M ERROR An M command was issued simultaneously in the G29 command block NO CHUCK BARR The chuck barrier on command G22 was specified although the chuck barrier was undefined in the specification TAPE I O ERROR An error has arisen in the tape reader or alternatively in the printer during macro printing FILEI O ERROR A file of the machining program cannot be read NO AUTO TLM An automatic tool length measurement command G37 was executed though there are no such command specifications NO SKIP SPEC A skip command G31 was issued though there are no such command specifications 332 e Check the program e Execute reference point return manually
34. The tool change position return on off for the added axis can be set with parameter 1092 Tchg_A for the added axis Note however that the added axis always return to the tool change position only after the standard axes complete returning see the above table The added axis alone cannot return to the tool change position 253 13 Program Support Functions EJ Example of operates 13 11 Tool change position return 1 The figure below shows an example of how the tool operates during the tool change position return command Only operations of X and Y axes in G30 1 to G30 3 are figured 1 G30 1 command 2 G30 2 command 3 G30 3 command eee ooo o Tool changing position G30 1 The Z axis returns to the tool change position then the X and Y axes simultaneously do the same thing If tool change position return is on for an added axis the added axis also returns to the tool change position after the X Y and Z axes reach the tool change position The Z axis returns to the tool change position then the X axis does the same thing After that the Y axis returns to the tool change position If tool change position return is on for an added axis the added axis also returns to the tool change position after the X Y and Z axes reach the tool change position The Z axis returns to the tool change position then the X axis does the same thing After that the X axis returns to the tool change position If tool c
35. Therefore when the error is evaluated as in the following expression IF ABS 10 20 LT200000 and the difference between 10 and 20 falls within the designated range error both values should be considered equal Trigonometric functions Absolute errors are guaranteed with trigonometric functions but since the relative error is not under 10 care should be taken when dividing or multiplying after having used a trigonometric function 223 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 13 5 6 Control commands The flow of programs can be controlled by IF GOTO and WHILE DO ff Branching Format IF conditional expression GOTO n n sequence number in the program When the condition is satisfied control branches to n and when it is not satisfied the next block is executed IF conditional expression can be omitted and when it is control passes to n unconditionally The following types of conditional expressions are available i EQ j When i and j are equal When i and j are not equal gt When i is greater than j lt When iis less than j gt When i is j or more When Hi is j or less n of GOTO n must always be in the same program Program error P231 will result if it is not A formula or variable can be used instead of i j and n In the block with sequence number n which will be executed after a GOTO n command the sequence number must always be at the h
36. e The command was issued to an axis for which axis removal is validated so invalidate axis removal e Check the specifications e Check the program e An Mcode command cannot be issued in a G27 command block and so the G27 command and M code command must be placed in separate blocks e An Mcode command cannot be issued in a G29 command block and so the G29 command and M code command must be placed in separate blocks e Check the specifications e Check the power and cable for the connected device e Check the input output unit parameters e During memory operation the program saved in the memory may be corrupted Output all of the programs and tool data etc once and format the memory e Check the specifications e Check the specifications Appendix 2 Program Error Error No NOMULTI SKIP e Check the specifications A multiple skipping command G31 1 G31 2 or G31 3 was issued though there are no such command specifications SKIP SPEED FO e Specify the skip speed The skip speed is 0 TLM ILL AXIS command e Specify one axis No axis or more than one axis was specified in the automatic tool length measurement block T CMD IN BLOCK e Specify this T code before the automatic tool The T code is in the same block as the length measurement block automatic tool length measurement block NO T CMD BEFOR e Specify this T code before the block The T code was not yet specified in automatic tool length me
37. forward run 1st spindle basic spindle rotation speed change 2nd spindle synchronous spindle forward run 85 10 Spindle Functions ft Phase synchronization 1 When phase synchronization command with R address is commanded with the G114 1 command the synchronous spindle rotating at a random rotation speed will accelerate or decelerate to the rotation speed commanded beforehand for the basic spindle and will enter the rotation synchronization state Then the phase is aligned so that the rotation phase commanded with the R address is reached and the phase synchronization state is entered 10 7 Spindle synchronous control I 2 Ifthe basic spindle s commanded rotation speed is changed during the phase synchronization state acceleration deceleration will be carried out while maintaining the synchronization state following the spindle acceleration deceleration time constants set in the parameters and the commanded rotation speed will be achieved 3 Inthe phase synchronization state the basic spindle can be controlled to the constant surface speed even when two spindles are grasping one workpiece 4 Operation will take place in the following manner M23 S2 750 Forward rotate 2nd spindle synchronous spindle at 750 r min speed command M03 S1 1000 Forward rotate 1st spindle basic spindle at 1000 r min speed command G114 1 H1 D 2 Rxx Synchronize 2nd spindle synchronous spindle t
38. individual machine and so reference should be made to the machine specifications manual Note 4 Rapid traverse G00 deceleration check There are two methods for the deceleration check at rapid traverse commanded deceleration method and in position check method Select a method with the parameter 1193 inpos m When inpos 1 Upon completion of the rapid traverse GOO the next block will be executed after confirming that the remaining distances for each axis are below the fixed amounts Refer to the following drawing The confirmation of the remaining distance should be done with the imposition width Lr Lpg is the setting value for the servo parameter 2224 SV024 The purpose of checking the rapid traverse deceleration is to minimize the time it takes for positioning The bigger the setting value for the servo parameter 2224 SV024 the longer the reduced time is but the remaining distance of the previous block at the starting time of the next block also becomes larger and this could become an obstacle in the actual processing work The check for the remaining distance is done at set intervals Accordingly it may not be possible to get the actual amount of time reduction for positioning with the setting value SV024 27 6 Interpolation Functions 6 1 Positioning Rapid traverse m When inpos 0 Upon completion of the rapid traverse G00 the next block will be executed after the deceleration ch
39. 000 G90 G10 L2 P4 X 40 000 Y 40 000 147 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 4 Programmed offset input 4 When using one workpiece coordinate system as multiple workpiece coordinate systems 1 50 2 10 M98 P200 L5 Main program Mo2 o Subprogram 0200 N6 1 1 2 Basic machine coordinate system zero point 3rd time W 2nd time 1st time 1 wi Precautions 1 Even if this command is displayed on the screen the offset No and variable details will not be updated until actually executed N1 G90 G10 L10 P10R 100 N2 G43 Z 10000 H10 N3 GO X 10000 Y 10000 N4 G90 G10 L10 P10 R 200 The H10 offset amount is updated when the N4 block is executed 148 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles 13 1 1 Standard canned cycles G80 to G89 G73 G74 G76 Ej Function and purpose These standard canned cycles are used for predetermined sequences of machining operations such as positioning hole drilling boring tapping etc which are specified in a block The various sequences in the table below are provided for the standard canned cycles By editing the standard canned cycle subprogram the canned cycle sequence can be changed by the user The user can also register and edit an original canned cycle program For the standard canned cycle subprogram refer to the list of the canned cycle subprogram in the appendix of the operatio
40. 300mm nx 10 holes Note 1 If the P and K commands are PO or KO or if there is no P or K command the program error P221 will occur If the P or K value is more than four digits the last four digits will be valid Note 2 If an address other than G L N X Y I P J K F M S or B is programmed in the same block as the G37 1 command that address will be ignored Example G37 1 Xx Y 1 li4 P 1 Jj Kk Q Pcs ple y Pi Jj San er Note 3 If a group 0 G command is issued in the same block as the G37 1 command the command issued later is the priority Note 4 If there is a G72 to G89 command in the same block as the G37 1 command the canned cycle will be ignored and the G37 1 command will be executed 171 13 Program Support Functions 13 3 Subprogram control 13 3 Subprogram control M98 M99 13 3 1 Calling subprogram with M98 and M99 commands Ej Function and purpose Fixed sequences or repeatedly used patterns can be stored in the memory as subprograms which can then be called from the main program when required M98 serves to call subprograms and M99 serves to return operation from the subprogram to the main program Furthermore it is possible to call other subprograms from particular subprograms and the nesting depth can include as many as 8 levels Main program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram M98 P1000 Level 3 Level 4 _S_ Nesting depth The table below shows the functions whi
41. Before the canned cycle is commanded the spindle must be rotating in a specific direction with an M command M3 or M4 Note that for the G87 back boring command the spindle rotation command is included in the canned cycle so only the rotation speed command needs to be commanded beforehand If there is a basic axis additional axis or R data in the block during the canned cycle mode the hole drilling operation will be executed If there is not data the hole will not be drilled Note that in the X axis data if the data is a dwell G04 time command the hole will not be drilled Command the hole machining data Q P I J K in a block where hole drilling is executed Block containing a basic axis additional axis or R data The canned cycle can be canceled by the GOO to G03 or G33 command besides the G80 command If these are designated in the same block as the canned cycle the following will occur Where 00 to 03 and 33 are m and the canned cycle code is n Gm Gn X_Y_Z R Q P L F Execute Ignore Execute Ignore Record Gm Gn X__Y Z RQ P L F Ignore Execute Ignore Record Note that for the G02 and G03 commands R will be handled as the arc radius If an M function is commanded in the same block as the canned cycle command the M code and MF will be output during the initial positioning The next operation will be moved to with FIN finish signal If there is a No of times designated the above control will be executed only
42. CNC s Tp Servo system position loop time constant s Kf Feed forward coefficient 259 13 Program Support Functions ff Optimum speed control 1 Optimum corner deceleration Combined speed pattern X axis speed pattern Y axis speed pattern 13 12 High accuracy control By calculating the angle of the seam between blocks and carrying out acceleration deceleration control in which the corner is passed at the optimum speed highly accurate edge machining can be realized When the corner is entered that corners optimum speed optimum corner speed is calculated from the angle with the next block The machine decelerates to that speed in advance and then accelerates back to the command speed after the corner is passed Corner deceleration is not carried out when blocks are smoothly connected In this case the criteria for whether the connection is smooth or not can be designated by the machining parameter 8020 DCC ANGLE When the corner angle is larger than the parameter DCC ANGLE for a linear linear connection or for a circle etc and the corner is passed at a speed V the acceleration AV occurs due to the change in the direction of progress V Speed before entering the corner AV Speed change at the corner Speed after the corner is passed The corner angle V is controlled so that this AV value becomes less than the pre interpolation acceleration deceleration tolerable value set in the parameters
43. G19 19 G90 90 G91 91 G94 94 G95 95 G20 20 G21 21 G40 40 G41 41 G42 42 G43 43 G44 44 G49 49 G80 80 G73 to 74 G76 76 G81 to G89 81 to 89 G98 98 G99 99 G54 to G59 54 to 59 G61 to G64 61 to 64 G61 1 61 1 G66 66 G66 1 66 1 G67 67 G96 96 G97 97 G50 1 50 1 G51 1 51 1 Group 3G modal pre read 1 91 0 Group 3G modal now being executed 2 90 0 13 Program Support Functions ff Other modals Using variable numbers 4101 to 4120 it is possible to read the model commands assigned up to the block immediately before Similarly it is possible to read the modals in the block being executed with variable numbers 4301 to 4320 Variable number Variable number Modal F i Modal information 4101 4301 4111 4311 Tool length offset No H 13 5 User macro specifications 4102 4302 4112 4312 O OS 4104 4304 4114 4314 Sequence number N 4105 4305 4115 4315 Program number O 4106 4306 4116 4316 mos ne O OOO e a oooO ams Paso o O Eo ff Position information Using variable numbers 5001 to 5104 it is possible to read the servo deviation amounts skip coordinates work coordinates machine coordinates and end point coordinates in the block immediately before Position End point information wis alr of Machine Work Skip melve ocx rdinate coordinate coordinate Gevietion immediately coo amount before 5001 5021
44. G20 the compensation amount must be set to 0 002 0 05 25 4 0 002 Note 2 Since the data before the change will be executed at the command unit after the change command the F speed command for the change so that it is the correct speed command for the command unit system applied after the change 20 5 Position Commands 5 3 Decimal point input 5 3 Decimal point input EJ A Q Function and purpose This function enables the decimal point command to be input It assigns the decimal point in millimeter or inch units for the machining program input information that defines the tool paths distances and speeds A parameter 1078 Decpt2 selects whether type 1 minimum input command unit or type 2 zero point is to apply for the least significant digit of data without a decimal point Command format OOOOOOOO Metric command OOOCO OOCODO Inch command Detailed description 1 The decimal point command is valid for the distances angles times speeds and scaling rate in machining programs Note only after G51 2 In decimal point input type 1 and type 2 the values of the data commands without the decimal points are shown in the table below Command unit system Type 1 Type 2 cunit 10 1 um 10 inch 10 1 mm inch X1 cunit 1 3 The valid addresses for the decimal points are X Y Z U V W A B C I J K E F P Q and R However P is valid only during scaling For detail
45. G37 1 X x1 Y y1 I Dx P nx J Dy K ny X Y Designation of start point coordinates This will be affected by G90 G91 Interval Dx of the X axis The unit will follow the input setting unit If Dx is positive the interval will be in the forward direction looking from the start point and when negative will be in the reverse direction looking from the start point No of holes nx in the X axis direction The setting range is 1 to 9999 Interval Dy of the Y axis The unit will follow the input setting unit If Dy is positive the interval will be in the forward direction looking from the start point and when negative will be in the reverse direction looking from the start point No of holes ny in the Y axis direction The setting range is 1 to 9999 The nx points on a grid are drilled with an interval Ax parallel to the X axis starting at the position designated with X Y The drilling operation at each hole position will depend on the standard canned cycle so the hole drilling data hole machining mode and hole machining data must be held beforehand The movement between hole positions will all be done in the GOO mode G37 1 will not hold the data even when the command is completed Example When input setting unit is 0 01mm G91 G81 Z 10000 R5000 F20 G37 1 X300000 Y 100000 150000 P10 J100000 K8 Position before ae ny 8 holes G37 is executed ete X po y1 100mm STOR PAE TER ie 100mm eee a i Ax 50mm X
46. GOO Operation 2 This is an operation done after positioning is completed at the initial hole and when G87 is commanded the M10 command is output from the control unit to the machine When this M command is executed and the finish signal FIN is received by the control unit the next operation will start If the single block stop switch is ON the block will stop after positioning Operation 3 The tool is positioned to the R point by rapid traverse Operation 4 Hole machining is conducted by cutting feed Operation 5 This operation takes place at the hole bottom position and it differs according to the canned cycle mode Possible actions include spindle stop M05 spindle reverse rotation M04 spindle forward rotation M03 dwell and tool shift Operation 6 The tool is retracted to the R point Operation 7 The tool is returned to the initial pint at the rapid traverse rate Whether the canned cycle is to be completed at operation 6 or 7 can be selected by the following G commands G98 ue Initial level return G99 oe R point level return These are modal commands and for example if G98 is commanded once the G98 mode will be entered until G99 is designated The initial state when the NC is ready is the G98 mode The hole machining data will be ignored if X Y Z or R is not commanded This function is mainly used with the special canned cycled Canned cycle addresses and meanings Designation of dwell time at hole bottom posi
47. Linear gt Circular 90 lt 0180 Tool center path i Center of circular e Center of circular x 109 12 Tool Offset Functions Circular gt Linear 90 lt 0 lt 180 Center of circular J Program path _ s Point of intersection Circular gt Circular 90 lt 0 lt 180 Center of circular Zz _ Tool center ath Point of P intersection Center of circular 110 12 3 Tool radius compensation Circular gt Linear 0 lt 0 lt 90 Program path J Center of circular Circular gt Circular 0 lt 0 lt 90 Program path vo i Bs Tool center path Center of circular 12 Tool Offset Functions 2 Machining an inner wall Linear gt Linear Obtuse angle Program path gt lt Point of Tool center path intersection Program path N Point of N Tool center path __ an intersection we es e v Center of circular Circular gt Linear Obtuse angle a Program path si Peas 5 a H ra Point of intersection _Tool center path e Center of circular 111 12 3 Tool radius compensation Linear gt Linear Acute angle Center of circular Tool center path _ N Point of pea 17 Circular gt Linear Acute angle e Center of circular Program path gt Tool center path 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensatio
48. M 01 8000 Setting to call O8000 with type 0 M 02 8001 M98 type during M20 command M 03 199999999 ce ie M 04 199999999 Setting to call 08001 with type 0 M 05 199999999 TA M98 type during M21 command e Set parameters not being used as M 10 199999999 shown on left Differences between M98 and G65 commands The argument can be designated for G65 but not for M98 The sequence number can be designated for M98 but no for G65 G66 and G66 1 M98 executes a subprogram after all the commands except M P H and L in the M98 block have been executed but G65 branches to the subprogram without any further operation When any address except O N P H or L is included in the M98 block single block stop results This is not the case with G65 The level of the M98 local variables is fixed but it can be varied in accordance with the nesting depth for G65 1 for instance has the same significance either before or after M98 but a different significance in each case with G65 The M98 nesting depth extends up to 8 levels in combination with G65 G66 and G66 1 The G65 nesting depth extends up to only 4 levels in combination with G66 and G66 1 Macro call command nesting depth Up to 4 nesting levels are available for macro subprogram calls based on simple call or modal call The argument with a macro call instruction is valid only on the called macro level Since the nesting depth for macro calls extends up to 4 levels the
49. MRC The number of blocks in the shape program of the compound type fixed cycle is over 50 327 e Check the specifications e Correct the program e Issue the spindle speed command S when the tapping fixed cycle command G84 G74 G84 G88 is given e Check connection to the main spindle unit e Check that the main spindle encoder exists e Specify the pitch data and the number of threads by F or E command e Check the pitch or the number of threads per inch e Check the specification e Delete the lathe cutting cycle command e The radius command value in the lathe cutting cycle command must be smaller than the axis shift amount e Set a chamfering amount not exceeding the cycle e Check the specification e Delete the following G codes from this subprogram that is called with the compound type fixed cycle commands G70 to G73 G27 G28 G30 G31 G33 fixed cycle G code e Remove G02 and G03 from the first move block of the finish shape program in multiple fixed cycle l e The number of blocks in the shape program called by the compound type fixed cycle commands G70 to G73 must be decreased below 50 Appendix 2 Program Error CONF ERR MRC The compound type fixed cycle G70 to G73 shape program could not cut the work normally because it defined an abnormal shape C FORMAT ERR A command value of the compound type fixed cycle G70 to G76 is illegal NO PAT CYC SPC A compoun
50. Minimum command 1 000 1 00000 f n 1 0000 1 00000 1 oo unit v 1 000 v 1 00000 a 1 00 a 1 0000 r 1 00000 a 1 000 0 001 to 0 00001 to 0 00001 to 0 000001 to 0 1 to 999 999 999 99999 0 03 10 999 99 99 9999 99 99999 2559999 999 45 6 Interpolation Functions 6 7 Thread cutting Thread cutting Inch input B 0 0001inch C 0 00001inch E threads E threads inch inch Minimum command 1 1 0000 1 000000 1 0000 1 1 00000 1 1 000000 1 1 0000 unit a 1 0000 it 1 000000 a 1 0000 a 1 00000 it 1 000000 1 1 0000 Command tante 0 0001 to 0 000001 to 0 0255 to 0 00001 to 0 000001 to 0 25401 to g 99 9999 39370078 9999 9999 3937009 3937009 999 9999 Note 1 Itis not possible to assign a lead where the feed rate as converted into per minute feed exceeds the maximum cutting feed rate F inch rev E inch rev The thread cutting will start by the one rotation synchronous signal from the encoder installed on the spindle The spindle speed should be kept constant throughout from the rough cutting until the finishing If the feed hold function is employed during thread cutting to stop the feed the thread ridges will lose their shape For this reason feed hold does not function during thread cutting If the feed hold switch is pressed during thread cutting block stop will result at the end point of the block following the block in which thread cutting is completed n
51. Per revolution feed is 2 to the setting c Spindle rotation speed during retract of synchronous tapping cycle Address Meaning of Command range address unit Spindle rotation 0 to 99999 r min The data is held as modal speed during information retract If the value is smaller than the speed rotation speed the speed rotation speed value will be valid even during retract If the spindle rotation speed is not O during retract the tap retract override value will be invalid 152 13 Program Support Functions f Positioning plane and hole drilling axis The canned cycle has basic control elements for the positioning plane and hole drilling axis The positioning plane is determined by the G17 G18 and G19 plane selection command and the hole drilling axis is the axis perpendicular X Y Z or parallel axis to the above plane Plane selection Positioning plane Hole aa axis G17 X Y Xp Yp 13 1 Canned cycles G18 Z X Zp Xp E E G19 Y 7 Yp Zp XD Xp Yp and Zp indicate the basic axes X Y and Z or an axis parallel to the basic axis A random axis other than the hole drilling axis can be commanded for positioning The hole drilling axis is determined by the axis address of the hole drilling axis commanded in the same block as G81 to G89 G73 G74 or G76 The basic axis will be the hole drilling axis if there is no designation Example 1 When G17 XY plane is selected and the axis parallel
52. Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles e G85 Boring Program G85 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ffi G98 mode GO0Z r G99 mode No movement mode mode The operation stops at after the 1 2 and 4 or 5 commands during single block operation f G86 Boring Program G86 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ff Pp M5 Spindle stop e mode GOZ z r G99 mode G0Z z M3 Spindle forward rotation 46 C98 G99 mode mode The operation stops at after the 1 2 and 7 commands during single block operation 159 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles g G87 Back boring Program G87 Xx Yy ZZ Rry lq Jq Ff Note Take care to the z and r designations The z and r symbols are reversed There is no R point return GO Xx1 Yy M19 Spindle orient GO Xq Ya Shift GO Zr G1 X q Y qe Ff Shift M3 Spindle forward rotation G1 ZZ Ff M19 Spindle orient GO Xq Yq2 Shift eee mode GOZ z r1 G99 mode GOZ r442z GO X q Y qe Shift M3 Spindle forward rotation 1 X1 Y1 3 Xq Yq2 OONODOORBRWND oO an h h N The operation stops at after the 1 4 6 and 11 commands during single block operation When this command is used high precision drilling machining that does not scratch the machining surface can be done Positioning to the hole bottom and the escape return after cut
53. Sequence numbers Invalid Program parameter input data numbers O Invalid Programnumbers Offset number G10 Offset amount G10 Valid Synchronous spindle phase shiftamount Spindle function codes Maximum spindle clamp speed Constant surface speed control surface speed Program parameter input word type data 2 bytes Invalid Toolfunctioncodes ooo o O Coordinate position data Dwell time Coordinate position data Dwell time Y Vaid Coordinate position data o z Vaid Coordinate position data Note 1 All decimal points are valid for the user macro arguments Address Application Remarks 24 6 Interpolation Functions 6 1 Positioning Rapid traverse 6 Interpolation Functions 6 1 Positioning Rapid traverse G00 EJ Function and purpose This command is accompanied by coordinate words It positions the tool along a linear or non linear path from the present point as the start point to the end point which is specified by the coordinate words FF Command format GOO Xx Yy Zz aa li a represents additional axis X Y Z Q Represent coordinates and could be either absolute values or incremental values depending on the setting of G90 G91 In position width A decimal point command will result in a program error This is valid only in the commanded block A block that does not contain this address will follow the parameter 1193 inpos settings The range is 1
54. Start Point Designation Synchronizing Type 2 G116 Ej Function and purpose FF Starting of the other part system can be delayed until the own part system reaches the designated start point The synchronization point can be set in the middle of a block Command format InL1 G116 X Z C InL1 Synchronizing command G116 G command Xo Z C_ Start point Command axis and workpiece coordinate values for checking synchronization of own part system Detailed description _ lt Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of the own part system S The start point check is executed only for the axis designated by G116 Example L1 G116 X100 Once the own part system reaches X100 the other part system will start The other axes are not checked 3 The own part system starts first when synchronizing is performed 4 The other part system waits for the own part system to move and reach the designated start point and then starts Designated start point Own part system J G116 Synchronized operation Other part system _L _J m Designated start point Own part system k 1G116 Al Synchronized I operation Other part system ort m ma mm t 273 13 Program Support Functions 13 15 Start Point Designation Synchronizing Type 2 5 When the start point designated by G116 is not on the next block movement path of the own system th
55. The override set in the parameter is automatically applied at the deceleration range Ci and corner R section for inside offset with automatic corner R There is no angle check 65 7 Feed Functions EJ Application example 1 Line line corner 7 10 Automatic corner override Program Tool center The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci 2 Line arc outside corner Program Tool center The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci 3 Arc inside offset line corner Program The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci Note The deceleration range Ci where the override is applied is the length of the arc with an arc command 4 Arc inside offset arc outside offset corner Program x P Tool center The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci 66 7 Feed Functions Raf Relation with other functions 7 10 Automatic corner override Function Override at corner Cutting feed override Automatic corner override is applied after cutting feed override has been applied Override cancel Automatic corner override is not canceled by override cancel a clamp Valid after automatic corner override Dyr o run Automatic corner override is invalid Synchronous feed Automatic corner override is applied to the synchronous feedrate Thread cutting Automatic corner override is invalid G31 skip Progr
56. X uses or sign and represents 5 digits to the left of the decimal 5 digits above the decimal point so it s 00045 but the leading zeros and the mark have been omitted GO is possible too 3 Data Formats 3 3 Program address check function 3 3 Program address check function Ej Function and purpose l Ezy The program can be checked in word units when operating machining programs Detailed description 1 Address check This function enables simple checking of program addresses in word units If the alphabetic characters are continuous the program error P32 will occur Availability of this function is selected by the parameter 1227 aux1 1 bit4 Note that an error will not occur for the following e Reserved words e Comment statements Example of program 1 Example of program for address check Example 1 When there are no numbers following an alphabetic character G28 X gt An error will occur Change to G28 X0 etc Example 2 When a character string is illegal TEST gt An error will occur Change to TEST etc 3 4 Tape memory format Ej Function and purpose 1 Storage tape and significant sections The others are about from the current tape position to the EOB Accordingly under normal conditions operate the tape memory after resetting The significant codes listed in Table of tape codes in 3 1 Tape Codes in the above significant section are actually stored into the me
57. Y50 MDI interrupt lt lt _ Vv N3 G3 X40 Y 40 R70 S1000 M3 2 Interrupt with movement The offset vectors are automatically re ca Iculated at the movement block after interrupt With linear interrupt N1 G41D1 N2 X20 Y50 MDI interrupt _V N3 G3 X40 Y 40 R70 X50 Y 30 With circular interrupt N1 G41 D1 N2 X20 Y50 MDI interrupt lt _ y N3 G3 X40 Y 40 R70 G2 X40 Y 40 R70 G1 X4 130 12 Tool Offset Functions ff Manual interrupt 1 Interrupt with manual absolute OFF Tool path after interrupt 12 3 Tool radius compensation The tool path is shifted by an amount equivalent to the interrupt amount 2 Interrupt with manual absolute ON In the incremental value mode the same operation results as with manual absolute OFF In the absolute value mode however the tool returns to its original path at the end point of the block following the interrupted block as shown in the figure gt Interrupt 131 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 12 3 5 General precautions for tool radius compensation T w Precautions 1 2 3 Designating the offset amounts The offset amounts can be designated with the D code by designating an offset amount No Once designated the D code is valid until another D code is commanded If an H code is designated the program error P170 No COMP No will occ
58. acceleration deceleration control method Kf 0 Path for post interpolation acceleration deceleration control method Note Ifthe machine vibrates when Kf is set to 1 Kf must be lowered or the servo system must be adjusted 263 13 Program Support Functions ff Arc entrance exit speed control There are cases when the speed fluctuates and the machine vibrates at the joint from the straight line to arc or from the arc to straight line This function decelerates to the deceleration speed before entering the arc and after exiting the arc to reduce the machine vibration If this is overlapped with corner deceleration the function with the slower deceleration speed is valid The validity of this control can be changed with the base specification parameter 1149 cireft The deceleration speed is designated with the base specification parameter 1209 cirdcc 13 12 High accuracy control Example 1 When not using corner deceleration lt Program gt lt Operation gt G61 1 N1 N2 N1 G01 X 10 F3000 N2 G02 X 5 Y 5 J 2 5 N3 G01 Y 10 N3 lt Deceleration pattern gt Speed Commanded speed Arc clamp speed Arc deceleration speed gt 264 13 Program Support Functions 13 12 High accuracy control Example 2 When using corner deceleration lt Program gt lt Operation gt G61 1 i N1 N1 G01 X 10 F3000 ok N2 G02 X5 Y 5 12 5 N3 N3 G01 X10 lt Deceleration pat
59. block even when all the vectors at the end point of its own block have been deleted i When in the figure the N2 interference check is conducted the N2 end point vectors are all deleted but the N3 end point vectors are regarded as valid Program error P153 now occurs at the N1 end point Alarm stop ii In a case such as that 1234 shown in the figure the tool will move in the reverse direction at N2 Program error P153 occurs after N1 execution 142 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation b When avoidance vectors cannot be created i Even when as in the figure the conditions for creating the avoidance vectors are met it may still be impossible to create these vectors or the interference vectors may interfere with N3 Program error P153 will occur at the N1 end point when the vector intersecting angle is more than 90 intersection c When the program advance direction and the advance direction after compensation are reversed In the following case interference is still regarded as occurring even when there is actually no interference When grooves which are narrower than the tool radius or which have parallel or widening walls are programmed Program path Tool center path APTT 143 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 4 Programmed offset input 12 4 Programmed offset input G10 G11 Ej Function and purpose The tool offset and workpiece offset
60. canceled by adding the multi step skip function 8 1 Per second dwell G04 Q a Function and purpose The machine movement is temporarily stopped by the program command to make the waiting time state Therefore the start of the next block can be delayed The waiting time state can be canceled by inputting the skip signal Command format G04 X__ orGO04P_ X P Dwell time The input command unit for the dwell time depends on the parameter Detailed description When designating the dwell time with X the decimal point command is valid The dwell time command range is as follows 0 001 99999 999 s The dwell time setting unit applied when there is no decimal point can be made 1s by setting 1 in the parameter 1078 Decpt2 This is effect only for X and P for which the decimal command is valid 4 When a cutting command is in the previous block the dwell command starts calculating the dwell time after the machine has decelerated and stopped When it is commanded in the same block as an M S T or B command the calculation starts simultaneously 5 The dwell is valid during the interlock 6 The dwell is valid even for the machine lock 7 The dwell can be canceled by setting the parameter 1173 dwlskp beforehand If the set skip signal is input during the dwell time the remaining time is discarded and the following block will be executed em ae po YS aH g Previous block cutting command
61. center path Program path End point End point 115 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 12 3 2 Other operations during tool radius compensation fe Insertion of corner arc An arc that uses the compensation amount as the radius is inserted without calculating the point of intersection at the workpiece corner when G39 corner arc is commanded Point of Inserted intersection aS Inserted TTN circular s Tool center path i circular Program path I ERTE T T n a l Je TERS Jr Compensation DN Ir Compensation amount OX 7 amount S 7 SZN sp s ig 8 ENERE ENN 1 _ Program path N jTool center path Ai s U4 Slee Point of T intersection With G39 command No G39 command With G39 command No G39 command For outer side compensation For inner side compensation Tool center path N5 G28x0Y0 G91G01G42X20 Y20 D1F 100 G39X40 G39Y40 G39X 40 Program path Y 40 G40X 20 Y 20 M02 D1 5 000 fe Changing and holding of compensation vector The compensation vector can be changed or held during tool diameter compensation by using the G38 command 1 Holding of vector When G38 is commanded in a block having a movement command the point of intersection will not be calculated at the program end point and instead the vector of the previous block will be held G38 Xx Yy This can be use
62. common for the group 214 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications d Registration No M System 1 to 200 L System 1 to 16 e Data type M System L System Remarks P Number of Number of registered registered tools tools Life current value Life current value Tool selected No Tool selected No Number of remaining registered tools Signal being Cutting time Cutting time cumulative cumulative value minute value minute Life end signal Life end signal e Life prediction Life prediction signal signal Number of remaining registered tools Variable No item Tye Details Datarange 60001 Number of Common to Total number of tools registered in each group O to 200 registered tools system 60002 Life current value For each group Usage time No of uses of tool being used 0 to 4000 Designate Spindle tool usage data or usage data for tool in Minutes group No use 60003 0 to 9999 times 60000 60003 Tool selected No Registration No of tool being used 0 to 200 Spindle tool registration No If spindle tool is not data of the designated group ST 1 first tool or if ST 1 is not used the first tool of ST 0 When all tools have reached their lives the last tool 60004 Number of No of first registered tool that has not reached its 0 to 200 remaining life registered tools 60005 Signal being 1 when this group is used in program being 0 1 executed executed
63. contain movement but must not be used with G commands other than G21 G22 G54 to G59 G90 or G91 If an illegal L No or offset No is commanded the program errors P172 and P170 will occur respectively If the offset amount exceeds the maximum command value the program error P35 will occur Decimal point inputs can be used for the offset amount The offset amounts for the external workpiece coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system are commanded as distances from the basic machine coordinate system zero point The workpiece coordinate system updated by inputting the workpiece coordinate system will follow the previous modal G54 to G59 or the modal G54 to G59 in the same block L2 can be omitted when the workpiece offset is input Do not command G10 in the same block as fixed cycles and subprogram call commands This will cause malfunctioning and program errors fey Example of program 1 Input the offset amount eee eee GIOLIOP10R 12345 G10L10P05R98765 G10L10P30R2468 gt H10 12345 H05 98765 H30 2468 2 Updating of offset amount Example 1 Assume that H10 1000 is already set N1 G01 G90 G43 Z 100000 H10 Z 101000 N2 G28 Z0 N3 G91 G10 L10 P10R 500 is added ae G01 G90 G43 Z 100000 Z 101500 The mode is the G91 mode so 500 145 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 4 Programmed offset input Example 2 Assume that H10 1000 is already set M
64. droop amount for CNC internal acceleration deceleration With the pre interpolation acceleration deceleration control method the path error is eliminated and a circular path faithful to the command results because interpolation is carried out after the acceleration deceleration control Note that the tracking lag due to the position loop control in the servo system is not the target here The following shows a comparison of the circle radius reduction error amounts for the conventional post interpolation acceleration deceleration control and pre interpolation acceleration deceleration control in the high accuracy control mode R Commanded radius mm AR Radius error mm F Cutting feedrate mm min The compensation amount of the circle radius reduction error AR is theoretically calculated as shown in the following table Post interpolation Pre interpolation acceleration deceleration control acceleration deceleration control normal mode high accuracy control mode Linear acceleration deceleration Linear acceleration deceleration 2 2 ssh 2 1 pa 2l Sqn 2 E Reza Ts T leo Ra Te 1 KP l a Because the item Ts can be ignored by using Exponential function the pre interpolation acceleration deceleration acceleration deceleration control method the radius reduction error amount can be reduced b Item Tp can be negated by making Kf 1 1 ae Rezi T T E Ts Acceleration deceleration time constant in the
65. during spindle synchronous control The synchronous spindle s rotation command is also valid during spindle synchronous control When spindle synchronous control is commanded if neither a forward run command nor reverse run command is commanded for the synchronous spindle the synchronization standby state will be entered without starting the synchronous spindle s rotation If the forward run command or reverse run command is input in this state the synchronous spindle will start rotation The synchronous spindle s rotation direction will follow the direction commanded in the program If spindle stop is commanded for the synchronous spindle during spindle synchronization control when both the forward run and reverse run commands are turned OFF the synchronous spindle rotation will stop The rotation speed command S command and constant surface speed control are invalid for the synchronous spindle during spindle synchronous control Note that the modal is updated so these will be validated when the spindle synchronization is canceled The constant surface speed can be controlled by issuing a command to the basic spindle even during spindle synchronous control 84 10 Spindle Functions ft Rotation synchronization 1 When rotation synchronization control command with no R address is commanded with the G114 1 command the synchronous spindle rotating at a random rotation speed will accelerate or decelerate to the rotation speed comm
66. fixed cycle programs without the prior approval of the machine manufacturer AN When programming the multi part system take special care to the movements of the programs for other part systems Contents ga Oc ae Py Coo nee rane Ses ete ae ne Ree RRR re erie nS nr phere Senn nn eRe or eae ner Rep ener Parent nem 1 1 1 Coordinate word and control AXIS scc5ccccteiis aide cnseaetecapaterastanndeteaakodivesacavenndtedeanieeerabaeeonebes 1 1 2 Coordinate systems and coordinate zero point SyYMDOIS cceeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeteeeteeeeaes 2 2 Input Command WES shies 8 ote ect tcc cate cere teehee Batt eet tt aa 3 2A nputcommand LUN S csi eye aranana a a ea ae E aea E a TE eaaa PN a n 3 2 2 INPUT setting UNITS aeiaaeeao aaa aaaea e taka RE aaae ela ae Vaaa aiea 3 3 Data FOMA OaE ds a a a a Ea a E a ae araa a E aaan SS 4 31 TapE COGS oiana aeaa eaaa aa aaa a a Eaa AE Aaaa a a paan 4 3 2 Program formals miisi aa aa a E a aaa aA aa A as 7 3 3 Program address check function cid tiscitea assetcie teases ati oes oneeyabenciciveiass ten eutenaberiade 9 3 4 Tape memory form en eunea erat can iaaa rana E VEE Sa ETRA anA EERE Ea 9 3 5 Optional Block SKID 3 scai d n aa e a eA EER a 10 3 6 Program sequence block numbers O N cccsssceessceceseeeseeeeeseeeeseeaesseneeesseeeessneeeees 11 37 Rany PN n aa a a a a a a r ate gee e a A aE 12 Ded MEW COGS ISIS E E E E ETA E A cvomedneacuas 13 3 9 Precautions before starting machining
67. for specific objectives and so they cannot be used as general auxiliary commands This therefore leaves 92 miscellaneous functions which are usable as such commands Reference should be made to the instructions issued by the machine manufacturer for the actual correspondence between the functions and numerical values When the MOO M01 M02 and M30 functions are used the next block is not read into the pre read buffer due to pre read inhibiting An M function can be specified together with other commands in the same block and when such a function is specified together with a movement command in the same block there are two possible sequences in which the commands are executed Which of these sequences actually applies depends on the machine specifications 1 The M function is executed after the movement command 2 The M function is executed at the same time as the movement command Processing and completion sequences are required in each case for all M commands except M96 M97 M98 and M99 The 8 M functions used for specific purposes will now be described Program stop M00 When the NC has read this function it stops reading the next block Whether such machine functions as the spindle rotation and coolant supply are stopped or not differs according to the machine in question Re start is enabled by pressing the automatic start button on the machine operation board Whether resetting can be initiated by MOO depends on the machine sp
68. format G96 Ss Pp Constant surface speed ON Ss Surface speed 1 to 99999999 m min Pp Assignment of constant surface speed control axis G97 Constant surface speed cancel Detailed description 1 The constant surface speed control axis is set by parameter 1181 G96_ax 0 Fixed at 1st axis P command invalid 1 1st axis 2 2nd axis 3 3rd axis 2 When the above mentioned parameter is not zero the constant surface speed control axis can be assigned by address P Example With G96_ax 1 Program Constant surface speed control axis G96 S100 1st axis G96 100 P3 3 Example of selection program and operation G90 G96 G01 X50 Z100 S200 The spindle speed is controlled so that the peripheral speed is 200m min 2 oN na POS ENOG F200 S500 The spindle speed is controlled to 500r min M02 The modal returns to the initial setting 4 Constant surface speed control can be commanded on the selected spindle nth spindle the 2nd spindle Select which spindle the selected spindle or 2nd one the commands are made to by the spindle selection G codes G43 1 and G44 1 Select which spindle the selected spindle or 2nd one is valid as the initial state with the parameter base specifications parameter 1199 Sselect 5 Select whether calculating the surface speed at rapid traverse command is performed constantly or only at the block end poing 80 10 Spindle Functions 10 6 Spindle clamp s
69. independently for one offset No as shown below The tool length offset amount is set with H and the tool diameter offset amount with D H1 b1 c1 D1 d1 e1 H2 b2 c2 D2 d2 e2 Hn bn cn Dn dn en Tool diameter D Tool length rH Position offset Shape offset Wear offset Shape offset Wear offset amount amount amount amount CAUTION A If the tool offset amount is changed during automatic operation including during single block stop it will be validated from the next block or blocks onwards 100 12 Tool Offset Functions ff Tool offset No H D This address designates the tool offset No 1 12 1 Tool offset H is used for the tool length offset and D is used for the tool position offset and tool diameter offset The tool offset No that is designated once does not change until a new H or D is designated The offset No can be commanded once in each block If two or more Nos are commanded the latter one will be valid The No of offset sets that can be used will differ according to the machine For 40 sets Designate with the H01 to H40 D01 to D40 numbers If a value larger than this is set the program error P170 will occur The setting value ranges are as follows for each No The offset amount for each offset No is preset with the setting and display unit Input setting Shape offset amount Wear offset amount unit Metric system Inch system Metric system Inch
70. invalid during execution of G31 block However setting the base specification parameter 21101 add01 bit3 to 1 allows the override and dry run The G31 command is unmodal and so it needs to be commanded each time o a 6 Ifthe skip signal is input during G31 command start the G31 command will be completed immediately When a skip signal has not been input until the G31 block completion the G31 command will also be completed upon completion of the movement commands 7 When the G31 command is issued during nose R compensation program error P608 will result 8 When there is no F command in the G31 command and the parameter speed is also zero program error P603 will result 9 If only the Z axis is commanded when the machine lock is ON or the Z axis cancel switch is ON the skip signal will be ignored and execution will continue as far as the end of the block 308 15 Measurement Support Functions EJ Execution of G31 G90 GOO X 100000 YO G31 X 500000 F100 G01 Y 100000 G31 X0 F100 Y 200000 G31 X 50000 F100 Y 300000 XO 15 2 Skip function 500000 10000 AY fe Detailed description Readout of skip coordinates The coordinate positions for which the skip signal is input are stored in the system variables 5061 1st axis to 506n nth axis so these can be used in the user macros 2 G90 G00 X 100 G31 X 200 F60 Skip command 101 5061 Skip signal inpu
71. is designated with the tool offset No Each offset amount is input from the setting and display unit or the program Side view Tool diameter compensation 98 12 Tool Offset Functions ff Tool offset memory There are two types of tool offset memories for setting and selecting the tool offset amount The type used is determined by the machine maker specifications The offset amount or offset amount settings are preset with the setting and display unit Type 1 is selected when parameter 1037 cmdtyp is set to 1 and type 2 is selected when set to WOM 12 1 Tool offset Classification of length offset diameter compensation Type 1 Not applied Not applied Type 2 Applied Applied Classification of shape offset wear compensation Type of tool offset memory k a Reference Reference 7 Sy Shape Tool length i offset im I SS en poe ee Z PESE Wear amount Tool diameter compensationl 99 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 1 Tool offset Type 1 One offset amount corresponds to one offset No as shown on the right Thus these can be used commonly regardless of the tool length offset amount tool diameter offset amount shape offset amount and wear offset amount D1 a H1 a D2 a H2 a Dn a Hn a The shape offset amount related to the tool length wear offset amount shape offset related to the tool diameter and the wear offset amount can be set
72. is turned ON the program error P62 will occur A speed command is required as the movement will be controlled with the G01 speed 12 Do not command a G code for which a P code is used in the same block as G54 1 The P code will be used in the prioritized G command 13 When number of workpiece offset sets additional specifications is not added the program error P39 will occur when the G54 1 command is executed 294 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset 14 When number of workpiece offset sets additional specifications is not added the program error P172 will occur when the G10 L20 command is executed 15 The local coordinate system cannot be used during G54 1 modal The program error P438 will occur when the G52 command is executed during G54 1 modal 16 A new workpiece coordinate system P1 can be set by commanding G92 in the G54 1 P1 mode However the workpiece coordinate system of the other workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 G54 1 and P2 to P48 will move in parallel with it and a new workpiece coordinate system will be set 17 The offset amount of the extended workpiece coordinate system is assigned to the variable number as shown in Table 1 Table 1 Variable numbers of the extended workpiece coordinate offset system l 1st axis to 6th axis 4st axis to 6th axis CAUTION A If the workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during singl
73. length offset tool position offset and tool radius compensation sets The H command is ignored during the tool radius compensation and only the D command is valid The compensation will be executed within the plane designated with the plane selection G code or axis address 2 axis and axes other than those included in the designated plane and the axes parallel to the designated plane will not be affected Refer to the section on plane selection for details on selecting the plane with the G code 105 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 12 3 1 Tool radius compensation operation ff Tool radius compensation cancel mode The tool radius compensation cancel mode is established by any of the following conditions 1 After the power has been switched on 2 After the reset button on the setting and display unit has been pressed 3 After the M02 or M30 command with reset function has been executed 4 After the tool radius compensation cancel command G40 has been executed The offset vectors are zero in the compensation cancel mode and the tool nose point path coincides with the programmed path Programs including tool radius compensation must be terminated in the compensation cancel mode ff Tool radius compensation start start up Tool radius compensation starts when all the following conditions are met in the compensation cancel mode 1 A movement command is issued after the G41o0r G42 command has be
74. less Review the program and correct it so that the number of the DO END statement does not exceed 27 Review the program and correct it so that the DO and END are paired off properly During tape operation a program which includes a WHILE or GOTO statement cannot be executed and so the memory operation mode is established instead Review the program Review the program Review the program Review the variable names in the program and correct them Correct the program so that the name is not duplicated Check the specifications Check the specifications Remove the corner rounding or chamfering command from the program Check the specifications Replace the block succeeding the corner rounding chamfering command by movement command block Appendix 2 Program Error Error No CORNER SHORT In the corner rounding or chamfering command the movement distance was shorter than the value in the corresponding command P384 CORNER SHORT When the corner rounding or chamfering command was input the movement distance in the following block was shorter than the length of the corner rounding or chamfering GO G33 INCORN A block with corner rounding chamfering was given during GOO or G33 modal NO GEOMETRIC A geometric command was issued though there are no geometric specifications e Make the corner rounding or chamfering less than the movement distance since this distance is shorter than the corner
75. made to the section on the G31 coasting amount and compensation provided As in the case of 1 the coasting amount based on the delay error time t2 cannot be calculated and this generates a measuring error 311 15 Measurement Support Functions ff Examples of compensating for coasting 1 Compensating for skip signal input coordinates 15 2 Skip function 110 Skip feedrate 111 Response delay time t 2 G31 X100 F100 Skip command G04 Machine stop check 101 5061 Skip signal input coordinate readout 102 110 111 60 Coasting based on response delay time 105 101 102 108 Skip signal input coordinates 2 2 Compensating for work coordinates 110 Skip feedrate 111 Response delay time t 112 Position loop time constant Tp 2 G31 X100 F100 Skip command G04 Machine stop check 101 5061 Skip signal input coordinate readout 102 110 111 60 Coasting based on response delay time 103 110 112 60 Coasting based on position loop time constant 105 101 102 108 Skip signal input coordinates 2 312 15 Measurement Support Functions 15 3 Multi step skip function1 15 3 Multi step skip function1 G31 n G04 kJ FF Function and purpose The setting of combinations of skip signals to be input enables skipping under various conditions The actual skip operation is the same as with G31 The G commands which can specify skipping are G31 1
76. needed for circular interpolation a Plane selection 00 Is there an arc parallel to one of the XY ZX or YZ planes b Rotation direction Clockwise G02 or counterclockwise G03 c Arc end point coordinates Given by addresses X Y Z d Arc center coordinates Given by addresses J K incremental commands e Feed rate cece Given by address F 36 6 Interpolation Functions EJ Example of program Example 1 6 4 Circular interpolation Feedrate Circle center F 500mm min J 50mm Start point end point G02 _J50000 F500 Example 2 Feedrate Arc center End point F 500mm min J 50mm X50 Y50mm G91 G02 X50000 Y50000 J50000 F500 3 4 command 37 6 Interpolation Functions ff Plane selection The planes in which the arc exists are the following three planes refer to the detailed drawings and are selected with the following method 6 4 Circular interpolation XY plane G17 Command with a plane selection G code ZX plane G18 Command with a plane selection G code YZ plane G19 Command with a plane selection G code 77 Precautions for circular interpolation 1 The terms clockwise G02 and counterclockwise G03 used for arc operations are defined as a case where in a right hand coordinate system the negative direction is viewed from the position direction of the coordinate axis which is at right angles to the plane in qu
77. occur if the same spindle as that commanded for the basic spindle selection is designated The rotation direction of the synchronous spindle in respect to the basic spindle is commanded with the D sign A program error P610 will occur if a spindle not serially connected is commanded A program error P35 will occur if a value exceeding the command range is commanded The commanded shift amount is effective in the clockwise direction of the basic spindle The commanded shift amount s minimum resolution is as follows For semi closed Only gear ratio 1 1 360 4096 For full closed 360 4096 K K Spindle and encoder gear ratio If there is no R command the phases will not be aligned A program error P35 will occur if a value exceeding the command range is commanded If the commanded value is smaller than the acceleration deceleration time constant set with the parameters the value set in the parameters will be applied 10 Spindle Functions ff Rotation and rotation direction 1 10 7 Spindle synchronous control I The rotation speed and rotation direction of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle during spindle synchronous control are the rotation speed and rotation direction commanded for the basic spindle Note that the rotation direction of the synchronous spindle can be reversed from the basic spindle through the program The basic spindle s rotation speed and rotation direction can be changed
78. out can be only one of 2 values 1 or O 1 contact closed 0 contact open All the input signals from 1000 to 1031 can be read at once by reading out the value of variable number 1032 Similarly the input signals 1200 to 1231 1232 to 1263 and 1264 to 1295 can be read by reading the values of the variable numbers 1033 to 1035 Variable numbers 1000 to 1035 1200 to 1295 are for readout only and cannot be placed in the left side member of their arithmetic formula Input here refers to input to the control unit To use the macro interface function by part system set the bit selection parameter 6454 bitO Refer to 2 for the signals provided for each part system Macro interface common to part systems input aus No of Interface System No of Interface variable points input signal variable points input signal System variable Register R24 bit 0 Register R24 bit 1 Register R24 bit 2 Register R24 bit 3 Register R24 bit 4 Register R24 bit 5 Register R24 bit 6 Register R24 bit 7 Register R24 bit 8 Register R24 bit 9 Register R24 bit 10 Register R24 bit 11 Register R24 bit 12 Register R24 bit 13 Register R24 bit 14 Register R24 bit 15 Interface input signal Register R24 R25 Register R26 R27 Register R28 R29 Register R30 R31 194 Register R25 bit 0 Register R25 bit 1 Register R25 bit 2 Register R25 bit 3 Register R25 bit 4 Register R25 bit 5 Register R25 bit 6 Register R25 bit 7 Register R
79. rewritten and it will be valid after spindle synchronization is canceled 9 If the phase offset request signal is turned ON before the phase shift is calculated and then spindle phase synchronization is executed the shift amount will not be calculated and incorrect operation results 10 The spindle rotation speed command S command and the constant surface speed control for the synchronous spindle will become valid when the spindle synchronous control is canceled Thus special attention should be made because the synchronous spindle may do different action than before when the spindle synchronous control is canceled 11 The spindle Z phase encoder position parameter sppst is invalid ignored when phase offset is carried out This parameter will be valid when the phase offset request signal is OFF 12 If spindle phase synchronization is started while the phase shift calculation request signal is ON the error M01 OPERATION ERROR 1106 will occur 13 Turn the phase shift calculation request signal ON when the basic spindle and synchronous spindle are both stopped If the phase shift calculation request signal is ON while either of the spindles is rotating the error M01 OPERATION ERROR 1106 will occur 14 The phase offset request signal is ignored when the phase shift calculation request signal Y435 is ON 15 M01 OPERATION ERROR 1106 will occur when a spindle No out of specifications is designated in the R registers
80. shift to the high accuracy control mode G61 1 even in modes other than the high accuracy control mode modes G61 to G64 x aL 257 13 Program Support Functions ff Pre interpolation acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration control is carried out for the movement commands to suppress the impact when the machine starts or stops moving However with conventional post interpolation acceleration deceleration the corners at the block seams are rounded and path errors occur regarding the commanded shape In the high accuracy control function mode acceleration deceleration is carried out before interpolation to solve the above problems This pre interpolation acceleration deceleration enables machining on a machining path that more closely follows the command The acceleration deceleration time can be reduced because constant inclination acceleration deceleration is carried out 13 12 High accuracy control 1 Basic patterns of acceleration deceleration control in linear interpolation commands fF Acceleration deceleration pattern a Because of the constant time constant acceleration deceleration the rising edge falling edge becomes more gentle as the command speed becomes slower b The acceleration deceleration time constant can be independently set for each axis Linear type exponential function type or both can be selected Note that if the time constant of each axis is not set to the same value an e
81. system 1015 cunit 100 99999 99mm 9999 999 inch 9999 99 mm 999 999 inch 1015 cunit 10 9999 999mm 999 9999 inch 999 999 mm 99 9999 inch 101 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 2 Tool length offset cancel 12 2 Tool length offset cancel G43 G44 G49 Ej Function and purpose The end position of the movement command can be offset by the preset amount when this command is used A continuity can be applied to the program by setting the actual deviation from the tool length value decided during programming as the offset amount using this function Command format Q When tool length offset is When tool length offset is G43 Zz Hh Tool length offset start G44 Zz Hh Tool length offset start G49 Zz Tool length offset cancel G49 ZZ Detailed description a 1 Tool length offset movement amount The movement amount is calculated with the following expressions when the G43 or G44 tool length offset command or G49 tool length offset cancel command is issued Z axis movement amount G43 Zz Hn z h Offset in direction by tool offset amount G44 Zz Hh z h Offset in direction by tool offset amount G49 Zz Zz h Offset amount cancel th Offset amount for offset No h Regardless of the absolute value command or incremental value command the actual end point will be the point offset by the offset amount designated for the programmed movement command end point coo
82. the interrupted program contains no move and miscellaneous MSTB commands it resumes operation after completion of the interrupt program from the point in the block where the interrupt was caused If an interrupt signal UIT is input during execution of a miscellaneous function MSTB command the NC system waits for a completion signal FIN The system thus executes a move or miscellaneous function command MSTB in the interrupt program only after input of FIN Type 2 e When an interrupt signal UIT is input the program completes the commands in the current block then transfers control to the interrupt program e f the interrupt program contains no move and miscellaneous function MSTB commands the interrupt program is executed without interrupting execution of the current block However if the interrupt program has not ended even after the execution of the original block is completed the system may stop machining temporarily 246 13 Program Support Functions TE e sii ll I cro interrupt If the interrupted program contains no move z operation from where it left in block Aal the reset commands lock 2 block 2 block 3 13 Program Support Functions ff Calling method User macro interrupt is classified into the following two types depending on the way an interrupt program is called These two types of interrupt are selected by parameter 1229 set01 bit0 Both types of interrupt ar
83. the present block becomes 0 although an external signal error detect can detect that the tracking error of the acceleration deceleration circuit has reached 0 and the following block can be executed When the in position check has been made valid selected by parameter 1193 inpos during the deceleration check it is first confirmed that the tracking error of the acceleration deceleration circuit has reached 0 then it is checked that the position deviation is less than the parameter setting value 2204 SV024 and finally the following block is executed It depends on the machine as to whether the error detect function can be activated by a switch or M function and so reference should be made to the instructions issued by the machine maker clamp Function and purpose This function exercises control over the actual cutting feedrate in which override has been applied to the cutting feedrate command so that the speed clamp value which has been preset independently for each axis is not exceeded Note Speed clamping is not applied to synchronous feed and thread cutting 59 7 Feed Functions 7 8 Exact stop check 7 8 Exact stop check G09 EJ a R Function and purpose In order to prevent roundness during corner cutting and machine shock when the tool feedrate changes suddenly there are times when it is desirable to start the commands in the following block once the in position state after the machine has decelerated and
84. to the Z axis is set as the W axis G81 W__ The W axis is used as the hole drilling axis G81 Z 3 The Z axis is used as the hole drilling axis G81 No Z or W The Z axis is used as the hole drilling axis Note 1 The hole drilling axis can be fixed to the Z axis with parameter 1080 Dril_Z Note 2 Change over the hole drilling axis in the canned cycle canceled state In the following explanations on the movement in each canned cycle mode the XY plane is used for the positioning plane and the Z axis for the hole drilling axis Note that all command values will be incremental values the positioning plane will be the XY plane and the hole drilling axis will be the Z axis 153 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles a G81 Drilling spot drilling Program G81 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rri Ff1 lit Jjt Yy ZZ Ff G98 mode GOZ z1411 G99 mode GOZ z G98 G99 mode mode The SAA stops at after the 1 2 and 4 commands during single block operation cA a Vaid free SOL 3 Invatia Valid b G82 Drilling counter boring Program G82 XXx Yy ZZ Rf Ff Pp di4 Jj1 P Dwell designation GO XX Yy GO Zr G1 ZZ Ff G4 Pp Dwell G98 mode GOZ Z141 G99 mode GOZ z G98 G99 mode mode Pee Te pattern vais oa Piva Piva ere Pee The operation stops at after the 1 2 and 5 commands during single block operation
85. trigger mode Edge trigger mode Accepting user macro interrupt signal UIT 248 13 Program Support Functions ff Returning from user macro interrupt M99 P__ An M99 command is issued in the interrupt program to return to the main program Address P is used to specify the sequence number of the return destination in the main program The blocks from the one next to the interrupted block to the last one in the main program are first searched for the block with sequence number Np2 If it is not found all the blocks before the interrupted one are then searched Control thus returns to the block with sequence number Np2 that is found first in the above search This is equivalent to M99P__ used after M98 calling 13 10 Macro interrupt 249 13 Program Support Functions ff Modal information affected by user macro interrupt If modal information is changed by the interrupt program it is handled as follows after control returns from the interrupt program to the main program Returning with M99 The change of modal information by the interrupt program is invalidated and the original modal information is not restored With interrupt type 1 however if the interrupt program contains a move or miscellaneous function MSTB command the original modal information is not restored Returning with M99P__ The original modal information is updated by the change in the interrupt program even after returning to the main progr
86. turned ON When the recalculation request is ON the program that has been pre read is reprocessed 17 5 Position Commands 5 1 Position command methods 5 Position Commands 5 1 Position command methods G90 G91 Ej Function and purpose By using the G90 and G91 commands it is possible to execute the next coordinate commands using absolute values or incremental values The R designated circle radius and the center of the circle determined by J K are always incremental value commands g Command format G90 G91 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 aot G90 Absolute value command G91 Incremental command a Additional axis ff Detailed description 1 Regardless of the current position in the absolute value mode it is possible to move to the position of the workpiece coordinate system that was designated in the program N 1 G90 GOO X0 YO In the incremental value mode the current position is the start point 0 and the movement is made only the value determined by the program and is expressed as an incremental value N 2 G90 G01 X200 Y50 F100 N 2 G91 G01 X200 Y50 F100 Using the command from the 0 point in the workpiece coordinate system it becomes the same coordinate command value in either the absolute value mode or the incremental value mode 2 For the next block the last G90 G91 command that was given becomes the modal G90 N 3 X100 Y100 The axis moves to the workpiece coo
87. unit is B 0 0001 inch and inch system L100000 Note 3 The binary type parameters must be converted into byte type data and commanded with a decimal data after address D Example 1 Binary data 010101015 55y 85p oe eeccteeeeeees Command 85 Example 2 ASCII code M 010011018 4Dy 775 use Command 77 B indicates Binary H indicates Hexadecimal and D indicates Decimal P No 2 Axis independent parameter Parameter Data l pere ooon we bas T sonra oe Axis bit parameter 2 i Same as above Axis removal do No d bit OFF or i it2 Soft limit d1 No d bit ON l _ invalid d 0 7 Soft limit 916 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation User stroke end lower unit limit Soft limit 912 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation e stroke end upper unit 8206 Tool az 99999999 x 2 Interpolation unit 318 Appendix 1 Program Parameter Input N No Correspondence Table P No 2 Axis independent parameter Parameter Data o ome S te 2013 99999999 x 2 Interpolation junit unit 2015 tIml 300 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation juni lunit 2017 tap_g Word 0 25 200 00 rad s Word 1 60000 99999999 x 2 erptato iuni 99999999 x 2 Interpolation unl 99999999 x 2 Interpolation iuni 99999999 x 2 Interpolation uni 2061 OT 1B 324 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation unit 2062 OT 1B 99999999 x 2 Interpol
88. used only for integers For comparison of numeric values with decimals GE GT LE and LT should be used 189 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 13 5 4 Types of variables lY lY Common variables Common variables can be used commonly from any position Number of the common variables sets depends on the specifications Refer to 13 4 Variable commands for details Local variables 1 to 33 These can be defined as an lt argument gt when a macro subprogram is called or used locally within main programs and subprograms They can be duplicated regardless of the relationship existing between macros up to 4 levels G65 Pp Lh lt argument gt P4 Program number h Number of repetitions The lt argument gt is assumed to be Aal Bb1 Cc1 Zzi The following table shows the correspondences between the addresses designated by lt argument gt and the local variable numbers used in the user macro main bodies Call command Local Argument variable address number i Ost Oe Gis eae ee a ee Cae 20 em em ar ae ae 22 23 24 25 26 a ee ee T Argument specification I Call command Local Argument variable address number ie ea Ec ei A ee i ee Cc 29 X in the above table denotes an argument address which cannot be used However provided that the G66 1 mode has been established an argument address denoted by the asterisk can be added fo
89. 00 If the parameters for up to 4 gear stages are set in advance the gear stage corresponding to the S command will be selected and the gear signal will be output The analog voltage is calculated in accordance with the input gear signal 1 Parameters corresponding to individual gears Limit rotation speed maximum rotation speed shift rotation speed and tapping rotation speed 2 Parameters corresponding to all gears 0 Orientation rotation speed minimum rotation speed 75 10 Spindle Functions 10 3 Spindle functions S8 digits 10 3 Spindle functions S8 digits Ej Function and purpose These functions are assigned with an 8 digit 0 to 99999999 number following the address S and one group can be assigned in one block The output signal is a 32 bit binary data with sign and start signal Processing and completion sequences are required for all S commands 76 10 Spindle Functions 10 4 Multiple spindle control 10 4 Multiple spindle control 10 4 1 Multiple spindle control EJ lY Function and purpose Spindle rotation command for up to 7 spindles is provided Although the S command is normally used to designate the spindle rotation speed the Sn command is also used for multiple spindle control S commands can be issued from the machining program of any part systems Number of usable spindles differ the machine model confirm the specifications of the model used Comm
90. 0000 Y300000 2150000 For input setting unit 0 00i1mm Note 1 When parameter 1086 GOlIntp is set to 0 the path along which the tool is positioned is the shortest path connecting the start and end points The positioning speed is automatically calculated so that the shortest distribution time is obtained in order that the commanded speeds for each axis do not exceed the rapid traverse rate When for instance the Y axis and Z axis rapid traverse rates are both 9600mm min the tool will follow the path in the figure below if the following is programmed G91 GOO X 300000 Y200000 With an input setting unit of 0 001mm End point Actual Y axis rate 6400mm min Y Start point Unit mm ik lt ee Actual X axis rate 9600mm min 26 6 Interpolation Functions 6 1 Positioning Rapid traverse Note 2 When parameter 1086 GOlntp is set to 1 the tool will move along the path from the start point to the end point at the rapid traverse rate of each axis When for instance the Y axis and Z axis rapid traverse rates are both 9600mm min the tool will follow the path in the figure below if the following is programmed G91 GOO X 300000 Y200000 With an input setting unit of 0 001mm Actual Y axis rate 9600mm min Start point Unit mm fx Actual X axis rate 9600mm min Note 3 The rapid traverse rate for each axis with the GOO command differs according to the
91. 02 Y coordinates update 102 102 104 X axis drilling direction 103 gt 103 reversal 103 103 106 106 1 pte 106 1 gt 106 No of holes in Y direction 1 Note 1 The processing time can be shortened by programming in one block 234 13 Program Support Functions 13 6 G command mirror image 13 6 G command mirror image G50 1 G51 1 EJ a a Function and purpose When cutting a shape that is symmetrical on the left and right programming time can be shortened by machining the one side and then using the same program to machine the other side The mirror image function is effective for this For example when using a program as shown below to machine the shape on the left side a symmetrical shape can be machined on the right side by applying mirror image and executing the program Base shape program Shape when machining program for left side is executed after the mirror command Mirror axis Command format G51 1 Xx Yy Zz Mirror image ON G50 1 Xx Yy Zz Mirror image OFF Xx Y y Zz Mirror image command axis Detailed description 1 The coordinate word for G51 1 is commanded with the mirror image command axis and the coordinate value commands the mirror image center coordinate with an absolute value or incremental value 2 The coordinate word in G50 1 expresses the axis for which mirror image is to be turned OFF and the coordinate value is ignor
92. 1 zero point return position Basic machine coordinate X G54 500 system zero point G54 reference point zero point G55 reference point zero point G54 X 500 Y 500 G55 X 2000 Y 1000 The offset settings of workpiece coordinate systems can be changed any number of times They can also be changed by G10 L2 Pp1 Xx1 Zz1 Handling when L or P is omitted G10 L2 Pn Xx Yy Zz jn 0 Set the offset amount in the external workpiece coordinate system n 1 to 6 Set the offset amount in the designated workpiece coordinate system Others The program error P35 will occur G10 L2 Xx Yy Zz Set the offset amount in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system When in G54 1 modal the program error P33 will occur G10 L20 Pn XxYyZz n 1 to 48 Set the offset amount in the designated workpiece coordinate system Others The program error P35 will occur G10 L20 Xx Yy Zz Set the offset amount in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system When in G54 to G59 modal the program error P33 will occur G10 Pn Xx Yy Zz L2 workpiece offset will be judged if there is no L value G10 Xx Yy Zz 293 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset 7 A new workpiece coordinate system 1 is set by issuing the G92 command in the G54 workpiece coordinate system 1 mode At the same time the other workpiece coordinate systems 2 through 6 G55 to
93. 1 Refer to the following documents for details on handling MELDAS C6 C64 C64T Instruction Manual BNP B2259 Precautions for Safety Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker this manual related manuals and attached documents before installation operation programming maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use Understand this numerical controller safety items and cautions before using the unit This manual ranks the safety precautions into DANGER WARNING and CAUTION A DANGER When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is A WARNING mistaken When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may A CAUTION occur if handling is mistaken Note that even items ranked as AN CAUTION may lead to major results depending on the situation In any case important information that must always be observed is described DANGER N WARNING N CAUTION 1 Items related to product and manual For items described as Restrictions or Usable State in this manual the instruction manual issued by the machine manufacturer takes precedence over this manual An effort has been made to describe special handling of this machine but items that are not described must be interpreted as not possible This manual is written on the assumption that all option
94. 1 G41 G42 Tool center path Linear return Tool center path nmm SeS G42 Program path Arc exceeding 360 due to compensation In the case below it is possible that the arc may exceed 360 a With offset direction selection based on G41 G42 b I J K was commanded in G40 Program Tool center r paih In cases like this the tool center path will pass path a through a section where the arc is doubled due to the compensation and a section will be left uncut _ Uncut section 118 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation fe Command for eliminating offset vectors temporarily When the following command is issued in the compensation mode the offset vectors are temporarily eliminated and a return is then made automatically to the compensation mode In this case the compensation is not canceled and the tool goes directly from the intersection point vector to the point without vectors or in other words to the programmed command point When a return is made to the compensation mode it goes directly to the intersection point 1 Reference point return command Intermediate point N6 G41 Q N5 G91 G01 X60 Y30 N6 G28 X50 Y 40 4 Temporarily no compensation vectors at N7 X30 Y 60 intermediate point N8 X70 Y40 Reference point when there is no intermediate point 2 G33 thread cutting command Tool nose radius compensation does not apply to the G33 blo
95. 1 G94 G95 G40 G42 Gao G code O G command Arc and G41 Arc and G43 commanded G42 cause G49 cause last is valid error P151 error P70 G00 G03 1 Group 1 C O Positioning es a Also possible Radius is The G49 interpolation Update during arc compen movement in modal sated and the arc modal then moves _ moves with G01 O G04 is G04 is Group 1 executed executed modal is G40 G42 are G43 G49 are updated ignored ignored G04 is executed G10 G11 are G10 G11 are executed executed G10 G11 G40 G42 are G43 G49 are Program data ignored ignored setting G command commanded last is valid O Plane axis Plane selection changeover during radius compensa tion causes error P112 G17 G19 334 Appendix 3 Order of G Function Command Priority G code 08 01 02 03 05 06 07 G43 G44 Commanded G00 G03 G17 G19 G90 G91 G94 G95 G20 G21 G40 G42 Gao G code Possible in Inch metric same block changeover G27 G30 are G27 G30 are executed executed G40 G42 are G43 G49 are ignored G31 G31 3 Skip commanded last is valid O G37 is G37 executed executed executed Automatic tool G00 G33 are length ignored measurement O Arc and G41 O G command G42 cause commanded error P151 last is valid G40 G42 a41 and G42 Plane axis O Tool radius in arc modal changeover compensation cause error during radius P151 compensa tion causes error P112 Thread cutting 335 A
96. 1000 G01 F1000 S500 MO3 X150 Program path Tool center path 2 When there are no movement commands at the compensation start G40 2 N1 G41 1150 D1 N2 G91 X100 Y100 N3 X150 124 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 3 When I J has been commanded in the G41 G42 mode G17 plane 2 G17 G41 G91 N100 G41 G00X150 J50 N110 G02 1150 N120 G00 X 150 2 1 I J type vector Program path 2 Intersection point calculation type vector Tool center path Tool path after interrupt Reference a G18 plane 2 G18 G41 G91 N100 G41 G00 Z150 150 N110 G02 KS5O N120 G00 Z 150 b G19 plane 2 G19 G41 G91 N100 G41 G00 Y150 K50 N110 G02 J50 N120 G00 Y 150 2 125 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 4 When I J has been commanded in a block without movement G41 D1 G01 F1000 G91 X100 Y100 G41 150 X150 G40 fF Direction of offset vectors 1 In G41 mode Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I J through 90 to the left from the forward direction of the Z axis axis 3 as seen from the zero point Example 1 With 1100 Example 2 With I 100 100 0 IJ direction vector direction C100 Uri alrection Offset vector direction 2 In G42 mode Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I J through 90 to the right from th
97. 10000 order The tool offset data are configured as data with a decimal point in the same way as for other variables Consequently this decimal point must be commanded when data below the decimal point is to be entered Programming example Common variables Tool offset data 101 1000 10001 101 Deo ne H1 1000 000 102 10001 102 1000 0 Example 1 Calculation and tool offset data setting G28 Z0 T01 Zero point return MO6 Tool change spindle T01 f Start point memory ESEO Rapid traverse to safety GOO Z 500 position G31 Z 100 F100 Skip measurement A Measured distance Poeemi AA Teer ss calculation and tool offset Sensor data setting Note In this example no consideration is given to the delay in the skip sensor signal 5003 is the Z axis start point position and 5063 is the Z axis skip coordinates and indicated is the position at which the skip signal is input while G31 is being executed 203 13 Program Support Functions ff Work coordinate system offset 13 5 User macro specifications By using variable numbers 5201 to 532n it is possible to read out the work coordinate system offset data or to substitute values Note The number of axes which can be controlled differs according to the specifications The last digit in the variable number corresponds to the control axis number External workpiece offset External work offset 5201 5202 5203 5204 5200 Specfoatons a
98. 1129 PwrVC1 Use of multiple variables When the user macro specifications applied variable numbers can be turned into variables multiple use of variables or replaced by lt formula gt Only one of the four basic arithmetic rule x operations can be conducted with lt formula gt Example 1 Multiple use of variables 1 10 10 20 20 30 1 10 from 1 10 5 1 10 20 from 10 20 Therefore 5 20 or 5 30 1000 10 20 from 10 20 1 20 10 20 20 30 5 1 10 from 1 10 1 5 Therefore 20 5 or 20 1000 Example 2 Example of multiple designation of variables 10 5 In which case 10 100 5 lt Formula gt 10 100 is handled in the 100 same manner as 10 100 188 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications Example 3 Replacing variable numbers with lt formula gt 10 5 10 1 1000 In which case 6 1000 10 1 1000 In which case 4 1000 10 3 100 In which case 15 100 10 2 100 In which case 3 100 fraction rounded up ff Undefined variables Variables applying with the user macro specifications such as variables which have not been used even once after the power was switched on or local variables not quoted by the G65 G66 or G66 1 commands can be used as lt vacant gt Also variables can forcibly be se
99. 20 573 574 SQRT 14 14 15 15 Note In order to increase the accuracy proceed with the operation inside parentheses 15 Absolute value 576 1000 ABS 577 ABS 576 3 70 4 50 580 ABS 4 3 1 100 11 BIN 1 12 BCD 1 17 Rounding off 21 ROUND 14 3 ROUND or RND 22 ROUND 14 3 23 ROUND 14 3 24 ROUND 14 3 25 ROUND 14 3 26 ROUND 14 3 27 ROUND 14 3 28 ROUND 14 3 21 FIX 14 3 fractions below 22 FIX 14 3 decimal point 23 FIX 14 3 FIX 24 FIX 14 3 25 FIX 14 3 26 FIX 14 3 27 FIX 14 3 28 FIX 14 3 19 Adding fractions 21 FUP 14 3 less than 1 FUP 22 FUP 14 3 23 FUP 14 3 24 FUP 14 3 25 FUP 14 3 26 FUP 14 3 27 FUP 14 3 28 FUP 14 3 101 LN 5 102 LN 0 5 103 LN 5 21 Exponents EXP 104 EXP 2 105 EXP 1 106 EXP 2 14 Square root SQR or SQRT 16 BIN BCD 18 Discarding 20 Natural logarithms LN 222 31 623 31 623 22 361 190 444 1000 000 1000 00 120 000 0 693 P282 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications ff Arithmetic accuracy As shown in the following table errors will be generated when performing arithmetic operations once and these errors will accumulate by repeating the operations Arithmetic format Type o
100. 213 13 Program Support Functions lY 13 5 User macro specifications Number of workpiece machining times The number of workpiece machining times can be read using variables 3901 and 3902 By substituting a value in these variables the number of workpiece machining times can be changed Variable No Data setting range umero wonge gooo 9 0 to 999999 value Note Always substitute a positive value for the number of workpiece machining times Tool life management 1 Definition of variable numbers a Designation of group No 60000 The tool life management data group No to be read with 60001 to 64700 is designated by substituting a value in this variable If a group No is not designated the data of the group registered first is read This is valid until reset b Tool life management system variable No Read 60001 to 64700 Variable No or data type Data class 6 Tool life management c Details of data classification Remarks 00 Forcontrol___ Forcontrol___ ___ Refer to following types Refer to registration No Refer to registration No Refer to registration No Refer to registration No Refer to registration No Usage data USAR slime Noel Refer to registration No times Toolength Refer to registration No compensation data Tool radius ES compensation data E a o5 Auxiliary data Refer to registration No The group No L System method and life data are
101. 25 bit 8 Register R25 bit 9 Register R25 bit 10 Register R25 bit 11 Register R25 bit 12 Register R25 bit 13 Register R25 bit 14 Register R25 bit 15 No of points System variable 13 Program Support Functions Interface input signal Register R26 bit 0 Register R26 bit 1 Register R26 bit 2 Register R26 bit 3 Register R26 bit 4 Register R26 bit 5 Register R26 bit 6 Register R26 bit 7 Register R26 bit 8 Register R26 bit 9 Register R26 bit 10 Register R26 bit 11 Register R26 bit 12 Register R26 bit 13 Register R26 bit 14 Register R26 bit 15 variable 13 5 User macro specifications No of points System Interface input signal Register R27 bit 0 Register R27 bit 1 Register R27 bit 2 Register R27 bit 3 Register R27 bit 4 Register R27 bit 5 Register R27 bit 6 Register R27 bit 7 Register R27 bit 8 Register R27 bit 9 Register R27 bit 10 Register R27 bit 11 Register R27 bit 12 Register R27 bit 13 Register R27 bit 14 Register R27 bit 15 System No of System No of Interface input Register R28 bit 0 Register R28 bit 1 Register R28 bit 2 Register R28 bit 3 Register R28 bit 4 Register R28 bit 5 Register R28 bit 6 Register R28 bit 7 Register R28 bit 8 Register R28 bit 9 Register R28 bit 10 Register R28 bit 11 Register R28 bit 12 Register R28 bit 13 Register R28 bit 14 Register R28 bit 15 195 Register R29 bit 0 Register R29 bit 1 Register R29 bit 2 Register R29 bit 3 Register R29 bit 4 Regi
102. 3 X20 Y 50 X50 Y 20 G41 intersection gt N8 movement gt X30 Y60 D10 G4 X1000 F100 S500 M3 X20 Y 50 X50 Y 20 N Point of Ne intersection N7 Block without movement 120 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 2 When command is assigned in the compensation mode When the blocks without movement follows up to 3 blocks in succession in the compensation mode and there is no pre reading prohibit M code is issued the intersection point vectors will be created as usual N6 G91 X100 Y200 N7 G04X P1000 Block without N8 X200 movement rd Block N7 is executed N6 here When 4 or more blocks without movement follow in succession or if there is a pre read inhibit M code the offset vectors are created perpendicularly at the end point of the previous block N6 X100 Y200 N7 G4 X1000 N8 F100 N9 S500 N10 M4 N11 W100 Block without movement In this case a cut results 3 When commanded together with compensation cancel N6 X100 Y200 N7 G40 M5 N8 X100 Y50 121 12 Tool Offset Functions ff When I J K are commanded in G40 1 If the final movement command block in the four blocks before the G40 block is the G41 or G42 mode it will be assumed that the movement is commanded in the vector I J or K direction from the end point of the final movement command After interpolating between the hy
103. 3 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 4 The tool nose position where the tool offset and other such factors are not considered is indicated as the end point position The tool reference point position with consideration given to tool offset is indicated for the machine coordinates work coordinates and skip coordinates Skip signal G31 fe feedrate Work coordinate k system Work Input coordinates ris coordinates of skip signal M Machine coordinates For check stop and then proceed to read For O reading is possible during movement The position of the skip signal input coordinates is the position in the work coordinate system The coordinates in variable numbers 5061 to 5064 memorize the moments when the skip input signal during movement was input and so they can be read at any subsequent time For further details reference should be made to the section on the skip function Machine coordinate system 211 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications Example 1 Example of workpiece position measurement An example to measure the distance from the measured reference point to the workpiece edge is shown below Argument lt Local variable gt F 9 200 X 24 100 000 Main program Y 25 100 000 Z 26 10 000 G65 P9031 X100 Y100 Z 10 F200 To Subprogram lt Common variable gt 101 87 245 102 87 245 Skip ing 103 123 383 101
104. 34 1 Control Axes 1 1 Coordinate word and control axis 1 Control Axes 1 1 Coordinate word and control axis Ej Function and purpose In the standard specifications there are 3 control axes but by adding an additional axis up to 14 axes can be controlled The designation of the processing direction responds to those axes and uses a coordinate word made up of alphabet characters that have been decided beforehand wee y lt TAR Direction of Bed Direction of table movement table movement X Y and revolving table _ _ WZ ET Ls X 4 Se x Direction of table r movement Y 4Birection of table Program coordinates revolution 1 Control Axes 1 2 Coordinate systems and coordinate zero point symbols 1 2 Coordinate systems and coordinate zero point symbols Ej Function and purpose Reference point Machine coordinate zero point Work coordinate zero points G54 G59 Machine Basic machine coordinate system gay Zero point 1st reference point Work coordinate Work coordinate Work coordinate system 3 G56 system 2 G55 system 1 G54 Work coordinate Work coordinate system 6 G59 system 5 G58 2 Input Command Units 2 1 Input command units 2 Input Command Units 2 1 Input command units Ej Function and purpose These are the units used for the movement amounts in the program They are expressed in millimeters inches or degrees 2 2 Input setting units Ej Funct
105. 42 offset amount G41 offset amount or G42 offset amount a b 132 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 12 3 6 Changing of offset No during compensation mode Ej Function and purpose As aprinciple the offset No must not be changed during the compensation mode If changed the movement will be as shown below When offset No offset amount is changed G41 GOT iaiia Dri a 0 1 2 3 N101 G0a Xx1 Nyt 3 N102 G0a Xx2 Yy2 DRAE siina Offset No changed N103 Xx3 Yy3 1 During linear gt linear The offset amount designated The offset amount designated with N101 will be applied with N102 will be applied i Ce Program path Tool center path r1 Program path 133 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 2 Linear circular Tool center path a Program path Tool center path m ei Program path 3 Circular gt circular l Tool center path Program path Center of circular 134 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 12 3 7 Start of tool radius compensation and Z axis cut in operation Ej Function and purpose Often when starting cutting a method of applying a radius compensation normally the XY plane beforehand at a position separated for the workpiece and then cutting in with the Z axis is often used When using this method create the program so that the Z axis movement is divided into the two ste
106. 5 and N6 is executed after N3 has finished and so the machine control is held on standby during the N5 and N6 analysis time 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 13 5 9 Actual examples of using user macros The following three examples will be described Example 1 SIN curve Example 2 Bolt hole circle Example 3 Grid Example 1 SIN curve G65 Pp1 Aai Bb1 Cc1 Ffi al Initial value 0 b1 Final value 360 c1 Rof SIN fi Feedrate Main program 09910 Subprogram 2 G65P9910A0B360 C100 F 100 2 WHILE 1LE 2 DO1 101 3 SIN 1 vote 1 G90G01 X 1 Y 1 OF 9 1 14 10 1 0 END1 Local variable 2 360 000 M99 set by argument 3 100 000 9 100 000 f Note 1 Commanding with one block is possible when G90G01 X 1Y 3 SIN 1 F 9 is issued 231 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications Example 2 Bolt hole circle After defining the hole data with canned cycle G72 to G89 the macro command is issued as the hole position command Main program 2 al Start angle b1 No of holes G81Z 100 R50 F300L0 ri Radius G65P9920Aa1Bb1Rr1Xx1Yy1 x1 X axis center 2 position y1 Y axis center position 09920 Subprogram 0 101 101 No of hole count 101 0 G90 G91 mode 102 4003 Read in gt 102 102 G90 or G91 103 5001 Note 1 Read previous coordinates 7 104 5002 X gt 103 103 X axis curren
107. 7 command was issued though it was e The G67 command is the call cancel not during the G66 command modal command and so the G66 command must be designated first before it is issued P277 MACRO ALM MESG e Refer to the operator messages on the DIAG An alarm command has been issued in screen 3000 e Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine manufacturer EXC e Review the program and correct it so the The number of parentheses which can number of or does not exceed five be commanded in a single block has exceeded five ILLEGAL e Review the program and correct it so that The number of and parentheses and parentheses are paired up properly commanded in a single block does not CALC IMPOSS e Review the program and correct the formula The arithmetic formula is incorrect DIVIDE BY ZERO e Review the program and correct it so that the The denominator of the division is zero denominator for division in the formula is not zero INTEGER OVER e Check the arithmetic formula in the program In the process of the calculation the and correct it so that the value of the integral integral number has exceeded ae number after calculation does not exceed 2 OVERFLOW VALUE e Check the variable data in the program The variable data has overflowed IF SNT ERR e Review the program There is an error in the IF conditional GOTOUD statement WHILE SNT ERR e Review the program The
108. 92x0Y0 12345678 0 1 G90 G51 X 150 P0 75 12345678 0 2 N100 G00 X 50 Y 25 12345678 10 0 N110 G01 X250 F300 12345678 10 0 N120 G51 Y 125 P0 5 12345678 120 0 N130 GOO X 100 Y 75 12345678 130 0 N140 G01 X 200 12345678 140 0 N150 G00 G50X0 YO 12345678 150 0 N160 M02 12345678 1600 0 B E T a a a l 11 3 Data Formats 3 7 Parity H V 3 7 Parity H V Ej Function and purpose Parity check provides a mean of checking whether the tape has been correctly perforated or not This involves checking for perforated code errors or in other words for perforation errors There are two types of parity check Parity H and Parity V 1 Parity H Parity H checks the number of holes configuring a character and it is done during tape operation tape input and sequence number search A parity H error is caused in the following cases a ISO code When a code with an odd number of holes in a significant data section has been detected Parity H error example This character causes a parity H error When a parity H error occurs the tape stops following the alarm code 2 Parity V A parity V check is done during tape operation tape input and sequence number search when the I O PARA 9n15 n is the unit No 1 to 5 parity V check function is set to 1 It is not done during memory operation A parity V error occurs in the following case when
109. Changes for the Better MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CNC MELDAS C6 C64 C64T PROGRAMMING MANUAL MACHINING CENTER TRANSFER MACHINE TYPE BNP B2260B ENG MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company Introduction This manual is a guide for using the MELDAS C6 C64 C64T Programming is described in this manual so read this manual thoroughly before starting programming Thoroughly study the Precautions for Safety on the following page to ensure safe use of the this NC unit Details described in this manual CAUTION A For items described in Restrictions or Usable State the instruction manual issued by the machine manufacturer takes precedence over this manual A An effort has been made to note as many special handling methods in this user s manual Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as not possible This manual has been written on the assumption that all option functions are added Refer to the specifications issued by the machine manufacturer before starting use A Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine manufacturer for details on each machine tool Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system or its version and some functions may not be possible Please confirm the specifications before use General precautions
110. Doth part systems Different skip signals input in part systems 1 and 2 If the skip condition specified by the parameter 1173 dwlskp indicating external skip signals 1 to 4 is met during execution of a dwell command G04 the remaining dwell time is canceled and the following block is executed Similarly if the skip condition is met during revolution dwelling the remaining revolution is canceled and the following block is executed gg Command format G31 Xx Zz aa Pp Ff Xx ZZ aa Command format axis coordinate word and target coordinates Pp Skip signal parameter Ff Feedrate mm min 315 15 Measurement Support Functions fe Detailed description 15 4 Multi step skip function 2 1 The skip is specified by command speed f Note that the F modal is not updated 2 The skip signal is specified by skip signal parameter p p can range from 1 to 15 If p is specified outside the range program error P35 occurs Skip signal command P Skip when O signal is input 3 The specified skip signal command is a logical sum of the skip signals Example G31 X100 P5 F100 Operation is skipped if skip signal 1 or 3 is input 316 15 Measurement Support Functions 15 4 Multi step skip function 2 4 If skip signal parameter Pp is not specified the skip condition specified by the G31 parameter works If soeed parameter Ff is not specified the skip speed specified by the G31 parameter works
111. Format __ lt argument Program No No of repetitions Detailed description 1 In the G66 1 mode everything except the O N and G codes in the various command blocks which are read are handled as the argument without being executed Any G code designated last or any N code commanded after anything except O and N will function as the argument 2 The same applies as when G65P__is assigned at the head of a block for all significant blocks in the G66 1 mode Example 1 N100 G01 G90 X100 Y200 F400 R1000 in the G66 1 P1000 mode is the same as N100 G65 P1000 G01 G90 X100 Y200 F400 R1000 Note 1 The Call is performed even in the G66 1 command block in the G66 1 mode and the correspondence between the argument address and the variable number is the same as for G65 simple call 3 The range of the G and N command values which can be used anew as variables in the G66 1 mode is subject to the restrictions applying to values as normal NC command values 4 Program number O sequence numbers N and modal G codes are updated as modal information ff G code macro call User macro subprogram with prescribed program numbers can be called merely by issuing the G code command Format G lt argument gt G G code for macro call Detailed description 1 The above instruction functions in the same way as the instructions below and parameters are set for each G code to determine the correspondence with the in
112. G59 will move in parallel and new workpiece coordinate systems 2 through 6 will be set 8 An imaginary machine coordinate system is formed at the position which deviates from the new workpiece reference zero point by an amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate system offset amount R 1 Reference zero point return position Basic machine coordinate system zero point ___ Imaginary machine coordinate system coordinate point based on G92 Old work 1 G54 coordinate system Old work 2 G55 coordinate system New work 1 G54 coordinate system X G55 New work 2 G55 coordinate system W2 Y After the power has been switched on the imaginary machine coordinate system is matched with the basic machine coordinate system by the first automatic G28 or manual reference Zero point return 9 By setting the imaginary basic machine coordinate system the new workpiece coordinate system will be set at a position which deviates from that imaginary basic machine coordinate system by an amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate system offset amount 10 When the first automatic G28 or manual reference zero point return is completed after the power has been switched on the basic machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate systems are set automatically in accordance with the parameter setting 11 If G54X Y is commanded after the reference return both automatic or manual executed after the power
113. HILE DO02 G65 P100 END2 Not possible 2 2 a 0 fe A END1 M99 12 A program error will occur at M99 if WHILE and END are not paired in the subprogram including macro subprogram 11 Calls can be initiated by G65 or G66 between WHILE DOm s and commands can be issued again from 1 Up to 27 nesting levels are possible for the main program and l subprograms Main program Subprogram Main program Subprogram WHILE DO1 G65 P100 2 constitutes illegal usage END 1 Possible As the canned cycles G73 and G83 and the special canned cycle G34 use WHILE these Note will be added multiple times 226 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 13 5 7 External output commands kJ FF Function and purpose Besides the standard user macro commands the following macro instructions are also available as external output commands They are designed to output the variable values or characters via the RS 232C interface Command format POPEN For preparing the processing of data outputs PCLOS For terminating the processing of data outputs BPRNT For character output and variable value binary output DPRNT For character output and digit by digit variable numerical output Command sequence Open command Data output command Closed command Open command POPEN 1 The command is issued before the series of data output commands 2 The DC2 control code and c
114. In this state execute the absolute value command positioning with G90 mode or execute reference point return with G28 or G30 to continue the operation The mirror center is set with an absolute value so if the mirror center is commanded again in this state the center may be set to an unpredictable position Cancel the mirror at the mirror center or position with the absolute value command after canceling Absolute value position commanded in program Machine position E 4 va __ When moved with the incremental xe command after mirror cancel Me Issue mirror cancel command here EE mS u SN Mirror center Issue mirror axis command here wa Combination with other functions 1 Combination with diameter compensation The mirror image G51 1 will be processed after the diameter compensation G41 G42 is applied so the following type of cutting will take place When only mirror image is applied When both mirror image and diameter compensation are applied Programmed path When only diameter compensation is applied Mirror center 237 13 Program Support Functions 13 7 Corner chamfering corner rounding 13 7 Corner chamfering corner rounding Chamfering at any angle or corner rounding is performed automatically by adding C_ or R_ to the end of the block to be commanded first among those command blocks which shape the corner with lines only 13 7 1 Corner cham
115. Next block Dwell command Dwell time 70 8 Dwell fez Example of program Dwell time sec Command 1078 Decpt2 0 1078 Decpt2 1 G04 X500 G04 X5000 5000 G04 XS 8 1 Per second dwell Note 1 The above examples are the results under the following conditions e Input setting unit 0 001mm or 0 0001inch e 100 1000 Note 2 If the input setting unit is 0 0001inch the X before G04 will be multiplied by 10 For example for X5 G04 the dwell time will be 50 sec T w Precautions 1 When using this function command X after G04 in order to make sure that the dwell is based on X 71 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9 1 Miscellaneous functions M8 digits BCD 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9 1 Miscellaneous functions M8 digits BCD Ej Function and purpose The miscellaneous M functions are also known as auxiliary functions and they include such numerically controlled machine functions as spindle forward and reverse rotation operation stop and coolant ON OFF These functions are designated by an 8 digit number 0 to 99999999 following the address M with this controller and up to 4 groups can be commanded in a single block a a Example G00 Xx Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4 When five or more commands are issued only the last four will be valid The output signal is an 8 digit BCD code and start signal The eight commands of MOO M01 M02 M30 M96 M97 M98 and M99 are used as auxiliary commands
116. Pn4 Pm In mLI lilmLI Synchronized Nee operation Synchronized lilnLl operation Pio Sate S Part system i Ply Waiting A Pny Waiting V Part system n i A Pmi H Simultaneous start Part system m 268 13 Program Support Functions 3 4 13 13 Synchronizing operation between part systems Program error P35 occurs when an illegal system number has been issued The synchronizing command is normally issued in a single block However if a movement command or M S or T command is issued in the same block whether to synchronize after the movement command or M S or T command or to execute the movement command or M S or T command after synchronization will depend on the parameter 1093 Wmvfin 1093 Wmvfin 0 Synchronize before movement command execution 1 Synchronize after executing movement command If there is no movement command in the same block as the synchronizing command when the next block movement starts synchronization may not be secured between the part systems To synchronize the part systems when movement starts after synchronization issue the movement command in the same block as the synchronizing command 6 Synchronizing is done only while the part system to be synchronized is operating automatically If this is not possible the synchronizing command will be ignored and operation will advance to the next block The L co
117. Register R126 bit 6 Register R126 bit 7 Register R126 bit 8 Register R126 bit 9 Register R126 bit 10 Register R126 bit 11 Register R126 bit 12 Register R126 bit 13 Register R126 bit 14 Register R126 bit 15 a b b h b b b h b b A l A A A 4 The last values of the system variables 1100 to 1135 sent are retained as 1 or 0 The following applies when any number except 1 or 0 is substituted into 1100 to Register R127 bit 0 Register R127 bit 1 Register R127 bit 2 Register R127 bit 3 Register R127 bit 4 Register R127 bit 5 Register R127 bit 6 Register R127 bit 7 Register R127 bit 8 Register R127 bit 9 Register R127 bit 10 Register R127 bit 11 Register R127 bit 12 Register R127 bit 13 Register R127 bit 14 Register R127 bit 15 System Interface System Interface variable p output signal variable p output signal a b i b b b h b b b A b b A l l Register R128 bit 0 Register R128 bit 1 Register R128 bit 2 Register R128 bit 3 Register R128 bit 4 Register R128 bit 5 Register R128 bit 6 Register R128 bit 7 Register R128 bit 8 Register R128 bit 9 Register R128 bit 10 Register R128 bit 11 Register R128 bit 12 Register R128 bit 13 Register R128 bit 14 Register R128 bit 15 199 a b i b b b h A b b h b b A l Register R129 bit 0 Register R129 bit 1 Register R129 bit 2 Register R129 bit 3 Register R129 bit 4 Register R129 bit 5 Register R129 bit 6 Register R129 bit 7 Reg
118. Speed in this Xot direction is f P Tool start point x x When only linear axes are to be controlled it is sufficient to designate the cutting feed in the program The feedrate for each axis is such that the designated rate is broken down into the components corresponding to the movement amounts Note When the circular interpolation function is used and the tool is moved along the circumference of an arc by the linear control axis the rate in the tool advance direction or in other words the tangential direction will be the feedrate designated in the program 56 7 Feed Functions lY 7 5 Feedrate designation and effects on control axes Example When the feedrate is designated as f and the linear axes X and Y are to be controlled using the circular interpolation function In this case the feed rate of the X and Z axes will change along with the tool movement However the combined speed will always be maintained at the constant value f When controlling rotary axes When rotary axes are to be controlled the designated feedrate functions as the rotary speed of the rotary axes or in other words as an angular speed Consequently the cutting feed in the tool advance direction or in other words the linear speed varies according to the distance between the center of rotation and the tool This distance must be borne in mind when designating the feedrate in the program Example When the feedrate is d
119. When registering the group data register it in group units e Correct to the correct group No Appendix 2 Program Error NO BORING CYC A fixed cycle command was issued though there are not fixed cycle G72 G89 specifications NO S CMD TAP The spindle speed command has not been issued when the tapping fixed cycle command is given SYN TAP ERROR Connection to the main spindle unit was not established PTC THD NO The pitch or thread number command has not been issued in the tap cycle of a boring fixed cycle command NO PTC THD CND The pitch or the number of threads per inch is illegal in the tap cycle of the drilling fixed cycle command NO CUTTING CYC A lathe cutting cycle command was input although the lathe cutting cycle was undefined in the specification TAPER LENG ERR In the lathe cutting cycle the specified length of taper section is illegal CHAMFERING ERR Chamfering in the thread cutting cycle is illegal NO MRC CYC SPC A compound type fixed cycle command G70 to G73 was issued although this cycle was undefined in the specification PROG ERR MRC When called with a compound type fixed cycle command the subprogram contained at least one of the following commands e Reference point return command G27 G28 G30 e Thread cutting G33 e Fixed cycle skip function G31 e The first move block of the finish shape program in compound type fixed cycle contains an arc command BLOCK OVR
120. X axis measurement amount 102 X axis measurement amount 103 Measurement linear segment amount 5001 X axis measurement start point 5002 Y axis measurement start point 5061 X axis skip input point 5062 Y axis skip input point N9 N10 N11 Example 2 Reading of skip input coordinates N1 G91 G28 XO YO N2 G90 GOO X0 YO N3 XOY 100 N4 G31 X 150 Y 50 F80 N5 111 5061 1 12 5062 N6 GOO YO N7 G31 X0 N8 121 5061 122 5062 N9 M02 111 75 112 75 121 25 4 s 122 75 g is the error caused by response delay Refer to the section on the skip function for details 122 is the N4 skip signal input coordinates as there is no Y command at N7 212 09031 N1 180 4003 N2 30 5001 31 5002 N3 G91 G01 Z 26 F 9 N4 G31 X 24 Y 25 F 9 N5 G90 G00 X 30 Y 31 N6 101 30 5061 102 31 5062 N7 103 SQR 101 101 102 102 N8 G91 G01Z 26 N9 IF 180 EQ 91 GOTO 11 N10 G90 N11 M99 G90 G91 modal recording X Y start point recording Z axis entry amount X Y measurement Stop at skip input Return to X Y start point X Y measurement incremental value calculation Measurement linear segment calculation Z axis escape G90 G91 modal return Subprogram return Skip signal 13 Program Support Functions ff Variable name setting and quotation Any name variable name can be given to common variables 500 to 519 It must be composed of n
121. absolute value mode so a symbol must always be added However in the incremental value the symbol will be ignored and will be viewed as the same symbol as for Z Note that the symbols will be viewed in reverse for G87 The hole machining data is held as shown below in the canned cycle The hole machining data is canceled when the G80 command or G commands G00 G01 G02 G03 G2 1 G3 1 G33 in the 01 group are reached Example 2 Only selection of canned cycle sequence Change of positioning point and execution of canned cycle Execution of only M22 Execution of only dwell Execution of only coordinate system setting Execution of only reference point zero point return Execution of only hole machining data recording N010 Xxs Yys Ls Change of positioning point and execution of R point return canned cycle for l5 times N011 G98 Xxg Yys Zz Rre Change of positioning point and execution of canned cycle N012 Ww Execute W axis according to 01 group modal before N001 and then execute canned cycle 13 1 3 Setting of workpiece coordinates in canned cycle mode The designated axis moves with the workpiece coordinate system set for the axis The Z axis is valid after the R point positioning after positioning or from Z axis movement Note When the workpiece coordinates are changed over for address Z and R re program even if the values are the same Example G55 Xx Yy3 Zz Rr2 Re command even if Z and R are the same a
122. after the address Regardless of the address a sign and decimal point can be used in the argument There are 2 ways in which arguments are designated 181 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 1 Argument designation Format A__B CC __e X YZ Detailed description a Arguments can be designated using any address except G L N O and P b Except for J and K there is no need for designation in alphabetical order c I J and K must be designated in alphabetical order d Address which do not need to be designated can be omitted e The following table shows the correspondence between the addresses which can be designated by argument designation and the variable numbers in the user macro main body podiess and venanie nuinbet Call instructions and usable address correspondence designation Variable in macro G65 G66 G66 1 address O O O B BR O O O O O O D 8 O O O O O O O Q O 4 O O O O O O O O Po O HS x x je Qa A7 O O O R B_ O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 2 Q O Can be used X Cannot be used Can be used while G66 1 command is modal 182 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 2 Argument designation Il Format A_B Cl J K_ I_J_K_eeee Detailed description a In addition to address A B and C up to 10 groups of arguments with I J K serving as 1 group can be designated b When the same address
123. agement data registration P1 LLn NNn 05 1 is the group No Ln is the life per tool Nn is the method f The life data other than Tn eA ARESE EES Tn is the tool No group 10 is registered GIT e s Registers the life data with the G10 command The registered data is deleted 111 61001 0 Group 10 does not exist 201 1 Precautions for tool life management If the tool life management system variable is commanded without designating a group No the data of the group registered at the head of the registered data will be read If a non registered group No is designated and the tool life management system variable is commanded 1 will be read as the data If an unused registration No tool life management system variable is commanded 1 will be read as the data Once commanded the group No is valid until NC reset 218 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 13 5 5 Arithmetic commands A variety of arithmetic operations can be performed between variables g Command format i lt formula gt lt Formula gt is a combination of constants variables functions and operators Constants can be used instead of j and k below 1 Definition and S in P substitution ot variables i j Definition substitution 2 Addition arithmetic i j k Addition i j k Subtraction i j OR k Logical sum at every bit of 32 bits i j XOR k Exclusive OR at ever
124. ain program N1 G00 X100000 pe N2__ 1 1000 ee et N3 M98 P1111L4 b b2 bs b4 Subprogram 01111 N1 G01 G91 G43 ZO H10 F100 cy C2 C3 C4 G01 X1000 d de ds d4 1 1 1000 O ee G90 G10 L10 P10 Rit re Note Final offset amount will be H10 5000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Example 3 The program for Example 2 can also be written as follows Main program N1 GOO X100000 N2 M98 P1111 L4 Subprogram 01111 N1 G01 G91 G43 Z0 H10 F100 N2 G01 X1000 N3 G10 L10 P10 R 1000 M99 146 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 4 Programmed offset input 3 When updating the workpiece coordinate system offset amount Assume that the previous workpiece coordinate system offset amount is as follows X 10 000 Y 10 000 N100 G00 G90 G54 X0 YO N101 G90 G10 L2 P1 X 15 000 Y 15 000 N102 X0 YO Basic machine coordinate system zero point X G54 coordinate before change G54 coordinate after x change Note 1 Changes of workpiece position display at N101 At N101 the G54 workpiece position display data will change before and after the workpiece coordinate system is changed with G10 X 0 X 5 000 Y 0 Y 5 000 When workpiece coordinate system offset amount is set in G54 to G59 G90 G10 L2 P1 X 10 000 Y 10 000 G90 G10 L2 P2 X 20 000 Y 20 000 G90 G10 L2 P3 X 30 000 Y 30 000 G90 G10 L2 P5 X 50 000 Y 50 000 G90 G10 L2 P6 X 60 000 Y 60
125. al data status when programming seg Example of program 2 The M98H__ M99P__ commands designate the sequence numbers in a program with a call instruction For M98H___ For M99P__ M99P 200 175 13 Program Support Functions 77 13 3 Subprogram control Precautions Program error P232 results when the designated program number P is not located Single block stop does not occur with the M98P__ M99 block If any address except O N P L or H is used single block stop can be executed With X100 M98 P100 operation branches to 0100 after X100 Is executed When M99 is commanded by the main program operation returns to the head This is same for MDI Operation can branch from BTR operation to a subprogram by M98P__ but the sequence number of the return destination cannot be designated with M99P__ P__ is ignored Bear in mind that the search operation will take time when the sequence number is designated by M99P__ 176 13 Program Support Functions 13 4 Variable commands 13 4 Variable commands Ej Function and purpose Programming can be endowed with flexibility and general purpose capabilities by designating variables instead of giving direct numerical values to particular addresses in a program and by assigning the values of those variables as required when executing a program Command format AAA OOOOO0O0OO or AAA formula Detailed description A Q 1 Variable expressions Ex
126. also change Consequently in order to keep the cutting feed ft as constant as possible the angle of rotation which is designated in one block must be reduced to as low as possible and the extent of the change in the 6 value must be minimized 58 7 Feed Functions 7 6 Automatic acceleration deceleration 7 6 Automatic acceleration deceleration EJ Function and purpose The rapid traverse and manual feed acceleration deceleration pattern is linear acceleration and linear deceleration Time constant Tp can be set independently for each axis using parameters in 1ms steps from 1 to 500ms The cutting feed not manual feed acceleration deceleration pattern is exponential acceleration deceleration Time constant Tc can be set independently for each axis using parameters in 1ms steps across a range from 1 to 500ms Normally the same time constant is set for all axes With continuous commands With continuous commands Rapid traverse acceleration deceleration Cutting feed acceleration deceleration Pattern pattern Tr Rapid traverse time constant Te Cutting feed time constant Ta Deceleration check time 7 7 Speed EJ With rapid traverse and manual feed the following block is executed after the command pulse of the present block has become 0 and the tracking error of the acceleration deceleration circuit has become 0 However with cutting feed the following block is executed as soon as the command pulse of
127. am This is the same as in returning with M99P__ from a program called by M98 13 10 Macro interrupt Main program being executed M96Pp1 Interrupt program User macro Modal change interrupt signal UIT Modal before interrupt is restored rik Awith Pp2 specified Modal modified b interrupt program remains effective Modal information affected by user macro interrupt 250 13 Program Support Functions ff Modal information variables 4401 to 4520 Modal information when control passes to the user macro interrupt program can be known by reading system variables 4401 to 4520 The unit specified with a command applies Some groups are not used 13 10 Macro interrupt The above system variables are available only in the user macro interrupt program If they are used in other programs program error P241 results fe M code for control of user macro interrupt The user macro interrupt is controlled by M96 and M97 However these commands may have been used for other operation To be prepared for such case these command functions can be assigned to other M codes This invalidates program compatibility User macro interrupt control with alternate M codes is possible by setting the alternate M code in parameters 1110 M96_M and 1111 M97_M and by validating the setting by selecting parameter 1109 subs_M M codes 03 to 97 except 30 are available for this purpose If the parameter
128. am error results with G31 command during tool radius compensation C alg SSCS C e 67 7 Feed Functions Ef Precautions 1 7 10 Automatic corner override Automatic corner override is valid only in the G01 G02 and G03 modes it is not effective in the GOO mode When switching from the GOO mode to the G01 or G02 or G03 mode at a corner or vice versa automatic corner override will not be applied at that corner in the GOO block Even if the automatic corner override mode is entered the automatic corner override will not be applied until the tool diameter compensation mode is entered Automatic corner override will not be applied on a corner where the tool radius compensation is started or canceled Start up block Program Automatic corner override will not be applied on a corner where the tool radius compensation J vector command is issued Program Tool center 7 7 7 7 Block containing Vs J vector command se Automatic corner override G41X_Y LJ 7 will not be applied Automatic corner override will not be applied when intersection calculation cannot be executed Intersection calculation cannot be executed in the following case a When the movement command block does not continue for four or more times The deceleration range with an arc command is the length of the arc The inside corner angle as set by parameter is the angle on the programmed path Automatic corner overr
129. ameter measurement speed are 0 An updated offset amount is valid unless it is assigned from the following Z axis measurement axis command of the G37 command Excluding the corresponding values at the PLC side the delay and fluctuations in the sensor signal processing range from 0 to 0 2ms As a result the measuring error shown below is caused ell e 0 2 ms 60 1000 The machine position coordinates at that point in time are ready by sensor signal detection and the machine will overtravel and stop at a position equivalent to the servo droop Maximum overtravel mm Maximum measuring error mm Measuring speed mm min e 1 Measuring speed mm min e e ______ PERRE B0 Position loop gain s The standard position loop gain is 33 s 306 15 Measurement Support Functions Ef Precautions 9 15 1 Automatic tool length measurement Program error P600 results if G37 is commanded when the automatic tool length measurement function is not provided Program error P604 results when no axis has been commanded in the G37 block or when two or more axes have been commanded Program error P605 results when the H code is commanded in the G37 block Program error P606 results when G43_H is not commanded prior to the G37 block Program error P607 results when the sensor signal was input outside the allowable measuring range or when the sensor signal was not detected even upon arrival at the end poi
130. ample a m m value consisting of 0 to 9 100 b f f one of the following in the formula 120 Numerical value m 123 Variable 543 Formula operator formula 110 119 minus formula 120 Formula 119 function formula SIN 110 Note 1 The 4 standard operators are and Note 2 Functions cannot be used unless the user macro specifications are available Note 3 Error P241 results when a variable number is negative Note 4 Examples of incorrect variable expressions are given below Incorrect Correct 6 2 6 2 Note that expression such as 6 2 is regarded as 6 2 5 gt 5 1 gt 1 177 13 Program Support Functions 13 4 Variable commands 2 Type of variables The following table gives the types of variables Type of variable Number _ _ Common variables Common variables Common Can be used in common 1 variables 2 throughout main sub Common to part Provided per part and macro programs No of variable sets option systems system 50 50 x number of 500 to 549 100 to 149 part systems 50 sets 50 sets 100 100 x number of 500 to 599 100 to 199 part systems 100 sets 100 sets 200 100 x number of 500 to 699 100 to 199 part systems 200 sets 100 sets Can be used for local Local variables 1 to 33 variables in macro programs Application is fixed by System variables System variables 1000 to Local variabl
131. and format S6 digit binary data SN kkk n Designate the spindle number with one numeric character Rotation speed or constant surface speed command value Detailed description 1 Each spindle command is delimited by the details of n Example S1 3500 1st spindle 3500 r min command S2 1500 2nd spindle 1500 r min command S3 2000 3rd spindle 2000 r min command S4 2500 4th spindle 2500 r min command S5 2000 5th spindle 2000 r min command S6 3000 6th spindle 3000 r min command S7 3500 7th spindle 3500 r min command 2 Multiple spindles can be commanded in one block 3 If two or more commands are issued to the same spindle in a block the command issued last will be valid Example S1 3500 S1 3600 S1 3700 S1 3700 will be valid 4 The S command and Sn command can be used together The spindle targeted for the S command is normally the 1st spindle however the S command can be used for 2nd or following spindle according to the spindle selection command 5 The commands for each spindle can be commanded from the machining program of any part systems The spindles will rotate with the speed commanded last If the S commands are issued from two or more part systems the command from the part system of largest No will be valid 6 As for C6 T type and L type C64 T type and C64T T type the multiple spindles control can not be used in a part system A p
132. anded beforehand for the basic spindle and will enter the rotation synchronization state 10 7 Spindle synchronous control I 2 If the basic spindle s commanded rotation speed is changed during the rotation synchronization state acceleration deceleration will be carried out while maintaining the synchronization state following the spindle acceleration deceleration time constants set in the parameters and the commanded rotation speed will be achieved 3 In the rotation synchronization state the basic spindle can be controlled to the constant surface speed even when two spindles are grasping one workpiece 4 Operation will take place in the following manner M23 S2 750 Forward rotate 2nd spindle synchronous spindle at 750 r min speed command M03 S1 1000 Forward rotate 1st spindle basic spindle at 1000 r min speed command G114 1 H1 D 2 Synchronize 2nd spindle synchronous spindle to 1st spindle basic spindle with reverse run 1 500 Change 1st spindle basic spindle rotation speed to 500 r min G113 Cancel spindle synchronization lt Operation gt Basic spindle Synchronous spindle 1000 750 500 Forward run Rotation speed 0 r min Reverse run 500 750 1000 Spindle synchronization cancel i 2nd spindle synchronous spindle i reverse run synchronization i 1st spindle basic spindle
133. ange from 1 through 127 DO1 DO2 DOS DO127 Up to 27 nesting levels can be used 1 Same identifier number can be used any number 2 Any number may be used for the WHILE DOm of times identifier number WHILE DO1 2 END1 WHILE DO1 Possible END1 Possible WHILE DO1 Possible END1 3 Up to 27 nesting levels for WHILE DOm m is 4 The number of WHILE DOm nesting levels any number from 1 to 127 for the nesting depth cannot exceed 27 WHILE DO1 WHILE DO2 m WHILE DOS 2 WHILE DO28 Possible Not possible Note With nesting m which has been used once cannot be used 225 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 6 WHILE DOm and ENDm must correspond on 5 WHILE DOm must be designated first and a 1 1 pairing basis in the same program ENDm last pee WHILE DOM ws Not ot l possible possible 7 WHILE DO1 haw WHILE DOM mmmn i END 1 E A E E E 7 Two WHILE DOm s must not overlap 8 Branching externally is possible from the WHILE DOm range WHILE DO1 WHILE DO1 Not possible IF GOTOn END 1 10 Subprograms can be called by M98 G65 or 9 No branching is possible inside WHILE DOm G66 between WHILE DOm s IF GOTOn pWHILE DO1 IF GOTOn Main program Subprogram pWHILE DO1 G ENDI WHILE DO1 f i 5 W
134. ar command program error P151 results 1 The G40 command has been executed 2 The DOO tool number has been executed The cancel mode is established once the compensation cancel command has been read 5 block pre reading is suspended an 1 block pre reading is made operational ff Tool radius compensation cancel operation 1 For inner side of corner 12 3 Tool radius compensation Linear gt Linear Circular gt Linear Program path r Compensation amount Program path i Tool center Path End point End point Center of circular 113 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 2 For outer side of corner obtuse angle Linear gt Linear Type A Circular Linear Type A Tool center path r Compensation amount Program path End point End point Program e Center of path circular Linear gt Linear Type B Circular gt Linear Type B Point of intersection Point of intersection s s Program path Program path End point End point e Center of circular 114 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 3 For outer side of corner acute angle Linear gt Linear Type A Circular gt Linear Type A Center of circular Tool center path Tool center path 1 Program path End point End point Linear gt Linear Type B Circular gt Linear Type B Center of circular l Tool
135. are executed G50 1 and G51 1 are ignored G37 is executed G50 1 and G51 1 are Appendix 3 Order of G Function Command Priority G code 01 G00 G03 1 Commanded G33 G code Arc and G43 G43 G44 G49 G44 cause Length error P70 compensation G50 1 G51 1 Program mirror image G52 Local coordinate system G53 Machine coordinate system G54 G59 Workpiece coordinate system G61 G64 Mode selection executed G65 go0 G03 1 Macro call modals are updated O 02 G17 G19 03 G90 G91 338 05 G94 G95 06 G20 G21 08 G43 G44 G49 07 G40 G42 O G command commanded last is valid O G52 is executed executed G40 G42 are G43 G49 are ignored ignored O O G53 is G53 is executed executed G40 G42 are G40 G42 are ignored executed G43 G49 modals are updated O Appendix 3 Order of G Function Command Priority G code 01 08 02 03 05 06 07 G00 G03 1 G43 G44 Commanded G17 G19 G90 G92 G94 G95 G20 G21 G40 G42 ats G33 G49 code G66 G67 O are executed G66 G67 G66 G67 Pas are executed G43 G49 M ll ae SPAAN modals are updated O G73 G89 are Error P155 canceled Canned cycle G73 G89 G01 G33 during Canned cycle modals are compensa tio n Error P155 Absolute value incremental Coordinate system setting G94 G95 G command commanded Synchronous last is valid asynchronous G96 G97 Consta
136. are commanded as absolute or incremental values according to the G90 G91 modal when commanded f Feedrate mm min Linear interpolation can be executed using this function If the skip signal is input externally while this command is being executed the machine will stop the remaining commands will be canceled and operation will be executed from the next block Detailed description 1 If Ff is commanded as the feedrate in the same block as G31 command commanded speed f will apply if it not commanded the value set in the parameter 1174 skip_F will serve as the feedrate In either case the F modal will not be updated 2 Normally the machine will not automatically accelerate or decelerate with the G31 block However setting the base specification parameter 21101 add01 bit3 to 1 allows the automatic acceleration deceleration valid In such case the acceleration deceleration will apply following to the cutting feed acceleration deceleration pattern set with the axis specification parameter 2003 smgst Since the deceleration at skip signal input follows the cutting feed acceleration deceleration pattern mentioned above the coasting amount from the skip signal input to stop may be larger than the normal specifications when automatic acceleration deceleration is invalid The stop condition such as feed hold stroke end is also valid for the G31 block 2 With the normal specifications override and dry run are
137. argument can be used as a local variable for the program with each respective macro call Note 1 When a G65 G66 G66 1 G code macro call or miscellaneous command macro call is conducted this is regarded as nesting level 1 and the level of the local variables is also incremented by one Note 2 The designated user macro subprogram is called every time the movement command is executed with modal call A However when the G66 command has been duplicated the next user macro subprogram is called every time an axis is moved even with movement commands in the macro User macro subprograms are called in sequence from the subprogram commanded last 187 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications Example 1 Main program User macro operation Macro p G66Pp1 y p call G IDC O Zz1 After Z1 execution M G66Ppz2 p2 call cine Zz2 After Z2 execution G67 p2 cancel Macro p Zz3 Alier Z3 execution G67 p cancel Zz4 y Zz5 iy 13 5 3 Variables EJ lY Function and purpose Both the variable specifications and user macro specifications are required for the variables which are used with the user macros The offset amounts of the local common and system variables among the variables for this MELDAS NC system except 33 are retained even when the unit s power is switched off Common variables can also be cleared by parameter
138. ases easier when grasping the material that the shape of one end differ from another end Device No Signalname Abbrev Explanation Y435 Phase shift SSPHM_ If spindle synchronization is carried out while calculation this signal is ON the phase difference of the request basic spindle and synchronous spindle will be obtained and saved Y436 Phase offset SSPHF If spindle phase synchronization is carried out request while this signal is ON the phases will be aligned using the position shifted by the saved phase shift amount as a basic position R55 Phase The delay of the synchronous spindle in difference respect to the basic spindle is output output Unit 360 7 4096 Note 1 If either the basic spindle or synchronous spindle has not passed through the Z phase etc and the phase cannot be calculated 1 will be output Note 2 This data is output only while calculating the phase shift or during spindle phase synchronization R59 Phase offset The phase difference saved with phase shift data calculation is output Unit 360 74096 Note 3 This data is output only during spindle synchronous control Phase shift calculation request Y435 Spindle Synenronous control Y4 36 In spindle synchronous control X42A Spindle synchronization complete X42B save i The control ON request ON Phase shift calculation The phase difference
139. asurement TLM ILL SIGNL e Check the program Before the area specified by the D command or decelerating area parameter d the measurement position arrival signal went ON The signal remains OFF to the end SKIP ERROR CC e Specify a diameter cancel G40 command A skip command was specified during tool or remove the skip command radius compensation processing ILLEGAL PARA e Check the program e G114 1 was commanded when the spindle e Check the argument of G114 1 command synehronization with PLG Up command e Check the state of spindle connection was selected e Spindle synchronization was commanded to a spindle that is not connected serially REGARD A POINT Do not add a decimal point to the decimal A decimal point was added to a decimal point invalid address point invalid address PRE CALCULATION ERROR e Reduce the number of commands that combining commands that required require pre reading or delete such pre reading nose R offset corner commands chamfering corner R geometric geometric IB and compound type fixed cycle commands resulted in eight or more pre read blocks 333 Appendix 3 Order of G Function Command Priority Appendix 3 Order of G Function Command Priority Command in a separate block when possible Note Upper level When commanded in the same block indicates that both commands are executed simultaneously G code 08 01 02 03 05 07 G43 G44 Commanded G00 G03 G17 G19 G90 G9
140. ate point the next block will be executed 8 With second third and fourth reference zero point returns in the mirror image mode mirror image will be valid from the start point to the intermediate point and the tool will move in the opposite direction to that of the command However mirror image is ignored from the intermediate point to the reference zero point and the tool moves to the reference zero point 3rd reference zero point Pa X axis mirror Ss H XN Image ae G30P3Xx Yy43 No mirror image 290 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 9 Reference point check 14 9 Reference point check G27 Ej Function and purpose This command first positions the tool at the position assigned by the program and then if that positioning point is the first reference point it outputs the reference point arrival signal to the machine in the same way as with the G28 command Therefore when a machining program is prepared so that the tool will depart from the first reference point and return to the first reference point it is possible to check whether the tool has returned to the reference point after the program has been run te Command format G27 XX Yy ZZ Pp 3 G27 Check command Xx Vy ZZ Return control axis Pp Check number P1 1st reference point check P2 2nd reference point check P3 3rd reference point check P4 4th reference point check fe Detailed description 1 If th
141. ate system and current position display value can be preset in the command value without moving the machine Coordinate system R M setting Current value For example if S Aeon G92X 0 Y 0 is Work iece Current commanded the AOOO 00 value workpiece Tool Y 0 000 Tool Caen bbe coordinate system position position Workpiec will be newly O Workpiece created t 200 a aa X 100 000 Y 50 000 Note If the workpiece coordinate system deviated because the axis is moved manually when the manual absolute position switch is OFF etc the workpiece coordinate system can be corrected with the following steps 1 Execute reference point return while the coordinate system is deviated 2 After that command G92G53X0Y0Z0 With this command the workpiece coordinate value and current value will be displayed and the workpiece coordinate system will be preset to the offset value 282 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 6 Automatic coordinate system setting 14 6 Automatic coordinate system setting Ej Function and purpose This function creates each coordinate system according to the parameter values input beforehand from the setting and display unit when the reference point is reached with the first manual reference point return or dog type reference point return when the NC power is turned ON f i Machine Basic machine coordinate AN zero point 1st reference point Work coordina
142. ation i unit 319 Axis specifica tions parameter Axis specifica tions parameter Axis specifica tions parameter Axis specifica tions parameter Axis specifica tions parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Zero point return parameter Axis specifications parameter 2 Axis specifications parameter 2 Appendix 1 Program Parameter Input N No Correspondence Table P No 5 PLC constant Parameter No Data type Setting range 6301 PLC constant 1 2 word 0 99999999 48 6348 P No 6 PLC timer Parameter Data No type 6000 10ms addition timer 0 Word 0 32767 TO T15 15 6015 Setting range 6016 10ms addition timer 16 Word 0 32767 s T16 T95 95 6095 6096 10ms addition timer 96 Word a T96 T103 103 6103 P No 7 PLC counter Parameter Data No type 6200 Counter CO C23 O Word 23 6223 P No 8 Bit selection parameter Parameter No 6401 Bit selection e parameter 6496 320 0 32767 Setting range 0 32767 Setting range 8 digit designation Reading abbreviation not possible i Each bit 0 or 1 d0
143. ation synchronization D 2 A mode ON S1 1500 Synchronous rotation at S 1500 S1 0 Both spindles stop G113 Synchronization mode OFF 2 To chuck the same workpiece with the basic spindle and synchronous spindle in the phase synchronization mode align the phases before chucking 1 2 M6 1st spindle chuck close M3 1st spindle rotation 1 1500 command ON G114 1 H1 D 2 RO Phase synchronization f mode ON M24 2nd spindle rotation command ON M15 2nd spindle chuck close Note 1 Note 1 Close the chuck after confirming that the spindle phase synchronization complete signal X42A has turned ON phase alignment complete 87 10 Spindle Functions 10 7 Spindle synchronous control I CAUTION NDo not make the synchronous spindle rotation command OFF with one workpiece chucked by the basic spindle and synchronous spindle during the spindle synchronous control mode Failure to observe this may cause the synchronous spindle stop and hazardous situation T w Precautions and restrictions 1 To carry out the spindle synchronization it is required to command spindle rotation for both basic spindle and synchronous spindle Note that the rotating direction of the synchronous spindle follows the rotating direction of the basic spindle and rotating direction designation by D address 2 The spindle rotating with spindle synchronous control will stop when emergency stop is applied 3 T
144. aused during execution of the tool diameter compensation a sequence number M99P__ must be specified with a command to return from the user macro interrupt program If no sequence number is specified control cannot return to the main program normally 252 13 Program Support Functions 13 11 Tool change position return 13 11 Tool change position return G30 1 to G30 6 Ej Function and purpose By specifying the tool change position in a parameter 8206 TOOL CHG P and also specifying a tool change position return command in a machining program the tool can be changed at the most appropriate position The axes that are going to return to the tool change position and the order in which the axes begin to return can be changed by commands g Command format 1 The format of tool change position return commands is as follows G30 n n 1to6 Specify the axes that return to the tool change position and the order in which they return For the commands and return order see next table G30 4 X axis gt Y axis e Z axis added axis G30 5 Y axis gt X axis e Z axis gt added axis G30 6 X axis e Y axis e Z axis gt added axis Note 1 An arrow gt indicates the order of axes that begin to return An period e indicates that the axes begin to return simultaneously Example Z axis gt X axis Y axis indicate that the Z axis returns to the tool change position then the X and Y axes does 2
145. can be selected by two axes that are not the parallel axis If the rotary axis is registered as a parallel axis a plane that contains the rotary axis can be selected The plane selection is as follows e Plane that executes circular interpolation including helical cutting e Plane that executes tool diameter compensation e Plane that executes fixed cycle positioning g Command format ZX plane selection YZ plane selection XY plane selection X Y and Z indicate each coordinate axis or the parallel axis T Parameter entry 1026 to 1028 1029 to 1039 base_l J K aux_l J K Table 1 Example of plane selection parameter entry As shown in the above example the basic axis and its parallel axis can be registered The basic axis can be an axis other than X Y and Z Axes that are not registered are irrelevant to the plane selection 33 6 Interpolation Functions ff Plane selection system In Table 1 is the horizontal axis for the G17 plane or the vertical axis for the G18 plane J is the vertical axis for the G17 plane or the horizontal axis for the G19 plane K is the horizontal axis for the G18 plane or the vertical axis for the G19 plane 6 3 Plane selection In other words G17 lJ plane G18 KI plane G19 JK plane 1 The axis address commanded in the same block as the plane selection G17 G18 G19 determines which basic axis or parallel axis is used for the plane selection For the pa
146. can be set or changed on the tape using the G10 command During the absolute value G90 mode the commanded offset amount will become the new offset amount and during the incremental value G91 mode the commanded offset amount will be added to the currently set offset amount to create the new offset amount ES I Command format 1 Workpiece offset input G90 G10 L2 P_Xp_Yp_ Zp _ G91 P External workpiece G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 If a value other than the above is set or if the P command is omitted the currently selected workpiece offset will be handled as the input Note The offset amount in the G91 will be an incremental value and will be cumulated each time the program is executed Command G90 or G91 before the G10 as a cautionary means to prevent this type of error 2 Tool offset input a For tool offset memory G10 L10 P_R_ P Offset No R Offset amount b For tool offset memory II G10 L10 P_R_ Tool length compensation shape offset G10 L11 P_R_ Tool length compensation wear compensation G10 L12 P_R_ Tool radius shape offset G10 L13 P_R_ Tool radius wear compensation 3 Offset input cancel 144 12 Tool Offset Functions ff Detailed description 12 4 Programmed offset input Program error P171 will occur if this command is input when the specifications are not available G10 is an unmodal command and is valid only in the commanded block The G10 command does not
147. ch can be executed by adding and combining subprogram control functions and canned cycle functions __ Caset Case2 Case3 Case 4 1 Subprogram control No Yes Yes No 2 Canned cycles Yes Function i Memoyoperaion o oO o o 2 Subprogrameal o ol E MEEN AE Note 2 4 Subprogram nesting leveloall Noe x o o x 5 camedoyees Sx dT lt T olo 6 Canned cycle subprogram editing x o o Note 1 denotes function which can be used and x a function which cannot be used Note 2 Variables cannot be transferred with the M98 command but variable commands in subprograms can be used provided that the variable command specifications are available Note 3 A maximum of 8 nesting levels can be possible 172 13 Program Support Functions Fa Command format Subprogram call 13 3 Subprogram control Program number of subprogram to be called own program if omitted P can only be omitted during memory operation and MDI operation Numerical value with up to 8 digits Sequence number in subprogram to be called head block if omitted Numerical value with up to 5 digits Number of subprogram repetitions When omitted this is interpreted at L1 and is not excuted when LO 1 to 9999 with numerical value up to 4 digits For instance M98 P1 L3 is equivalent to the following M98 P1 M98 P1 M98 P1 Return to main program from subprogram M99 P_H_Q_R_L_ Sub
148. ck Point of intersection Tool center path Program path 3 The compensation vector will be eliminated temporarily with the G53 command basic machine coordinate system selection Note 1 The offset vectors do not change with the coordinate system setting G92 command 119 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation fe Blocks without movement and pre read inhibit M command The following blocks are known as blocks without movement A MOS Sakma aaa aa M command Di STZ e edie S command Co K a E E A T command d G04 X500 nsss Dwell e G22 X200 Y150 Z100 Machining inhibit region setting No movement f G10 L10 P0O1 R50 Offset amount setting g G92 X600 Y400 Z500 Coordinate system setting W GT ZAO Sco ee ete thee Movement but not on offset plane PREES OEE E EEA EET G code only Je GIAO ilaa Zero movement amount Movement amount is zero Moo M01 M02 and M30 are handled as pre read inhibit M codes 1 When command is assigned at start of the compensation Perpendicular compensation will be applied on the next movement block N1 X30 Y60 N2 G41 D10 Block without movement N3 X20 Y 50 N4 X50 Y 20 Compensation vector cannot be generated when 4 or more blocks continue without movement or when a pre reading prohibit M code is issued X30 Y60 N2 3 4 5 6 G41 D10 G4 X1000 Block without Point of F100 500 M
149. command 39 6 Interpolation Functions fez Example of program Example 1 G02 Xx Yy Rry Ffi XY plane R specified arc Example 2 Q03 Zz Xx Rr Ffi ZX plane R specified arc 6 5 R specified circular interpolation Example 3 G02 Xx Yyi li Jj Rr Ffi XY plane R specified arc When the R specification and I J K specification are contained in the same block the R specification has priority in processing Example 4 G17 Q02 li Jj Rr Ffi XY plane This is an R specified arc but as this is a circle command it is already completed 40 6 Interpolation Functions 6 6 Helical interpolation 6 6 Helical interpolation G17 to G19 G02 G03 FF Ej Function and purpose While circular interpolating with G02 G03 within the plane selected with the plane selection G code G17 G18 G19 the 3rd axis can be linearly interpolated Command format G17 G02 G03 Xx Yy Zz li Jj Pp Ff 3 G17 G02 G03 Xx2 Yy2 ZZ2 Rr Ffe Xx Yy XX2 Yy2 Arc end point coordinate Zz ZZ Linear axis end point coordinate iy Jj Arc center coordinate Pp Pitch No Ff Ff2 Feedrate Rr Arc radius The arc center coordinate value and arc radius value are commanded with an input setting input Caution is required for the helical interpolation command of an axis for which the input command value differs Command with a decimal point to avoid confusion 41 6 Interpolation Functions
150. coordinate system setting cceecceeseeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeceeseeeeseeeseseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeess 283 14 7 Reference zero point return G28 G29 eee cece eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteaeecaeeseeeseaeesseeeeeaeeaes 284 14 8 2nd 3rd and 4th reference Zero point return G30 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 288 14 9 Reference point check G27 s x ci2h cece tne out haces tests dian tae anbekdaceeene 291 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset G54 to G59 G54 1 oe 292 14 11 Local coordinate system Setting G52 ooo eeceseeseeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeaas 300 15 Measurement Support FUNCTIONS sssssunsennnnnunnunnnnnnnnnunnennnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnn nunen nnnn nnmnnn 304 15 1 Automatic tool length measurement G37 0 cece eee eseeeeeeeeeceeeeee eee teaeseaeeeseeseeeeaes 304 15 25 OMI f nNGtON G3 kae na etree bieee Ne Heat nando aa Ea cents antec See 308 15 3 Multi step skip function G31 n G04 eee ccc cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeaaeeeaeeeeeeeeaes 313 15 4 Multi step skip function 2 GS1 suas picted ansccneeteaachatecehi iedidesecvauethuetadestaueiad eleaaecss 315 Appendix 1 Program Parameter Input N No Correspondence Table s sssesee 318 Appendix 2 Program Elton scccaswccissscascsdevsveseessscrncenevavascacsencuaautvaateccsaacedicteoteacnaasnceadwtecensnsensiee 323 Appendix 3 Order of G Function Command ssssessesensensennunnnnunnuneununnunnnnunnunnunnnnnnnnnnnn ennen 3
151. cts on control axes 7 5 Feedrate designation and effects on control axes Ej Function and purpose It has already been mentioned that a machine has a number of control axes These control axes can be divided into linear axes which control linear movement and rotary axes which control rotary movement The feedrate is designed to assign the displacement speed of these axes and the effect exerted on the tool movement speed which poses problems during cutting differs according to when control is exercised over the linear axes or when it is exercised over the rotary axes The displacement amount for each axis is assigned separately for each axis by a value corresponding to the respective axis The feedrate is not assigned for each axis but assigned as a single value Therefore when two or more axes are to be controlled simultaneously it is necessary to understand how this will work for each of the axes involved The assignment of the feedrate is described with the following related items ff When controlling linear axes Even when only one machine axis is to be controlled or there are two or more axes to be controlled simultaneously the feed rate which is assigned by the F code functions as a linear speed in the tool advance direction Example When the feedrate is designated as f and linear axes X and Y are to be controlled x Feedrate for X axis f x gt P2 Tool end point x y y l l Feedrate for Y axis f x F
152. cute the previous block corner movement as a single block and the remaining joining movement following block will be executed as a single block in the following operation Center of circular 4 i This movement and feedrate fall under block N2 Stop point with single block 123 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 12 3 3 G41 G42 commands and I J K designation Ej Function and purpose The compensation direction can be intentionally changed by issuing the G41 G42 command and I J Kin the same block te Command format G17 XY plane G41 G42 X_ Y_I_J_ G18 ZX plane G41 G42X_Z K_ G19 YZ plane G41 G42Y_Z JK a movement mode fe l J type vectors G17 XY plane selection The new J type vector G17 plane created by this command is now described Similar descriptions apply to vector K for the G18 plane and to J K for the G19 plane As shown in the figures the vectors with a size equivalent to the offset amount are made to serve as the I J type compensation vector perpendicularly to the direction designated by J without the intersection point of the programmed path being calculated the J vector can be commanded even in the mode G41 G42 mode in the block before and even at the compensation start G40 mode in the block before Assign an linear command G00 G01 in 1 When I J is commanded at compensation start G40 G91 G41 X100 Y100 1150 D1 G04 X
153. d the override will be canceled and the override will automatically be set to 100 Dry run is valid when the control parameter 1085 G00Drn is set to 1 and is valid for the positioning command If the feed hold button is pressed during G74 execution and the sequence is at 3 to 6 the movement will not stop immediately and instead will stop after 6 During the rapid traverse in sequence 1 2 and 9 the movement will stop immediately The operation stops at after the 1 2 and 9 commands during single block operation During the G74 and G84 modal the Tapping NC output signal will be output During the G74 synchronous tapping modal the M3 M4 M5 and S code will not be output This function allows spindle acceleration deceleration pattern to be approached to the speed loop acceleration deceleration pattern by dividing the spindle and drilling axis acceleration deceleration pattern into up to three stages during synchronous tap Refer to the item d G84 Tapping cycle for details of multi stages of the spindle acceleration deceleration pattern 163 13 Program Support Functions 1 13 1 Canned cycles G76 Fine boring Program G76 Xx Yy ZZ Rry lq Jq Ffi GO XX Yy GO Zr G1 221 Ff M19 Spindle orient G1 Xqi Yqe Ff Shift G98 mode GOZ z r ess mode GO0Z 2 GO X q Y q Ff Shift 8 M3 Spindle forward rotation 6 7 O 4 5 G98 G99 mode
154. d below With axis common data Axis common bit type parameter Axis common byte type parameter Axis common word type parameter Axis common 2 word type parameter NOT i With axis independent data Axis independent bit type parameter Axis independent byte type parameter Axis independent word type parameter Axis independent 2 word type parameter mic Ty gt gt gt 2222 Note 1 The sequence of addresses in a block must be as shown above Note 2 Whether the parameter value is replaced or added depends on the modal state of G90 G91 when G10 is commanded Note 3 Refer to Appendix Table 1 for the P N number correspondence table Note 4 For a bit type parameter the data type will be HO O is a value between 0 and 7 Note 5 The axis number is set in the following manner 1st axis is 1 2nd axis is 2 and so forth When using multiple part system the 1st axis in each part system is set as 1 the second axis is set as 2 and so forth Note 6 Command G10L50 L11 in independent blocks A program error P33 P421 will occur if not commanded in independent blocks keg Example of program Example To turn ON bit 2 of bit selection 6401 G10 L50 P8 N1 H21 G11 243 13 Program Support Functions 13 10 Macro interrupt 13 10 Macro interrupt M96 M97 Ej Function and purpose FF A user macro interrupt signal UIT is input from the machine to interrupt the program being currently execu
155. d for pick feed etc 2 Changing of vector A new compensation vector direction can be commanded with J and K and a new offset amount with D These can be commanded in the same block as the movement command G38 li Jj Dd I J and K will differ according to the selected plane 116 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation Program path N12 H N11G1Xx11 N12G38Yy12 N13G38Xx13 N14G38Xx14Yy14 N15G38Xx 5liJjDd2 N16G40Xx16Yy16 O E Nuwi3 1yrpx 2 2 2 7 Vector hold Vector change fe F Changing the compensation direction during tool diameter compensation The compensation direction is determined by the tool diameter compensation commands G41 G42 and compensation amount sign Compensation amount sign Left hand compensation Right hand compensation Right hand compensation Left hand compensation The compensation direction can be changed by changing the compensation command in the compensation mode without the compensation having to be first canceled However no change is possible in the compensation start block and the following block Refer to section 12 3 5 Precautions for tool diameter compensation for the movement when the symbol is changed Linear Linear N 5N Tool center path If there is no point of intersection when the compensation direction is changed 117 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation Linear lt Circular G41 G42 G4
156. d traverse rate is established instead c If FO is used in the G02 or G03 mode a program error P121 will result d When F1 to F5 with decimal point are assigned the 1mm min to 5mm min direct commands are established instead of the F1 digit command e When the commands are used with the millimeter or degree units the feedrate set to correspond to F1 to F5 serves as the assigned speed mm min f When the commands are used with inch units one tenth of the feedrate set correspond to F1 to F5 serves at the assigned speed inch min g During a F1 digit command the F1 digit number and F1 digit command signal are output as the PLC signals 52 7 Feed Functions 7 3 F1 digit feed 3 F1 digit and G commands a 01 group G command in same block as F1 digit commands eos tl Executed feedrate Modal display rate e GOFO GOF1 F1G0 a iies ee G1FO G1F1 b F1 digit and unmodal commands may be assigned in the same block In this case the unmodal command is executed and at the same time the F1 digit modal command is updated 53 7 Feed Functions 7 4 Synchronous feed 7 4 Synchronous feed G94 G95 Ej Function and purpose Using the G95 command it is possible to assign the feed amount per rotation with an F code When this command is used the rotary encoder must be attached to the spindle When the G94 command is issued the per minute feed rate will return to the designated per minute feed asynchrono
157. d type fixed cycle II G74 to G76 command was input although it was undefined in the specification NO SPECIAL CYC No special fixed cycle specifications are available NO HOLE S CYC A 0 has been specified for the number of holes in special fixed cycle mode G36 ANGLE ERR A G36 command specifies 0 for angle intervals G12 G13 R ERR The radius value specified with a G12 or G13 command is below the compensation amount NESTING OVER A subprogram has been called 8 or more times in succession from the subprogram NO N NUMBER At subprogram call time the sequence number set at return from the subprogram or specified by GOTO was not set NO PROGRAM NO The subprogram has not been set when the subprogram is called NO VARI NUMBER The variable number commanded is higher than the numbers in the specifications EQL SYM MSSG The sign has not been commanded when a variable is defined VARIABLE ERR An invalid variable has been specified in the left or right side of an operation expression NO COOD RT SPC The coordinate rotation command was issued when the coordinate rotation specifications were not available 328 e Check the compound type fixed cycle G70 to G73 shape program e Check the compound type fixed cycle G70 to G76 command value e Check the specification e Check the specifications e Review the program e Review the program e Review the program e Check the number of subprogram call
158. dance vectors are created 137 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 3 With interference check invalid function The tool passes while cutting the N1 and N3 line Example of interference check Vectors 1 4 check No interference Vectors 2 3 check No interference Vectors 3 2 check Interference gt Erase vectors 3 2 4 Erase vectors 4 1 With the above process the vectors 1 2 3 and 4 will remain as the valid vectors and the path that connects these vectors will be executed as the interference avoidance path 138 12 Tool Offset Functions ff Conditions viewed as interference If there is a movement command in three of the five pre read blocks and if the compensation calculation vectors created at the contacts of each movement command intersect it will be viewed as an interference 12 3 Tool radius compensation Tool center path A Program path Vectors intersect N2 fe F When interference check cannot be executed 1 When three of the movement command blocks cannot be pre read When there are three or more blocks in the five pre read blocks that do not have movement 2 When there is an interference following the fourth movement block _ Tool center path Program path Interference check is not possible 139 12 Tool Offset Functions ff Operation during interference avoidance The movement will be as shown below wh
159. e P command has been omitted the first reference point will be checked 2 The number of axes whose reference points can be checked simultaneously depends on the number of axes which can be controlled simultaneously Note that the display shows one axis at a time from the final axis 3 An alarm will occur if the reference point is not reached after the command is completed 291 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset G54 to G59 G54 1 Ej Function and purpose 1 The workpiece coordinate systems are for facilitating the programming of workpiece machining in which the reference point of the workpiece to be machined is to serve as the zero point 2 These commands enable the tool to move to the positions in the workpiece coordinate system There are 6 workpiece coordinate systems which are used by the programmer for programming G54 to G59 In addition to the six sets of workpiece coordinate systems between G54 and G59 there are 48 additional workpiece coordinate system sets The 48 sets are options Among the workpiece coordinate systems currently selected by these commands any workpiece coordinate system with coordinates which have been commanded by the present position of the tool is reset The present position of the tool includes the offset amounts for tool radius tool length and tool position offset An i
160. e block stop the new setting will be valid from the next block 7001 to 7006 7021 to 7026 7041 to 7046 7061 to 7066 7081 to 7086 7101 to 7106 7121 to 7126 7141 to 7146 7161 to 7166 7181 to 7186 7201 to 7206 7221 to 7226 7241 to 7246 7261 to 7266 7281 to 7286 7301 to 7306 7321 to 7326 7341 to 7346 7361 to 7366 7381 to 7386 7401 to 7406 7421 to 7426 7441 to 7446 7461 to 7466 295 7481 to 7486 7501 to 7506 7521 to 7526 7541 to 7546 7561 to 7566 7581 to 7586 7601 to 7606 7621 to 7626 7641 to 7646 7661 to 7666 7681 to 7686 7701 to 7706 7721 to 7726 7741 to 7746 7761 to 7766 7781 to 7786 7801 to 7806 7821 to 7826 7841 to 7846 7861 to 7866 7881 to 7886 7901 to 7906 7921 to 7926 7941 to 7946 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset EJ Example of program Example 1 1 G28 XOYO 2 G53 X 1000 Y 500 3 G53 XOYO Present Reference zero point positon Gx return position 1 When the first reference point coordinate is zero the basic machine coordinate system zero point and reference zero point return position 1 will coincide Example 2 G28X0Y0 G90GO0G53X0Y0 G54X 500 Y 500 G01G91X 500F 100 Reference zero point return position 1 296 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system s
161. e forward direction of the Z axis axis 3 as seen from the zero point Example 1 With 1100 Example 2 With 1 100 0 100 IJ direction Offset vector direction J Offset vector direction 100 0 IJ direction 126 12 Tool Offset Functions fe Selection of offset modal The G41 or G42 modal can be selected at any time 12 3 Tool radius compensation G28 X0Y0 G41 D1 F1000 G01 G91 X100 Y100 G42 X100 1100 J 100 D2 X100 Y 100 G40 M02 fe Offset amount for offset vectors The offset amounts are determined by the offset number modal in the block with the I J designation lt Example 1 gt G41 D1 G91 2 lJ N100 G41 X150 150 N110 X100 Y 100 2 G41 D1 G91 2 N200 G41 X150 150 D2 N210 X100 Y 100 2 Vector B is the offset amount entered in offset number modal D2 in the N200 block 127 12 Tool Offset Functions Ef Precautions 1 Issue the I J type vector in a linear mode GO G1 If itis issued in an arc mode at the start of compensation program error P151 will result An IJ designation in an arc mode functions as an arc center designation in the offset mode 2 When the I J type vector has been designated it is not deleted avoidance of interference even if there is interference Consequently overcutting may arise in such a case 12 3 Tool radius compensation l G28 XO0Y0 X Cut section I G42 D1 F1000 G91 X100
162. e included in calculation of the nest level The subprograms and user macros called in the interrupt program are also included in calculation of the nest level a Subprogram type interrupt b Macro type interrupt Subprogram type interrupt The user macro interrupt program is called as a subprogram As with calling by M98 the local variable level remains unchanged before and after an interrupt Macro type interrupt The user macro interrupt program is called as a user macro As with calling by G65 the local variable level changes before and after an interrupt No arguments in the main program can be passed to the interrupt program fe Acceptance of user macro interrupt signal UIT A user macro interrupt signal UIT is accepted in the following two modes These two modes are selected by a parameter 1112 S_TRG a Status trigger mode b Edge trigger mode 13 10 Macro interrupt Status trigger mode The user macro interrupt signal UIT is accepted as valid when it is on If the interrupt signal UIT is ON when the user macro interrupt function is enabled by M96 the interrupt program is activated By keeping the interrupt signal UIT ON the interrupt program can be executed repeatedly Edge trigger mode The user macro interrupt signal UIT is accepted as valid at its rising edge that is at the instance it turns on This mode is useful to execute an interrupt program once User macro interrupt signal UIT Status
163. e other system starts once the own system has reached all of the start point axis coordinates Example X also has passed Z has passed is lt Movement Command point A Actual start point AW SN 6 The next operation is executed by parameters base specification parameter 1229 set01 bit5 when the start point cannot be determined by the next block movement of the own part system a When the parameter is ON Program error P33 occurs before the own part system moves Own part system H G116 Program error Other part system _ Waiting b When the parameter is OFF The other part system starts upon completion of the next block movement Own part system IG116 Other part system 7 Ifthe G116 command overlaps between part systems the waiting state will continue Own part system IL1 G116 Waiting Other part system JIL1 G116 8 Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of each part system 274 13 Program Support Functions 13 15 Start Point Designation Synchronizing Type 2 9 The two other part systems start when the G116 command is issued for 3 part systems Own part system 2 3L1 G116 D Other part system A HISL1 7 Other part system B W121 10 The single block stop function does not apply for the G116 block 11 When the G116 command is issued continuousl
164. ead of the block Otherwise program error P231 will result If is at the head of the block and Nn follows control can be branched to the sequence number N10 22 20 23 21 IF 2 EQ1 GOTO100 Branching to 22 20 3 N100 when 23 21 4 content of 2 is 1 N100 X 22 Y 23 1 1 1 l Note 1 When the sequence number of the branch destination is searched the search is conducted up to the end of the program code from the block following IF and if it is not found it is then conducted from the top of the program to the block before IF z Therefore branch searches in the opposite direction to the program flow will take longer to execute compared with branch searches in the forward direction Note 2 EQ and NE should be used only for integers For comparison of numeric values with decimals GE GT LE and LT should be used 224 13 Program Support Functions ff Iteration Format WHILE conditional expression DOm m 1 2 3 127 13 5 User macro specifications 2 END m While the conditional expression is established the blocks from the following block to ENDm are repeatedly executed when it is not established execution moves to the block after ENDm DOm may come before WHILE WHILE conditional expression DOm and ENDm must be used as a pair IF WHILE conditional expression is omitted these blocks will be repeatedly ad infinitum The repeating identification numbers r
165. ecifications Optional stop M01 If the M01 command is read when the optional stop switch on the machine operation board is ON reading of the next block will stop and the same effect as with the MOO function will apply Example N10 GOO X1000 N11 M01 N12 G01 X2000 Z3000 F600 Optional stop switch status and operation Stops at N11 when switch is ON Next command N12 is executed without stopping at N11 when switch is OFF 72 9 Miscellaneous Functions lY a a a 9 1 Miscellaneous functions M8 digits BCD Program end M02 or M30 This command is normally used in the final block for completing the machining and so it is primarily used for tape rewinding Whether the tape is actually rewound or not depends on the machine specifications Depending on the machine specifications the system is reset by the M02 or M30 command upon completion of tape rewinding and any other commands issued in the same block Although the contents of the command position display counter are not cleared by this reset action the modal commands and compensation amounts are canceled The next operation stops when the rewinding operation is completed the in automatic operation lamp goes off To restart the unit the automatic start button must be pressed or similar steps must be taken Note 1 Independent signals are also output respectively for the MOO M01 M02 and M30 commands and these outputs are each reset by pressing t
166. eciliCations iii sic taviewtin ded ceecetaeasakennsdeeeetaieaiieac tne aU cae 180 13 5 1 User macro commands G65 G66 G66 1 G67 oo ce ceseceeceeeeeeseseseeeeeeeenes 180 13 5 2 Macro call instruction onc 5 not erence haute tte teen des dats atc acectads gaat tadeoest pantie eee eentacestants 181 WBS AEE OE c c25 cs tan tet ca cee etaie E E A E E EAT 188 13 5 4 TYPOS OF MAN ADIOS soia n a tes onde aaa A ine sc Ea Aa Th AREE aA ARa 190 13 5 5 Arithmetic commandS seeesssssrsnsreessrrseessrornnrrunsrnesenssrrnnnnnnsnnnseanarornnrrunnnneaenne 219 13 5 67 COMI commands sesane a aa e a aa cite N sone 224 13 5 7 External output commandS e5eccs s c8 ces ebatcsgciaed ce eeeaaesa ti gelteeisahebaes uenivaeetdans 227 T3258 PIECAULONS crescdianss ot oictevensecacdtacndece ia puediegietevevs a ttacel waceevehagd ancl AA NEEE PSSE aaa AKAS 229 13 5 9 Actual examples of USING user Macros 0 00 eee eeeeee tenet eeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaes 231 13 6 G command mirror image G50 1 G51 1 oo ee eccceceneceesneeesneeeeeeeeseeaeeeseeeesneeeenneeess 235 13 7 Corner chamfering Corner rOUNGING cecececceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeeaaeteaeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 238 13 7 1 Comerchamfenng C Tiirik enep aeee aaa bes EMES cance RENERE AA AAE RENANE Ni 238 137 2 Comer rounding R peee a eta ened a A E A 240 13 8 CLS CUA G12 GI 3 rnini an riae entuueade oetua dtnads tadeaeeasersace tre 241 13 9 Program parameter input G10 G11 acct esses s
167. eck time Td has elapsed The deceleration check time Td is as follows depending on the acceleration deceleration type a Linear acceleration linear deceleration Td Ts oa Previous block Next block Ts Acceleration deceleration time constant Ts Td Deceleration check time Td Td Ts O 14ms b Exponential acceleration linear deceleration Td 2xTs a Previous block Next block Acceleration deceleration time constant Deceleration check time Td 2 x Ts 0 14ms c Exponential acceleration exponential deceleration Td 2xTs a Previous block Next block Ts Acceleration deceleration time constant Td Deceleration check time Td 2x Ts 0 14ms Where Ts is the acceleration time constant a 0 to 14ms The time required for the deceleration check during rapid traverse is the longest among the rapid traverse deceleration check times of each axis determined by the rapid traverse acceleration deceleration time constants and by the rapid traverse acceleration deceleration mode of the axes commanded simultaneously 28 6 Interpolation Functions ff Operation during in position check 6 1 Positioning Rapid traverse Execution of the next block starts after confirming that the position error amount of the positioning rapid traverse GOO command block and the block that carries out deceleration check with the linear interpolation G01 command is less than the in position width issued in this co
168. ed 3 If mirror image is applied on only one axis in the designated plane the rotation direction and compensation direction will be reversed for the arc or tool diameter compensation and coordinate rotation etc 4 This function is processed on the local coordinate system so the center of the mirror image will change when the counter is preset or when the workpiece coordinates are changed 235 13 Program Support Functions 13 6 G command mirror image 5 Reference point return during mirror image If the reference point return command G28 G30 is executed during the mirror image the mirror image will be valid during the movement to the intermediate point but will not be applied on the movement to the reference point after the intermediate point Intermediate point when mirror is applied Intermediate point Path on which mirror Programmed path is applied Mirror center 6 Return from zero point during mirror image If the return command G29 from the zero point is commanded during the mirror image the mirror will be applied on the intermediate point 7 The mirror image will not be applied on the G53 command 236 13 Program Support Functions Ef Precautions A CAUTION 13 6 G command mirror image A Turn the mirror image ON and OFF at the mirror image center If mirror image is canceled at a point other than the mirror center the absolute value and machine position will deviate as shown below
169. ed in the NC is valid only when the phase shift calculation signal is ON and for the combination of the basic spindle selection H_ and synchronous spindle D_ commanded with the rotation synchronization command no R address For example if the basic spindle and synchronous spindle phase error is saved as G114 1 H1 D 2 the saved phase error will be valid only when the phase offset request signal is ON and G114 1 H1 D_2 R is commanded If G114 1 H2 D 1 R is commanded in this case the phase shift amount will not be calculated correctly 16 The phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle saved in the NC is retained until the spindle synchronization phase shift calculation in other words until the rotation synchronous control command completes with the phase shift calculation request signal is ON 17 Synchronous tapping can not be used during spindle synchronous mode 18 When the spindle synchronous control commands are being issued with the PLC I F method 1300 ext36 bit7 OFF a program error P610 will occur if the spindle synchronous control is commanded with G114 1 G113 89 10 Spindle Functions 10 8 Spindle synchronization control Il 10 8 Spindle synchronization control Il EJ lY Function and purpose In a machine having two or more spindles this function controls the rotation speed and phase of one spindle synchronous spindle in synchronization with the rotation of the other s
170. eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeaes 130 12 3 5 General precautions for tool radius COMPENSATION eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteaeees 132 12 3 6 Changing of offset No during compensation MOE ccecceeeceeteeeeeeteteeeneees 133 12 3 7 Start of tool radius compensation and Z axis cut in Operation 135 12 3 8 IRCHOFEMCO CMECK 2 e555 cencedact canst asenn sates cs aedenuctaantesseQeean cxcetagsstenvecetenceds huastucns 137 12 4 Programmed offset input G10 G11 ee cece csee cece cece eee eeeeeteaeeeaeeeaeeseaeeesaeeseneeeeeeas 144 13 Program Support Functions 2 2 02 ccc es cecctceccecscts chaceecuceacctssenedaccetarsiserconcencunsooxeusevencesternsee 149 13 1 CARNE CYCIOSS ccccr ci Silt r ee cactalmuntedensdst ar E E a E EA AK EE ETENEE 149 13 1 1 Standard canned cycles G80 to G89 G73 G74 G76 s ssssesssnsssneerre rererere nerean 149 13 1 2 Initial point and R point level return G98 G99 s ssnesseeneessnenresnnernsrnerrernnrrnsre 166 13 1 3 Setting of workpiece coordinates in canned cycle MOdE cccccceeeteeeeteeeeees 167 13 2 Special canned cycle G34 G35 G36 G37 1 oo ceeceeesecceseeessneeeeseeeesseeessseeesenees 168 13 3 Subprogram control M98 M99 sii ecu dcelevncs cus deaded Since dese Geerieseadchaiaameeiireaedses 172 13 3 1 Calling subprogram with M98 and M99 commands cceeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 172 13 4 Variable COMMA NS issia sninn ia aai ea naaar Taa AAEE ANE EEE 177 13 5 User macro Sp
171. ees aeeeeSceett eatiaa dish Nocteen teeny 243 13 10 Macro interrupt M96 M97 cee cccccesececeeeseeceeeceeeeeeceeeaeeeesenaeeeesscenecesseseeeeeessneeeees 244 13 11 Tool change position return G30 1 to GB0 6 eeecccesceeseeeeeeeceesseeeeseeeessneeeeneeeeees 253 13 12 High accuracy control G61 1 sciecetnegessasesiaaecacecidh jattensetcerestds nesateeden sds deeacetateereatig ames 256 13 13 Synchronizing operation between part SYStEMS ccceccecececeeeteeeseeeesseeeesseeeeseaeeess 266 13 14 Start Point Designation Synchronizing Type 1 G115 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 271 13 15 Start Point Designation Synchronizing Type 2 G116 cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 273 13 16 Miscellaneous function output during axis movement G11 7 0 ce ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee 276 14 Coordinates System Setting FUNCTIONS csscceeeeeseeeneeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeneseeeeeeneennenenes 278 14 1 Coordinate words and control axes x sic s S cei ac tase dayandi ct cesses nbc adeaantnaesdsocwianedeetss 278 14 2 Basic machine work and local Coordinate SYStOMS ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee 279 14 3 Machine zero point and 2nd 3rd 4th reference points Zero point eee 280 14 4 Basic machine coordinate system Selection G53 ecccccesceesseeeseeeeesseeeesteeeeseees 281 14 5 Coordinate system Setting G92 oo eee ceceeseeeeeeeeceeaceeeeeeaeeeeaeeeaeeeeeseeaeeaaeesseneeeneaes 282 14 6 Automatic
172. en issued 2 The tool radius compensation offset No is 0 lt D lt max offset No 3 The movement command of positioning G00 or linear interpolation G01 is issued At the start of compensation the operation is executed after at least three movement command blocks if three movement command blocks are not available after five movement command blocks have been read regardless of the continuous operation or single block operation During compensation 5 blocks are pre read and the compensation is arithmetically processed Control mode transition diagram Pre read buffer Execution block There are two ways of starting the compensation operation type A and type B The type can be selected with bit 2 of parameter 1229 set 01 This type is used in common with the compensation cancel type In the following explanatory figure S denotes the single block stop point 106 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation ff Start of movement for tool radius compensation 1 For inner side of corner Linear gt Linear Linear gt Circular Program path r Compensation amount Program path gt Tool center path 7 N lt Tool center 7 G42 i ool center path e Start point Center of circular Program path Start point Start point Genter of circular roam pa Linear gt Linear Type B Linear gt Circular Type B Point of intersection Point of intersection gt Tool ce
173. en the interference avoidance check is used 12 3 Tool radius compensation Tool center path Program path N1 N3 N2 Tool center path w hen interference is Solid line vector Valid Fooi center path without interference Potted Ine vector Invalid Program path Linear movement _ SS a a e Program path N1 T Center of circular 140 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation Avoidance N3 vector N2 Tool center path N1 Avoidance ee Program path If all of the line vectors for the interference avoidance are deleted create a new avoidance vector as shown on the right to avoid the interference Avoidance vector 1 Avoidance vector 2 N2 Program path Interference avoidance path lt Tool center path Program path 141 12 Tool Offset Functions ff Interference check alarm The interference check alarm occurs under the following conditions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 1 When the interference check alarm function has been selected a When all the vectors at the end block of its own block have been deleted When as shown in the figure vectors 1 through 4 at the end point of the N1 block have all been deleted program error P153 results prior to N1 execution 2 When the interference check avoidance function has been selected a When there are valid vectors at the end point of the following
174. erations 1 The sequence of the arithmetic operations 1 through 3 is respectively the functions followed by the multiplication arithmetic followed in turn by the addition arithmetic 13 5 User macro specifications 101 111 112 SIN 1 13 1 Function 2 Multiplication arithmetic 3 Addition arithmetic 2 The part to be given priority in the operation sequence should be enclosed in square parentheses Up to 5 pairs of such parentheses including those for the functions may be used 101 SQRT 111 112 SIN 113 114 15 First pair of parentheses Second pair of parentheses Third pair of parentheses ff Examples of arithmetic commands 1 Main Program and G65 P100 A10 B20 10 000 argument 101 100 000 102 20 000 designation 200 000 100 000 200 000 2 Definition and 1000 000 substitution 1000 000 100 000 From common 200 000 variables 10 000 From offset amount 3 Addition and 11 1 1000 2000 000 subtraction 12 2 50 12 950 000 13 101 1 13 1100 000 14 5041 3 14 13 000 15 5041 102 15 190 000 4 Logical sum OR 3 100 3 01100100 4 30R14 14 00001110 4 01101110 110 5 Exclusive OR 3 100 3 01100100 XOR 4 3XOR14 14 00001110 4 01101010 106 220 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 6 Multiplication and 21 100 100 10000 000 division
175. erence point zero point return position The G53 commands will all move with rapid traverse If the G53 command and G28 command reference point return are issued in the same block the command issued last will be valid 500 500 PS Reference zero point R 1 return position 1 Basic machine coordinate system zero point 1st reference point coordinates X 500 Y 500 281 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 5 Coordinate system setting 14 5 Coordinate system setting G92 Ej Function and purpose By commanding G92 the absolute value workpiece coordinate system and current position display value can be preset in the command value without moving the machine Fa Command format G92 XX Yy 221 ad 5 aa Additional axis fe Detailed description 1 After the power is turned on the first reference point return will be done with dog type and when completed the coordinate system will be set automatically Automatic coordinate system setting R Basic machine coordinate system RM Reference point return completed Bute ON i ad The basic machine Power ON osition D gt coordinate system osition p w ___ and workpiece R lt f Current Reference point coordinate system 100 a value return are created at the Z X 0 000 reset position a Y 0 000 F p yo Workpiece lt Workpiece coordinate X 300 000 Y 200 000 2 By commanding G92 the absolute value workpiece coordin
176. eroes are not omitted Leading zeroes are suppressed The leading zeroes can also be replaced by blank if so specified with a parameter This can justify printed data on the last column Note A data output command can be issued even in dual system mode In this case however note that the output channel is shared for both systems So take care not to execute data output in both systems simultaneously 228 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 13 5 8 Precautions Ef Precautions When the user macro commands are employed it is possible to use the M S T and other NC control commands together with the arithmetic decision branching and other macro commands for preparing the machining programs When the former commands are made into executable statements and the latter commands into macro statements the macro statement processing should be accomplished as quickly as possible in order to minimize the machining time because such processing is not directly related to machine control As a result the parameter 8101 macro single can be set and the macro statements can be processed in parallel with the execution of the executable statement The parameter can be set OFF during normal machining to process all the macro statements together or set ON during a program check to execute the macro statements block by block This enables the setting to be made in accordance with the intended objective in mind Examp
177. erse run command is issued 10 8 Spindle synchronization control Il 2 The spindle synchronization control mode will be entered even if the spindle synchronization control signal is turned ON while the spindle rotation speed command is ON However synchronous control will not actually take place Synchronous control will start after the rotation speed is commanded to the basic spindle and then the spindle synchronization complete signal will be output 3 The spindle rotating with spindle synchronization control will stop when emergency stop is applied 4 An operation error will occur if the spindle synchronization control signal is turned ON while the basic spindle and synchronous spindle designations are illegal 5 The rotation speed clamp during spindle synchronization control will follow the smaller clamp value set for the basic spindle or synchronous spindle 6 Orientation of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is not possible during the spindle synchronization To carry out orientation turn the spindle synchronization control signal OFF first 7 The rotation speed command is invalid for the synchronous spindle during the spindle synchronization Note that the modal is rewritten thus the commanded rotation speed will be validated after spindle synchronization is canceled 8 The constant surface speed control is invalid for the synchronous spindle during the spindle synchronization However note that the modal is
178. es The input unit for G20 and G21 will not change just by changing the command unit In other words if the machining program command unit changes to an inch unit at G20 when the initial inch is OFF the setting unit of the tool offset amount will remain metric Thus take note to the setting value Example 1 Relationship between input command units and G20 G21 commands with decimal point input type 1 Input command Command Metric output 1016 iout 0 Inch output 1016 iout 1 unit type cunit example G21 G G2i_ G20 10 X100 0 100 mm 0 254 mm 0 0039 inch 0 0100 inch Y100 0 100 mm 0 254 mm 0 0039 inch 0 0100 inch Z100 0 100 mm 0 254 mm 0 0039 inch 0 0100 inch X100 0 0100mm 0 0254 mm 0 00039inch 0 00100inch Y100 0 0100mm 0 0254 mm 0 00039inch 0 00100inch Z100 0 0100mm 0 0254 mm 0 00039inch 0 00100inch Note 1 When changing between G20 and G21 with program commands it is necessary in advance to convert the parameters variables and the offsets for the tool diameter tool position tool length to the units in the input settings of the input setting unit system for each axis that have inch or metric commands and make the settings using the parameter tape Example 2 Input setting unit 1015 cunit 10 1041 _inch 0 Position command unit 0 001mm Compensation amount setting unit st When the compensation amount is 0 05mm for 0 001mm In the above example when changing from G21 to
179. es i in Note 1 All common variables are retained even when the power is switched off Note 2 When the power is turned off or reset the common variables can be set to lt null gt by setting the parameter 1128 RstVC1 1129 PwrVC1 Note 3 The common variables are divided into the following two types Common variables 1 Used in common through all part systems Common variables 2 Used in common in the programs of the part system 178 13 Program Support Functions 13 4 Variable commands 3 Variable quotations Variables can be used for all addresses except O N and slash a When the variable value is used directly MH coos E E eae eh Value of 1 is used as the X value b When the complement of the variable value is used OE i PETE EN Value with the 2 sign changed is used as the X value c When defining variables HOS HO EA E E Variable 3 uses the equivalent value of variable 5 1 1000 pie want Siam Variable 1 uses the equivalent value 1000 which is treated as 1000 d When defining variables 1 3 2 100 000 The value of the arithmetic result of 3 2 100 Is used as the 1 value PENEN The value of the arithmetic result of 1 3 1000 Is used as the X value X 1 3 1000 Note 1 A variable cannot be defined in the same block as an address It must be defined in a separate block Incorrect Correct X 1 3 100 gt 1 3 100 X 1 Note 2 Up to fi
180. ese special purpose control functions macro programs are called by the macro call instructions exactly when required from the main program The following G codes are available for the macro call commands User macro Simple call User macro Modal call A called after the movement command G66 1 User macro Modal call B called after the every block G67 User macro Modal call cancel ff Detailed description 1 When the G66 or 66 1 command is entered the specified user macro subprogram will be called after each block has been executed or after the movement command in the block with the movement commands has been executed until the G67 cancel command is entered 2 The G66 or G66 1 and G67 commands must be paired in the same program 180 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 13 5 2 Macro call instruction Ej Function and purpose Included among the macro call commands are the simple calls which apply only to the instructed block and also modal calls types A and B which apply to each block in the call modal ff Simple macro calls Main program To subprogram Subprogram O G65PpiLM lt argument gt To main program M99 is used to conclude the user macro subprogram Format lt argument gt Program No No of repetitions When the lt argument gt must be transferred as a local variable to a user macro subprogram the actual value should be designated
181. esignated as f and rotary axis CA is to be controlled f units min P tool end point Angular speed is f lt Linear speed is _zeref 180 7 Rotation lt P tool start point center ae In this case in order to make the cutting feed linear feed in the tool advance direction fc fo f x Therefore the feedrate to be designated in the program must be 180 Ter f fe x When linear and rotary axes are to be controlled at the same time The controller proceeds in exactly the same way whether linear or rotary axes are to be controlled When a rotary axis is to be controlled the numerical value assigned by the coordinate word A B C is the angle and the numerical values assigned by the feedrate F are all handled as linear speeds In other words 1 of the rotary axis is treated as being equivalent to 1mm of the linear axis Consequently when both linear and rotary axes are to be controlled simultaneously the components for each axis of the numerical values assigned by F will be the same as previously described When controlling linear axes However although in this case both the size and direction of the speed components based on linear axis control do not vary the direction of the speed components based on rotary axis control will change along with the tool movement their size will not change This means as a result that the combined tool advance direction feedrate
182. estion 2 When all the end point coordinates are omitted or when the end point is the same position as the start point a 360 arc full circle is commanded when the center is commanded using J and K 3 The following occurs when the start and end point radius do not match in an arc command a Program error P70 results at the arc start point when error AR is greater than parameter 1084 RadErr G91 GO2X9 899I 5 1084 RadErr parameter value 0 100 eae lt a ro Start point radius 5 000 End point radius 4 899 NS Error AR 0 101 N Alarm stop Center End point O O Start point 7 P Start point radius nd point radius _ AR b Spiral interpolation in the direction of the commanded end point results when error AR is less than the parameter value G91 G02X9 91 5 5 Spiral interpolation RSS 1084 RadErr parameter value 0 100 N Start point radius 5 000 NL _ End point radius 4 900 Eror AR 0 100 Center End point O O End point radius Start point 9 Start point radius The parameter setting range is from 0 001mm to 1 000mm 38 6 Interpolation Functions 6 5 R specified circular interpolation 6 5 R specified circular interpolation G02 G03 Ej Function and purpose Along with the conventional circular interpolation commands based on the arc center coordinate I J K designation these commands can also be issued by directly designat
183. etting and offset Example 3 When workpiece coordinate system G54 has shifted 500 500 in example 2 It is assumed that 3 through 10 in example 2 have been entered in subprogram 01111 This is not required when there is no G53 offset 3 G54 X Amount by which workpiece coordinate system New workpiece coordinate system is set 1 Reference zero point return position A Old G54 coordinate X system X G55 G54 New G54 coordinate New G55 coordinate sys SS system Note The workpiece coordinate system will shift each time steps 3 through 5 are repeated The reference point return G28 command should therefore be issued upon completion of the program 297 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset Example 4 When six workpieces are placed on the same coordinate system of G54 to G59 and each is to be machined with the same machining 1 Setting of workpiece offset data Workpiece1 X 100 000 Y 100 000 2 X 100 000 Y 500 000 3 X 500 000 Y 100 000 4 X 500 000 Y 500 000 5 X 900 000 Y 100 000 6 X 900 000 Y 500 000 2 Machining program subprogram 0100 N1 G90 GO G43X 50 Y 50 Z 100 H10 Positioning N2 G01 X 200 F50 Y 200 X 50 Face cutting Y 50 N3 G28 X0 YO ZO 2 N4 G98 G81 X 125 Y 75 Z 150 R 100 F40 X 175 Y 125 Drilling X 125 Y 175 X 75 Y 1285 AUN G80 N5 G28 X0 YO ZO l
184. f error a b c 1 55 x 105 4 66 x 10 4 66 x 10 1 86 x 10 Relative error a i a 1 24 x 10 3 73 x 10 al a SIN b F a COS b 5 0 x 10 1 0 x 10 Absolute error a ATAN b c 1 8x 10 3 6x 10 lel Note SIN COS is calculated for the function TAN T w Notes on reduced accuracy 1 2 3 Addition and subtraction It should be noted that when absolute values are used subtractively in addition or subtraction the relative error cannot be kept below 10 For instance it is assumed that the real values produced as the arithmetic calculation result of 10 and 20 are as follows these values cannot be substituted directly 10 2345678988888 888 20 2345678901 234 567 Performing 10 20 will not produced 10 320 87654 321 There are 8 significant digits in the variables and so the values of 10 and 20 will be as follows strictly speaking the internal values will differ somewhat from the values below because they are binary numbers 10 2345679000000 000 20 2345678900000 000 Consequently 10 20 100000 000 will generate a large error Logical operations EQ NE GT LT GE and LE are basically the same as addition and subtraction and so care should be taken with errors For instance to determine whether or not 10 and 20 are equal in the above example IF 10EQ 20 It is not always possible to provide proper evaluation because of the above mentioned error
185. fer to the Instruction Manual issued by the machine manufacturer _ 5 3 Data Formats 3 8 G code lists Note 6 Whether the modal is initialized differs for each reset input 1 Reset 1 The modal is initialized when the reset initialization parameter 1151 rstinit is ON 2 Reset 2 and Reset and Rewind The modal is initialized when the signal is input 3 Reset at emergency stop release Conforms to Reset 1 4 When an automatic reset is carried out at the start of individual functions such as reference point return Conforms to Reset and Rewind CAUTION A The commands with no value after G will be handled as GOO 3 9 Precautions before starting machining Ef Precautions before starting machining CAUTION A When creating the machining program select the appropriate machining conditions so that the machine NC performance capacity and limits are not exceeded The examples do not allow for the machining conditions A Carry out dry operation before actually machining and confirm the machining program tool offset and workpiece offset amount 16 4 Buffer Register 4 1 Pre read buffers 4 Buffer Register Keyboard gt MDidata Analysis processing Mode switching Arithmetic processing 4 1 Pre read buffers Ej Function and purpose During automatic processing the contents of 1 block are normally pre read so that program analysis processing is co
186. fering C_ EJ Function and purpose The corner is chamfered in such a way that the positions produced by subtracting the lengths commanded by C_ from the imaginary starting and final corners which would apply if no chamfering were to be performed are connected Command format a N100 G01 X_Y_ C_ N200 G01 X_Y_ C_ Length up to chamfering starting point or end point from imaginary corner Chamfering is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect Example of program R 1 G91 G01 X100 C10 2 X100 Y100 2 Imaginary corner intersection point Chamfering Chamfering start point end point 238 13 Program Support Functions ff Detailed description 1 2 3 13 7 Corner chamfering corner rounding The start point of the block following the corner chamfering serves as the imaginary corner intersection point When the comma in C is not present it is handled as a C command When both the corner chamfer and corner rounding commands exist in the same block the latter command is valid Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner chamfering Program error P381 results when there is an arc command in the block following the corner chamfering block Program error P382 results when the block following the corner chamfering block does not have a linear command Program error P383 results when the movement amount in the corner cha
187. fset is executed with h1 G45 Xx1 Yy1 Hh6 G49 222 EAEE The tool length offset is canceled G43 222 ERETO Tool length offset is executed again with h1 If G43 is commanded in the G43 modal an offset of the difference between the offset No data will be executed Example 4 G43 Zz1 Hh1 Becomes the z1 h1 movement G43 Zz2 Hh2 Becomes the z2 h2 Ih1 movement The same applies for the G44 command in the G44 modal 103 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 2 Tool length offset cancel 3 Axis valid for tool length offset a When parameter 1080 Dril_Z is set to 1 the tool length offset is always applied on the Z axis b When parameter 1080 Dril_Z is set to 0 the axis will depend on the axis address commanded in the same block as G43 The order of priority is shown below Zp gt Yp gt Xp Example 5 G43 Xx1 Hh we offset to X axis G49 Xx2 G44 Yyt Ah S annsna offset to Y axis G49 Yy2 G43 cid HRS i iiei offset to additional offset G49 ai G43 Xx3 Yy3 223 jo Offset is applied on Z axis G49 The handling of the additional axis will follow the parameters 1029 to 1031 aux_l J and K settings If the tool length offset is commanded for the rotary axis set the rotary axis name for one of the parallel axes c If H offset No is not designated in the same block as G43 the Z axis will be valid Example 6 G43 HN jo eee Offset and cancel to X axis 49
188. functions are added Refer to the specifications issued by the machine manufacturer before starting use Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine manufacturer for details on each machine tool N Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system or its version and some functions may not be possible Please confirm the specifications before use 2 Items related to operation Before starting actual machining always carry out dry operation to confirm the machining A program tool offset amount and workpiece offset amount etc If the workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during single block stop the new setting will be valid from the next block Continued on next N CAUTION AN Turn the mirror image ON and OFF at the mirror image center If the tool offset amount is changed during automatic operation including during single block stop it will be validated from the next block or blocks onwards 3 Items related to programming A The commands with no value after G will be handled as G00 N EOB and EOR are explanatory notations The actual codes are Line feed and for ISO and End of block and End of Record for EIA A When creating the machining program select the appropriate machining conditions and make sure that the performance capacity and limits of the machine and NC are not exceeded The examples do not consider the machining conditions Do not change
189. g 2 unit parameter 8014 Thread cutting cycle 1011 Byte Machining cutoff angle parameter 8015 Thread cutting cycle 1012 Byte Machining chamfering amount parameter 8016 G71 cut amount 788 2 word 0 99999 x 2 Interpolation Machining unit parameter 8017 G71 cut amount 792 2 word 0 99999x2 Interpolation Machining change amount junit parameter 8301 X X axis chuck barrier 1136 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 1 unit 8302 X X axis chuck barrier 1140 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 2 junit 8303 X X axis chuck barrier 1144 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 3 junit 8304 X X axis chuck barrier 1148 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 4 unit 8305X X axis chuck barrier 1152 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 5 junit 8306 X X axis chuck barrier 1156 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 6 unit 8301 Z Z axis chuck barrier 1160 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 1 junit 8302Z Z axis chuck barrier 1164 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 2 unit 8303 Z Z axis chuck barrier 1168 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 3 i unit 8304 Z Z axis chuck barrier 1172 2 word 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 4 junit 321 Appendix 1 Program Parameter Input N No Correspondence Table P No 11 Axis common parame
190. g axis in position width As shown above the format is divided into the hole machining mode hole positioning data hole machining data No of repetitions spindle rotation speed synchronization changeover or spindle rotation speed at during retract positioning axis in position width and drilling axis in position width fe Detailed description 1 Data outline and corresponding address a Hole machining mode Fixed cycle modes such as drilling counter boring tapping and boring b Hole position data Data used to position the X and Y axes unmodal c Hole machining data Machining data actually used for machining modal d No of repetitions Number of times to carry out drilling machining unmodal e Synchronization changeover Command for selecting synchronous asynchronous tapping during G84 G74 tapping modal 2 If MOO or M01 is commanded in the same block as the canned cycle or during the canned cycle mode the canned cycle will be ignored Instead MOO and M01 will be output after positioning The canned cycle will be executed if X Y Z or R is commanded 150 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles 3 There are 7 actual operations which are each described in turn below Operation 1 Operation 2 DELEA Initial point Operation 3 Operation 7 R point Operation 4 Operation 6 Operation 5 O Operation 1 This indicates the X and Y axes positioning and executes positioning with
191. h command Metric command Reference point check Reference point return Start point return 2nd to 4th reference point return Tool position return 1 Tool position return 2 Tool position return 3 Tool position return 4 Tool position return 5 Tool position return 6 Skip function Multi step skip function Multi step skip function 1 1 Multi step skip function 1 2 Multi step skip function 1 3 Thread cutting l 3 3 Data Formats G code 34 35 36 37 37 1 38 39 41 42 43 44 51 52 53 e 55 56 57 58 59 54 1 60 61 61 1 62 63 65 66 66 1 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 09 09 09 09 09 a Special fixed cycle Automatic tool length measurement Special fixed cycle 3 8 G code lists Function Special fixed cycle bolt hole circle Special fixed cycle line at angle arc grid Tool radius compensation vector designation Tool radius compensation corner arc Tool radius compensation cancel Tool radius compensation left Tool radius compensation right Tool length offset Tool length offset Tool length offset cancel G command mirror image cancel G command mirror image ON Local coordinate system setting Machine coordinate system selection Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
192. hange position return is on for an added axis the added axis also returns to the tool change position after the X and Z axes reach the tool change position 4 G30 4 command The X axis returns to the tool change position then the Y axis and Z axis 5 G30 5 command 6 G30 6 command simultaneously do the same thing If tool change position return is on for an added axis the added axis also return to the tool change position after the X Y and X axes reach the tool change position The Y axis returns to the tool change position then the X and Z axes return to the tool change position simultaneously If tool change position return is on for an added axis the added axis also returns to the tool change position after the X Y and Z axes reach the tool change position The X Y and Z axes return to the tool change position simultaneously If tool change position return is on for an added axis the added axis also returns to the tool change position after the X Y and Z axes reach the tool change position 254 13 Program Support Functions 2 13 11 Tool change position return After all necessary tool change position return is completed by a G30 n command tool change position return complete signal TCP X64B is turned on When an axis out of those having returned to the tool change position by a G30 n command leaves the tool change position the TCP signal is turned off With a G30 1 command for example the TCP s
193. hanges will be valid from the next block of the command several blocks later 283 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 7 Reference zero point return 14 7 Reference zero point return G28 G29 Ej Function and purpose 1 After the commanded axes have been positioned by GO they are returned respectively at rapid traverse to the first reference zero point when G28 is commanded 2 By commanding G29 the axes are first positioned independently at high speed to the G28 or G30 intermediate point and then positioned by GO at the commanded position 2nd reference point 0 0 0 0 Machine zero point Reference point X3 3 Z3 0g G28 G29 ol cars EAM ES EZ x Viz 5 1 Y1 1 041 K Intermediate point 3th reference point 4th reference point ga Command format G28 Xx Yy ZZ aa Automatic reference point return G29 Xx Yy2 ZZ aaz Start position return 04 2 additional axis 284 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions i Detailed description 1 14 7 Reference zero point return The G28 command is equivalent to the following G00 XX1 Yy ZZ aQ G00 XX3 Yy3 ZZ 003 In this case x3 y3 Z3 and a3 are the reference point coordinates and they are set by a parameter 2037 G53ofs as the distance from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate system After the power has been switched on the axes which have not been subject to manual reference zero point a
194. he address It defines the meaning of the numerical information which follows it For details of the types of words and the number of significant digits of words used for this controller refer to the format details Blocks A block is a collection of words It includes the information which is required for the machine to execute specific operations One block unit constitutes a complete command The end of each block is marked with an EOB end of block code Example 1 GOX 1000 2 blocks G1X 2000F500 Example 2 GOX 1000 Since the semicolon in the parentheses will not result G1X 2000F500 in an EOB it is 1 block Programs A program is a collection of several blocks Note 1 When there is no number following the alphabetic character in the actual program the numeric value following the alphabetic character is handled as a 0 Example G28XYZ gt G28X0Y0Z0 3 Data Formats Item Program number Sequence number Preparatory function Input Movement setting unit axis Input setting unit Input Additional setting unit axis Input setting unit Input setting unit Dwell Input setting unit Input Feed setting unit function Input setting unit Input Fixed setting unit cycle Input setting unit Tool offset Miscellaneous function Spindle function Tool function 0 01 mm 0 001 mm 0 0001 inch 0 01 mm 0 001 9 mm 0 0001 inch 0 01 rev mm 0 001 rev
195. he reset key Note 2 M02 or M30 can be assigned by manual data input MDI At this time commands can be issued simultaneously with other commands Macro interrupt M96 M97 M96 and M97 are M codes for user macro interrupt control The M code for user macro interrupt control is processed internally and is not output externally To use M96 and M97 as a miscellaneous code change the setting to another M code with the parameter 1109 subs_M and 1110 M96_M 1111 M97_M Subprogram call completion M98 M99 These commands are used as the return instructions from branch destination subprograms and branches to subprograms M98 and M99 are processed internally and so M code signals and strobe signals are not output Internal processing with M00 M01 M02 M30 commands Internal processing suspends pre reading when the MOO M01 M02 or M30 command has been read Indexing operation other than M02 M03 and the initialization of modals by resetting differ according the machine specifications 73 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9 2 Secondary miscellaneous functions B8 digits A8 or C8 digits 9 2 Secondary miscellaneous functions B8 digits A8 or C8 digits Ej Function and purpose These serve to assign the indexing table positioning and other such functions In this controller they are assigned by an 8 digit number from 0 to 99999999 following address A B or C The machine maker determines which codes correspond to which positions Whe
196. he rotation speed clamp during spindle synchronization control will follow the smaller clamp value set for the basic spindle or synchronous spindle 4 Orientation of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is not possible during the spindle synchronous control mode To carry out orientation cancel the spindle synchronous control mode first 5 The rotation speed command S command is invalid for the synchronous spindle during the spindle synchronous control mode Note that the modal will be updated so this will be validated when spindle synchronous control is canceled 6 The constant surface speed control is invalid for the synchronous spindle during the spindle synchronization control mode Note that the modal will be updated so this will be validated when spindle synchronization is canceled 7 The rotation speed command S command and constant surface speed control for the synchronous spindle will be validated when spindle synchronous control is canceled Thus the synchronous spindle may carry out different operations when this control is canceled 8 An attention should be made that if the phase synchronization command is executed with the phase error not obtained by the phase shift calculation request signal the phase shift amount will not be obtained correctly 9 The spindle rotation speed command S command and the constant surface speed control for the synchronous spindle will become valid when the spindle synchronous c
197. hen a multiple number of axes have been commanded at the same time the effective rate FC in formula 1 applies in the vector direction of the command 54 7 Feed Functions 7 4 Synchronous feed Note 1 The effective rate mm min or inch min which is produced by converting the commanded speed the spindle speed and the cutting feed override into the per minute speed appears as the FC on the monitor 1 Screen of the setting and display unit Note 2 When the above effective rate exceeds the cutting feed clamp rate it is clamped at that clamp rate Note 3 If the spindle speed is zero when synchronous feed is executed operation alarm 105 results Note 4 During machine lock high speed processing the rate will be 60 000mm min or 2 362 inch min 60 000 min regardless of the commanded speed and spindle speed When high speed processing is not undertaken the rate will be the same as for non machine lock conditions Note 5 Under dry run conditions asynchronous speed applies and movement results at the externally set rate mm min inch min min Note 6 The fixed cycle G84 tapping cycle and G74 reverse tapping cycle are executed to the feed mode that is already designated Note 7 Whether asynchronous feed G94 or synchronous feed G95 is to be established when the power is switched on or when M02 or M30 is executed is set with parameter 1074 _Sync 55 7 Feed Functions 7 5 Feedrate designation and effe
198. hronization The spindle synchronous control mode is entered by inputting the spindle synchronous control signal SPSYC The synchronous spindle will be controlled in synchronization with the rotation speed commanded for the basic spindle during the spindle synchronous control mode When the difference of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle rotation speeds reaches the spindle synchronization rotation speed reach level setting value 3050 sprlv the spindle rotation speed synchronization complete signal FSPRV will be output The synchronous spindle s rotation direction is designated with the spindle synchronization rotation direction designation as the same as the basic spindle or the reverse direction 10 8 Spindle synchronization control Il Device No Signalname Abbrev Explanation Y432 Spindle SPSYC _ The spindle synchronous control mode is synchronous entered when this signal turns ON control X42A In spindle SPSYN1 This notifies that the mode is the spindle synchronous synchronous control control X42B Spindle rotation FSPRV This turns ON when the difference of the basic speed spindle and synchronous spindle rotation synchronization speeds reaches the spindle rotation speed complete reach level setting value during the spindle synchronous control mode This signal turns OFF when the spindle synchronous control mode is canceled or when an error exceeding the spindle rotation speed reach leve
199. ial Canned Holes Zero will occur Drilling of n obtained by dividing the circumference by n will start at point created by the Z axis and angle 0 The circumference is that of the radius R centering on the coordinates designated with XX and Y The hole drilling operation at each hole will hold the drilling data for the standard canned cycle such as G81 The movement between hole positions will all be done in the GOO mode G34 will not hold the data even when the command is completed Example When input setting unit is 0 001mm No01 G91 Noo2 G81 Z 10000 R5000 LO F200 N003 G90 G34 X200000 Y100000 1100000 J20000 K6 gy acct cnet eas Cancel of G81 NOO5 G90 GO X500000 Y100000 X 200mm Position before N005 GO command G34 is executed As shown in the example the tool position after the G34 command is completed is over the final hole When moving to the next position the coordinate value must be calculated to issue the command with an incremental value Thus use of the absolute value mode is handy 168 13 Program Support Functions ff Line at angle G35 13 2 Special canned cycle G35 X x1 Y yildJ Kn X Y Designation of start point coordinates This will be affected by G90 G91 Interval d The unit follows the input setting unit If d is negative the drilling will take place in the direction symmetrical to the point that is the center of the start point Angle 6 The CCW direction is pos
200. ide will not be applied when the maximum angle in the parameter is set to 0 or 180 Automatic corner override will not be applied when the override in the parameter is set to 0 or 100 68 7 Feed Functions 7 11 Tapping mode 7 11 Tapping mode G63 Ej Function and purpose FF The G63 command allows the control mode best suited for tapping to be entered as indicated below 1 Cutting override is fixed at 100 2 Deceleration commands at joints between blocks are invalid 3 Feed hold is invalid 4 Single block is invalid 5 In tapping mode signal is output G63 is released by the exact stop check mode G61 high accuracy control mode G61 1 automatic corner override G62 or cutting mode G64 command Command format 7 12 Cutting mode G64 EJ FF Function and purpose The G64 command allows the cutting mode in which smooth cutting surfaces are obtained to be established Unlike the exact stop check mode G61 the next block is executed continuously with the machine not decelerating and stopping between cutting feed blocks in this mode G64 is released by the exact stop check mode G61 high accuracy control mode G61 1 automatic corner override G62 or tapping mode G63 command This cutting mode is established in the initialized status Command format 69 8 Dwell 8 Dwell 8 1 Per second dwell The G04 command can delay the start of the next block The dwell remaining time can be
201. ignal is turned on when the Z axis has reached the tool change position after the X and Y axes did after the additional axis did if additional axis tool change position return is valid The TCP signal is then turned off when the X or Y axis leaves the position If tool change position return for added axes is on with parameter 1092 Tchg_A the TCP signal is turned on when the added axis or axes have reached the tool change position after the standard axes did It is then turned off when one of the X Y Z and added axes leaves the position TCP signal output timing chart G30 3 command with tool change position return for added axes set on Work program GOOX 100 Arrival of Z axis to tool change position Arrival of X Y axes to tool change position Arrival of added axis to tool change position Tool change position return complete signal TCP When a tool change position return command is issued tool offset data such as for tool length offset and tool radias compensation for the axis that moved is canceled This command is executed by dividing blocks for every axis If this command is issued during single block operation therefore a block stop occurs each time one axis returns to the tool change position To make the next axis return to the tool change position therefore a cycle start needs to be specified 255 13 Program Support Functions 13 12 High accuracy control 13 12 High accuracy control G61 1 Ej F
202. in this interval is synchronous spindle can be i controlled with the handle Spindle synchronous Spindle Synehronous control OFF i Phase shift calculation request OFF Note 4 mode is set to the handle mode 93 The phases cannot be aligned while calculating the phase shift Note 5 The synchronous spindle cannot be rotated with the handle when the manual operation 10 Spindle Functions ft Chuck close signal The synchronous spindle side carries out droop compensation while the chuck is opened and aligns itself with the basic spindle However when the chuck is closed the droop compensation is added and the synchronization error with the base increases Droop compensation is prevented with the chuck close signal and the position where the chuck is grasped is maintained with position 10 8 Spindle synchronization control Il compensation Device No Signal name Abbrev Explanation Y431 Chuck close SPCMPC This turns ON when the chuck of both spindles are closed This signal is ON while the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle grasp the same workpiece X42D Chuck close SPCMP This turns ON when the chuck close signal is confirmation received during the spindle synchronous control mode Basic spindle chuck Chuck close Chuck close Chuck open Synchronous spindle chuck Chuck open Chuck close huck close confirmation Chuck close Spindle synchron
203. inate system G00X0Y0 Matched with local coordinate system by 9 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Current position X The local coordinate system is created by 5 canceled 9 and matched with the coordinate system Note If the program is executed repeatedly the workpiece coordinate system will deviate each time Thus when the program is completed the reference point return operation must be commanded Example 2 Local coordinates for incremental value mode The local coordinate system offset is cumulated G28X0Y0 G92X0Y0 G91G52X500Y500 M98P 100 G52x1 Y1 M98P 100 G52x 1 5 Y1 5 GOOG9OXOYO apt CU Se SON S paste 1 Xt ee C Ura coordinate system created by 5 G90G00X0Y0 G01X500 Y500 Lanan x ea C t Local coordinate system created by 3 500 1000 15007 2000 2500 3000 Matched x with local coordinate system by 7 BISGEGRS BROSES lt R 1 a w41 Current position Explanation The local coordinate system X Y is created at the XY coordinate system 500 500 position by 3 The local coordinate system X Y is created at the X Y coordinate system 1000 1000 position by 5 The local coordinate system is created at the X Y coordinate system 1500 1500 position by 7 In other words the same occurs as when the local coordinate system and XY coordinate system are matched and the local coordinate system is canceled 301 14 Coordinates Syste
204. inate system without changing the zero point positions of the workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 2 The local coordinate system offset will be cleared by the dog type manual reference zero point return or reference zero point return performed after the power has been switched on 3 The local coordinate system is canceled by G54 to G59 G52X0 YO ZO a0 4 Coordinate commands in the absolute value G90 cause the tool to move to the local coordinate system position G91 G52X Y Incremental value Ln Local coordinate Absolute value systems Absolute value G90 G52X_Y_ Work coordinate system h l F ty 4 Reference point Workpiece coordinate system offset DDB input screen setting G10L2P_X_Y_ EN External workpiece coordinate system offset ANI DDB input screen setting G10 PO X_Z_ Machine coordinate system Note Ifthe machining program is executed many times repeatedly the workpiece coordinate system may deviate slightly per execution Command to execute reference point return at the program end 300 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 11 Local coordinate system setting Example 1 Local coordinates for absolute value mode The local coordinate system offset is not cumulated G28X0Y0 2500 GOOG90X1 Y1 G92X0Y0 2000 P gt G00X500Y500 4500 Local coordinate cee w1 L1 system created by 5 100 1000 Zopo o i r 10 __New coord
205. ing the arc radius R g Command format G02 G03 Xx Yy Rr Ff X axis end point coordinate Y axis end point coordinate Arc radius Feedrate The arc radius is commanded with an input setting unit Caution is required for the arc command of an axis for which the input command value differs Command with a decimal point to avoid confusion ff Detailed description The arc center is on the bisector line which is perpendicular to the line connecting the start and end points of the arc The point where the arc with the specified radius whose start point is the center intersects the perpendicular bisector line serves as the center coordinates of the arc command If the R sign of the commanded program is plus the arc is smaller than a semisphere if it is minus the arc is larger than a semisphere Arc path when R sign is minus a 77 Arc path when R sign is plus The following condition must be met with an R specified arc interpolation command L 2xr lt 1 An error will occur when L 2 r gt parameter 1084 RadErr Where L is the line from the start point to end point When the R specification and J K specification are contained in the same block the R specification has priority in processing When the R specification and J K specification are contained in the same block the R specification has priority in processing The plane selection is the same as for the I J K specified arc
206. ion and purpose These are the units of setting data which are used as with the compensation amounts in common for all axes The input command units can be selected from the following types for each axis with the parameters The input setting units can be selected from the following types common to axes For further details on settings refer to the Instruction Manual Inputunit Millimeter Inch _ Rotation command command command command Input command 0 0001 Min movement unt 1003 iunit B 0 001 0 001 0 0001 0 0001 0 001 dna a Note 1 Inch metric conversion is performed in either of 2 ways conversion from the parameter screen 1041 _inch valid only when the power is switched on and conversion using the G command G20 or G21 However when a G command is used for the conversion the conversion applies only to the input command units and not to the input setting units Consequently the tool offset amounts and other compensation amounts as well as the variable data should be preset to correspond to inches or millimeters Note 2 The millimeter and inch systems cannot be used together Note 3 During circular interpolation on an axis where the input command units are different the center command I J K and the radius command R can be designated by the input setting units Use a decimal point to avoid confusion 3 Data Formats 3 1 Tape codes 3 Data Formats 3 1 Tape codes Ej Function and purp
207. ion but the operation within the creep distance during its final advance will not be affected by mirror image The tool moves to the end point at the dry run speed during dry run when the GO dry run function is valid Feed during creep distance movement with final positioning can be stopped by resetting emergency stop interlock feed hold and rapid traverse override zero The tool moves over the creep distance at the rapid traverse setting Rapid traverse override is valid Uni directional positioning is not performed for the drilling axis during drilling fixed cycles Uni directional positioning is not performed for shift amount movements during the fine boring or back boring fixed cycle Normal positioning is performed for axes whose creep distance has not been set by parameter 10 Uni directional positioning is always a non interpolation type of positioning 11 When the same position movement amount of zero has been commanded the tool moves back and forth over the creep distance and is positioned at its original position from the final advance direction 12 Program error P61 results when the G60 command is assigned with an NC system which has not been provided with this particular specification 50 7 Feed Functions 7 1 Rapid traverse rate 7 Feed Functions 7 1 Rapid traverse rate Ej Function and purpose The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis The available speed ranges are from 1 mm mi
208. is duplicated designate the addresses in the specified order c Addresses which do not need to be designated can be omitted d The following table shows the correspondence between the addresses which can be designated by argument designation II and the variable numbers in the user macro main body Argument Argument designation Il designation Il addr ress address Variable within macro 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Note 1 The numbers 1 through 10 accompanying l J and K denote the sequence of the commanded groups and they are not required for the actual instructions 3 Using arguments designations and Il together If addresses corresponding to the same variable are commanded when both types and II are used to designate arguments the latter address is valid Example 1 Call instruction G65 A1 1 B 2 2 D3 3 Variable 1 1 1 2 2 4 4 A In the above example the last 17 7 argument is valid when both arguments D3 3 and 17 7 are commanded for the 7 variable 183 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications ff Modal call A called after the movement command Main program Subprogram To subprogram G65PpiLi lt argument gt G67 To main program To subprogram When the block with a movement command is commanded between G66 and G67 the movement command is first executed and then the designated user macro s
209. ister R129 bit 8 Register R129 bit 9 Register R129 bit 10 Register R129 bit 11 Register R129 bit 12 Register R129 bit 13 Register R129 bit 14 Register R129 bit 15 13 Program Support Functions No of 13 5 User macro specifications No of Interface Interface System variable points output signal Register R130 bit 0 Register R130 bit 1 Register R130 bit 2 Register R130 bit 3 Register R130 bit 4 Register R130 bit 5 Register R130 bit 6 Register R130 bit 7 Register R130 bit 8 Register R130 bit 9 Register R130 bit 10 Register R130 bit 11 Register R130 bit 12 Register R130 bit 13 Register R130 bit 14 Register R130 bit 15 200 System variable points output signal Register R131 bit 0 Register R131 bit 1 Register R131 bit 2 Register R131 bit 3 Register R131 bit 4 Register R131 bit 5 Register R131 bit 6 Register R131 bit 7 Register R131 bit 8 Register R131 bit 9 Register R131 bit 10 Register R131 bit 11 Register R131 bit 12 Register R131 bit 13 Register R131 bit 14 Register R131 bit 15 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 2 Macro interface by part system output Note As for the C64T system the input output signals used for this function are valid up to 3rd part system System No of Interface output signal pia pains si s s 4 6 s R270 R370 R470 R570 R6e70 R770 R870 1100 1 bito bitoj bito bito bito bito bito
210. itive The decimal point position will be the degree class If there is no decimal point the unit will be 0 001 No of holes n to be drilled 1 to 9999 can be designated and the start point is included Using the position designated by X and Y as the start point the Zn holes will be drilled with interval din the direction created by X axis and angle 0 The hole drilling operation at each hole position will be determined by the standard canned cycle so the hole drilling data hole machining mode and hole machining data must be held beforehand The movement between hole positions will all be done in the G00 mode G35 will not hold the data even when the command is completed Example When input setting unit is 0 001mm G91 G81 Z 10000 R5000 LO F100 G35 X200000 Y100000 1100000 J30000 K5 on 5 holes Position before G35 is executed Note 1 If the K command is KO or if there is no K command the program error P221 will occur Note 2 If the K value is more than four digits the last four digits will be valid Note 3 If a group 0 G command is issued in the same block as the G35 command the command issued later is the priority Example G35 G28 Xx Yy li Jjt Kk G35 is ignored G 28 is executed as Xx1 Yy1 Note 4 If there is a G72 to G89 command in the same block as the G35 command the canned cycle will be ignored and the G35 command will be executed 169 13 Program Support Functions ff Arc
211. l setting value occurs during the spindle synchronous control mode Y434 Spindle SPSDR Designate the basic spindle and synchronous synchronization spindle rotation directions for spindle rotation synchronous control direction 0 The synchronous spindle rotates in the designation same direction as the basic spindle 1 The synchronous spindle rotates in the reverse direction of the basic spindle 91 10 Spindle Functions ft Spindle phase alignment Spindle phase synchronization starts when the spindle phase synchronous control signal GPPHS is input during the spindle synchronization control mode The spindle phase synchronization complete signal is output when the spindle synchronization phase reach level setting value 3051 spplv is reached The synchronous spindle s phase shift amount can also be designated from the PLC 10 8 Spindle synchronization control Il Device No Signal name Abbrev Explanation Y433 Spindle phase SPPHS Spindle phase synchronization starts when this synchronous signal is turned ON during the spindle control synchronous control mode Note 1 If this signal is turned ON in a mode other than the spindle synchronous control mode it will be ignored X42C Spindle phase FSPPH This signal is output when the spindle synchronization synchronization phase reach level is reached complete after starting spindle phase synchronization R159 Phase shift Designate the synchronous
212. le of program G91G28X0Y0Z0_ G92X0Y0ZO GOOX 100 Y 100 101 100 COS 210 102 100 SIN 210 GO1X 101Y 102F800 Macro statement Macro statements are 1 Arithmetic commands block including 2 Control commands block including GOTO DO END etc 3 Macro call commands including macro calls based on G codes and cancel commands G65 G66 G66 1 G67 Executable statements indicate statements other than macro statements Flow of processing Program analysis Block executing Macro single OFF Program analysis I I I I Block executing x 1 X 2 X 3 X XE AXO l i Z ro 0 a o rz 229 13 Program Support Functions Machining program display Macro single ON LL LL ce 2 D D o b o In execution In execution N3 G00 X 100 Y 100 Next command JN6 G01 X 101 Y 102 F800 N3 G00 X 100 Y 100 Next command N 4 101 100 COS 210 2 230 13 5 User macro specifications N4 N5 and N6 are processed in parallel with the control of the executable statement of N3 N6 is an executable statement and so it is displayed as the next command If the N4 N5 and N6 analysis is in time during N3 control the machine movement will be continuously controlled N4 is processed in parallel with the control of the NC executable statement of N3 and it is displayed as the next command N
213. le to be used as the basic spindle from the two spindles 1to7 1 1st spindle 2 2nd spindle 7 7th spindle 82 e Aprogram error P35 will occur if a value exceeding the peut range or spindle No without specifications is commanded A program error P33 will occur if there is no command A program error P610 will occur if a spindle not serially connected is commanded 10 Spindle Functions 10 7 Spindle synchronous control I Add ress Command range unit 1 to 7 or 1 to 7 Meaning of address Synchronous spindle selection 1 1st spindle Select the No of the 2 2nd spindle spindle to be synchronized with the basic spindle from the two spindles 7 7th spindle Synchronous spindle 0 to 359 999 phase shift amount Command the shift amount from the Z phase point one rotation signal of the synchronous spindle Spindle 0 001 to 9 999 s synchronization acceleration decele ration time constant or 1 to 9999 ms Command the acceleration decele ration time constant for when the spindle synchronous command rotation speed changes Command this to accelerate or decelerate at a speed slower than the time constant set in the parameters 83 Remarks A program error P35 will occur if a value exceeding the command range or spindle No without specifications is commanded A program error P33 will occur if there is no command Aprogram error P33 will
214. leration deceleration becomes valid for the deceleration at skip signal input Thus the coasting amount from the skip signal input to stop may be larger than when the automatic acceleration deceleration is invalid 310 15 Measurement Support Functions ff Detailed description Skip coordinate readout error 1 Skip signal input coordinate readout The coasting amount based on the position loop time constant Tp and cutting feed time constant Ts is not included in the skip signal input coordinate values Therefore the work coordinate values applying when the skip signal is input can be read out across the error range in the following formula as the skip signal input coordinate values However coasting based on response delay time t1 results in a measurement error and so compensation must be provided 15 2 Skip function Readout error mm tox to F Feedrate mm min t Response error time 0 001 Yd Feedrate mm min Measurement value comes ithin shaded section Readout error of skip signal input coordinates WIN Readout error um Readout error of skip input coordinates Readout error with a 60mm min feedrate is e 5 0 001 0 001 mm Measurement value is within readout error range of 1pm 2 Readout of other coordinates The readout coordinate values include the coasting amount Therefore when coordinate values are required with skip signal input reference should be
215. llowing G commands e G61 exact stop check e G62 automatic corner override e G63 tapping mode e G64 cutting mode ff Detailed description 1 The high accuracy control specifications are required to use this function If G61 1 is commanded when the specifications are not available program error P123 will occur 2 The feedrate command F is clamped by the rapid traverse rate or maximum cutting feedrate set with the parameters 3 Refer to the Optimum speed control mentioned later for details on the speed clamp during an arc command 4 The own system waits for the other system to move and reach the designated start point and then starts 5 The modal holding state of the high accuracy control mode depends on the conditions of the base specification parameter 1151 rstint reset initial and 1148 _G611 initial high accuracy Default Block Block Emergency NC Emergency Initial high accuracy 1148 z Restt oe External emergency stop e H W OT Reset initial 1151 Mode changeover automatic manual Emergency stop switch Emergency stop switch External emergency stop ke D 2 o D N Q es Single block Feed hold tej e efoto fw po Gs eS ae ee ee Ee ee el onjoj u fetta u ful w w o s H hold Modalhold G61 1 G61 1 C cancel Modal cancel G61 1 G64 Note The cases marked with an asterisk in the above table indicate that the modal will
216. lues Check the numerical values of the addresses in the program Check the helical specifications An Axis 3 command was issued in the circular interpolation command If the command is not a helical command the linear command axis will be moved to the next block Check the specifications Issue the thread cutting command and then set the screw pitch command properly After the G68 command always command G69 coordinate rotation cancel and then issue the plane selection command Issue the plane selection command after completing the tool radius compensation and nose R compensation commands issue the axis movement command after issuing the G40 cancel commana e Issue arc command on the correctly selected plane Appendix 2 Program Error Error No NO AUTO C OVER e Check the specifications An automatic corner override command e Delete the G62 command from the program G62 has been issued though it is not included in the specifications 2ND AUX ADDR e Check and correct the second miscellaneous The second miscellaneous function function address in the program address specified in the program does not match that set by the parameter NO G96 SPEC e Check the specifications No constant surface speed e Change from the constant surface speed The constant surface speed command G96 command G96 to the speed command was issued despite the fact that such a G97 command does not exist in the specifications
217. m Setting Functions 14 11 Local coordinate system setting Example 3 When used together with workpiece coordinate system G54 G55 1000 1000 l 500 2000 G28X0Y0 G00G90G54X0Y0 G52X500Y500 M98P200 G00G90G55X0Y0 M98P200 GO0G90G54X0Y0 2 M02 0200 GOOXOYO0 G01 X500F100 Y500 M99 500 Workpiece coordinate system parameter setting value C Local coordinate system created by 3 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Current position Explanation The local coordinate system is created at the G54 coordinate system 500 500 position by 3 but the local coordinate system is not created for the G55 coordinate system During the movement for 7 the axis moves to the G54 local coordinate system s reference point zero point The local coordinate system is canceled by GQ0G54G52X0Y0 302 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 11 Local coordinate system setting Example 4 Combination of workpiece coordinate system G54 and multiple local coordinate systems G54 500 Workpiece coordinate offset G28X0Y0 500 J parameter setting value GOOG90G54X0Y0 M98P300 G52x1 Y1 M98P300 G52x2 Y2 M98P300 G52X0Y0 OO oN Local coordinate system created by 4 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Current position Explanation The local coordinate system is created at the G54 coordinate system 1000 1000 position by 4 The local coo
218. maginary machine coordinate system with coordinates which have been commanded by the present position of the tool is set by this command The present position of the tool includes the offset amounts for tool diameter tool length and tool position offset G54 G92 te Command format 1 2 3 4 5 Workpiece coordinate system selection G54 to G59 G90 G54 Xx Yy Zz A045 ad Additional axis Workpiece coordinate system setting G54 to G59 G54 G92 Xx Yy ZZ ad ad Additional axis Workpiece coordinate system selection expanded P1 to P48 Workpiece coordinate system setting expanded P1 to P48 G54 1 Pn G92 Xx Yy Zz Workpiece coordinate system offset amount setting expanded P1 to P48 G10 L20 Pn Xx Yy Zz 292 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions fe Detailed description 6 14 10 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset With any of the G54 through G59 commands the tool diameter offset amounts for the commanded axes will not be canceled even if workpiece coordinate system selection is commanded The G54 workpiece coordinate system is selected when the power is switched on Commands G54 through G59 are modal commands group 12 The coordinate system will move with G92 in a workpiece coordinate system The offset setting in a workpiece coordinate system denotes the distance from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate system R 1 eference point
219. mand in the first cutting command G01 G02 G03 after the power has been switched on 51 7 Feed Functions 7 3 F1 digit feed 7 3 F1 digit feed Ej Function and purpose By setting the F1 digit feed parameter the feedrate which has been set to correspond to the 1 digit number following the F address serves as the command value When FO is assigned the rapid traverse rate is established and the speed is the same as for GOO G modal does not change When F1 to F5 is assigned the feedrate set to correspond to the command serves as the command value The command greater than F6 is considered to be the normal cutting feedrate The F1 digit command is valid only in a G01 G02 or G03 modal The F1 digit command can also be used for fixed cycle ff Detailed description Set the corresponding speed of F1 to F5 with the base specification parameters 1185 spd_F1 to 1189 spd_F5 respectively Operation alarm 104 will occur when the feedrate is 0 1 Operation method a Make the F1 digit command valid Set the base specification parameter 1079 Fidigt to 1 b Set F1 to F5 Base specification parameter 1185 spd_F1 to 1189 spd_F5 2 Special notes a Use of both the F1 digit command and normal cutting feedrate command is possible when the F1 digit is valid Example 1 FO Rapid traverse rate F1 to F5 F1 digit F6 or more Normal cutting feedrate command b F1 to F5 are invalid in the G00 mode and the rapi
220. ment position and point where the movement is to start at the measuring speed This commands the range within which the tool is to stop This commands the measuring feedrate When R_ D_ of F_ is omitted the value set in the parameter is used instead lt Parameter gt TLM on machining parameter screen 8004 SPEED measuring feedrate 0 to 60000 mm min 8005 ZONE r deceleration range 0 to 99999 999 mm 8006 ZONE d measurement range 0 to 99999 999 mm 304 15 Measurement Support Functions 15 1 Automatic tool length measurement amp 300 Q R i D 400 Z Instrument EJ Example of execution For new measurement H01 0 D TO1 1 M06 T02 G90 GOO G43 ZO HO01 G37 Z 400 R200 D150 F1 Coordinate value when measurement position is reached 300 300 400 100 0 100 100 Where HO1 100 305 15 Measurement Support Functions ff Detailed description 1 Operation with G37 command 15 1 Automatic tool length measurement Speed Rapid traverse rate Measurement allowable range nn D DO Distance a0 ARI 5 Offset amount Measuring 5 A position Operationt a __ Normal completion 4 Stop point DOr no detection Sensor Operation ae Alarm stop P607 output Operation 3 i ice Alarm stop P607 The sensor signal measuring position arrival signal is used in common with the skip signal The feedrate will be 1mm min if the F command and par
221. meter Basic specification parameter ON Program error P33 occurs before movement The functions are output when the next block movement is completed 10 The following tables show the combinations of 8 and 9 During intermediate Not during intermediate Second block point movement point movement During intermediate point a error P33 due movement Tale to 9 With output the sequence of first block Not during intermediate point Refer to 9 for second See block is followed movement block regardless of the sequence of the designated points E amp f7 Precautions 1 Command G117 in order of the operation start points If the operation start point order is the opposite of the movement a program error P33 will occur 277 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 1 Coordinate words and control axes 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 1 Coordinate words and control axes Ej Function and purpose There are three controlled axis for the basic specifications but when an additional axis is added up to 14 axes can be controlled Pre determined alphabetic coordinate words that correspond to the axes are used to designate each machining direction For XY table XY table Y lt r Table movement Bed Table movement direction direction For XY table For XY and rotary table Z a ED Las Sa 2 Table movement direction Y Program coordinates Table rotation direction 278
222. mfering block is less than the chamfering amount Program error P384 results when the movement amount in the block following the corner chamfering block is less than the chamfering amount 239 13 Program Support Functions 13 7 2 Corner rounding R_ EJ h 13 7 Corner chamfering corner rounding Function and purpose The imaginary corner which would exist if the corner were not to be rounded is rounded with the arc having the radius which is commanded by R_ only when configured of linear lines Command format N100 G01 X_Y_ R_ N200 G02 X_Y_ JR Arc radius of corner rounding Corner rounding is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect Example of program 1 G91 G01 X100 R10 2 X100 Y100 Corner rounding end point Corner rounding 2 start point Imaginary corner intersection point R10 0 a Detailed description 1 The start point of the block following the corner R serves as the imaginary corner intersection point 2 When the comma in R is not present it is handled as an R command 3 When both the corner chamfer and corner rounding commands exist in the same block the latter command is valid 4 Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner rounding 5 Program error P381 results when there is an arc command in the block following the corner rounding block 6 Program error P382 results when the block following
223. mm 0 0001 inch 0 01 mm 0 001 9 mm 0 0001 inch 0 01 mm 0 001 9 mm 0 0001 inch 2nd miscellaneous function Subprogram Variable number Note 1 a represents one of the additional axes U V W A B or C Metric command X 52 Y 52 Z 52 a 52 X 53 Y 53 Z 53 53 1452 J 52 K 52 1453 J 53 K 53 X53 P8 X53 P8 F53 F53 R 52 Q52 P8 L4 R 53 Q53 P8 L4 3 2 Program formats O N5 G2 G21 X 44 Y 44 Z 44 a 44 1 44 J 44 K 44 X53 P8 F44 R 44 Q 44 P8 L4 H3 D3 M8 S6 S8 T A8 B8 C8 P8H5L4 oO Note 2 The No of digits check for a word is carried out with the maximum number of digits of that address Note 3 The basic format is the same for any of the numerals input from the memory MDI or setting display unit Note 4 Numerals can be used without the leading zeros Note 5 The program number is commanded with single block It s necessary to command the program number in the head block of each program Note 6 The meanings of the details are as follows 8 digit program number Example 1 08 Example 2 G21 Example 3 X 53 For example the case for when the X axis is positioned G00 to the 45 123 mm position in the absolute value G90 mode is as follows point and 3 digits to the right o GOO X45 12 __3 digits below the decimal point z Dimension G is 2 digits to the left of the decimal point and 1 digit to the right Dimension
224. mmand The in position width in this command is valid only in the command block so the deceleration check method set in base specification parameter 1193 inpos is used for blocks that do not have the in position width command When there are several movement axes the system confirms that the position error amount of each movement axis in each system is less than the in position width issued in this command before executing the next block The differences of when the in position check is validated with the parameter base specification parameter 1193 inpos set to 1 refer to next page for in position width and when validated with this command are shown in the following drawing Differences between in position check with this command and in position check with parameter In position check with I address command In position check with parameter After starting deceleration of the command system the position error amount and commanded in position width are compared After starting deceleration of the command system the servo system s position error amount and the parameter setting value in position Block being width are compared Servo Command Servo O F omman In position width In position width Error amount of command Servo system position end point and machine error amount position Block being executed executed Start of in position _ check with parameter Start of in position check with I address comma
225. mmand It will not be 123m 22 5 Position Commands 5 3 Decimal point input Addresses used and valid invalid decimal point commands Coordinate position data Revolving table miscellaneous function code Angle data Data settings axis numbers G10 Coordinate position data Revolving table miscellaneous function code Coordinate position data Revolving table miscellaneous function code Corner chamfering amount Offset numbers tool position tool radius Automatic tool length measurement deceleration range d Data settings byte type data Synchronous spindle No at spindle synchronization Valid Inch thread number of ridges O ee Feed rate Thread lead Linear arc intersection selection Geometric Arc center coordinates Tool radius compensation vector components Hole pitch in the special fixed cycle Circle radius of cut circle increase amount Arc center coordinates Tool radius compensation vector components Special fixed cycle s hole pitch or angle Arc center coordinates Tool radius compensation vector components Number of holes of the special fixed cycle Program tool compensation input type selection L2 L12 L10 L13 L11 Program parameter input selection L50 Program parameter input 2 word type data 4 bytes Miscellaneous function codes LS Note 1 All decimal points are valid for the user macro arguments 23 5 Position Commands 5 3 Decimal point input Decimal point command N Invalid
226. mmand commanded last is valid O 13 G61 G67 341 14 17 G66 G67 G96 G97 G command commanded last is valid G66 G67 are executed G73 G89 are G command commanded last is valid 19 G50 1 G51 1 G66 G67 are executed G50 1 G51 1 is ignored O O All axes become mirror center O O Note that G92 is priority for axis Revision history Date of revision Manual No Revision details December 2000 BNP B2260 First edition created May 2004 BNP B2260B The contents revised following to the software Ver C and Ver D e Mistakes etc were corrected Notice Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual However please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product Duplication Prohibited This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form in part or in whole without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2000 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED sa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG 2 2 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN 0405 MEE r MODEL MC6 C64 C64T M T O MODE 008 047 Manual No BNP B2260B ENG Specificati
227. mmand is the synchronizing identification number The same numbers are synchronized but when they are omitted the numbers are handled as LO The synchronizing command designates the number of the other part system number to be synchronized and can also be issued along with its own part system number Example Part system i command i n mLI When the part system No is omitted when only is issued part system 1 will be handled as I2 and part system 2 as 1 The command using only cannot be used for synchronizing with part system 3 and following If the command using only is used for part system 3 or following the program error P33 will occur 10 SYN will appear in the operation status section during synchronization The synchronizing signal will be output to the PLC I F 1 X63C 2 X6BC 3 X73C 4 X7BC 5 X83C 6 X8BC 7 X93C 269 13 Program Support Functions 13 13 Synchronizing operation between part systems ff Example of synchronizing between part systems 1 2 3 12L2 P11 P21 P31 l2L1 11 2L3 L1 P32 P12 P22 3L2 HL4 1213L3 P23 Pas P13 11 3L3 I3L4 as P14 The above programs are executed as follows 270 13 Program Support Functions 13 14 Start Point Designation Synchronizing Type 1 13 14 Start Point De
228. mode The operation stops at after the 1 2 and 7 commands during single block operation When this command is used high precision drilling machining that does not scratch the machining surface can be done Positioning to the hole bottom and the escape return after cutting is executed in the state shifted to the direction opposite of the cutter Tool during cutting Tool after cutting The shift amount is designated as shown below with addresses l J and K Cutter For G17 I J Spindle For G18 K orient gt 7X4 H For G19 J K The shift amount is executed with linear interpolation and the feed rate follows the F command position Machining hole Shift amount Command J and K with incremental values in the same block as the hole position data J and K will be handled as modals during the canned cycle Note Ifthe parameter 1080 Dril_z which fixes the hole drilling axis to the Z axis is set the shift amount can be designated with address Q instead of and J In this case whether to shift or not and the shift direction are set with parameter 8207 G76 87 IGNR and 8208 G76 87 The symbol for the Q value is ignored and the value is handled as a positive value The Q value is a modal during the canned cycle and will also be used as the G83 G87 and G73 cutting amount 164 13 Program Support Functions Ef Precautions for using canned cycle 1 5 8 9 13 1 Canned cycles
229. mory All other codes are ignored and are not stored The data between control out and control in are stored into the memory 3 Data Formats 3 5 Optional block skip 3 5 Optional block skip Ej Function and purpose This function selectively ignores specific blocks in a machining program which starts with the slash code lY 7T Detailed description 1 Provided that the optional block skip switch is ON blocks starting with the code are ignored They are executed if the switch is OFF Parity check is valid regardless of whether the optional block skip switch is ON or OFF When for instance all blocks are to be executed for one workpiece but specific block are not to be executed for another workpiece the same command tape can be used to machine different parts by inserting the code at the head of those specific blocks Precautions for using optional block skip BS Put the code for optional block skip at the beginning of a block If it is placed inside the block it is assumed as a user macro a division instruction Example N20 G1 X25 Y25 NG User macro a division instruction a program error results N20 G1 X25 Y25 OK Parity checks H and V are conducted regardless of the optional block skip switch position The optional block skip is processed immediately before the pre read buffer Consequently it is not possible to skip up to the block which has been read into the
230. n GO Xx ZZ G28 G30 intermediate point x1 Z4 GO XxX ZZ Example 3 G28 Xx Zz From point A to reference zero point G30 XxX ZZ From point B to 2nd reference zero point G29 Xx Zz From point C to point D R Reference zero iti 11 point position s d Present position 1 New intermediate point X2 Z2 Old intermediate x Z point 2nd reference zero point position 2 287 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 8 2nd 3rd and 4th reference zero point return 14 8 2nd 3rd and 4th reference zero point return G30 Ej Function and purpose The tool can return to the second third or fourth reference zero point by specifying G30 P2 P3 or P4 2nd reference point Reference point G28 F G29 A 7 G X15Y1 Z1 01 ntermediate point l f 4th reference point 3rd reference point 2g Command format G30 P2 P3 P4 Xx Yy Zz aaj ad Additional axis 288 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions T FA Detailed description 1 14 8 2nd 3rd and 4th reference zero point return The second third or fourth reference zero point return is specified by P2 P3 or P4 A command without P or with PO P1 P5 or a greater P number is ignored returning the tool to the second reference zero point In the second third or fourth reference zero point return mode as in the first reference zero point return mode the tool returns to the
231. n Circular Linear Obtuse angle Circular gt Linear Acute angle i i j Tool center i Point of intersection ula ene of circular pa 7 Program path Center of Center of Point of A circular circular i ions intersection S Program path 3 When the arc end point is not on the arc For spiral arc ssec A spiral arc will be interpolated from the start to end point of the arc For normal arc command If the error after compensation is within parameter 1084 RadErr the area from the arc start point to the end point is interpolated as a spiral arc i Hypothetical circle PAg Tool center path Program path End point of circular Center of circular 4 When the inner intersection point does not exist In an instance such as that shown in the figure below the intersection point of arcs A and B may cease to exist due to the offset amount In such cases program error P152 appears and the tool stops at the end point of the previous block Tool center path Program error stop Center of circular A Program path Line intersecting circulars A B 112 12 Tool Offset Functions ff Tool radius compensation cancel If either of the following conditions is met in the tool radius compensation mode the compensation will be canceled However the movement command must be a command which is not a circular command If the compensation is canceled by a circul
232. n and purpose This command is accompanied by coordinate words and a feedrate command It makes the tool move interpolate linearly from its present position to the end point specified by the coordinate words at the speed specified by address F In this case the feedrate specified by address F always acts as a linear speed in the tool nose center advance direction Ee I Command format G01 Xx Yy Zz aa Ff li a represents additional axis X Y Z a Coordinate values and may be an absolute position or incremental position depending on the G90 G91 state f Feedrate mm min or min i In position width A decimal point command will result in a program error This is valid only in the commanded block A block that does not contain this address will follow the parameter 1193 inpos settings The range is 1 to 999999 um ff Detailed description 1 Once this command is issued the mode is maintained until another G function G00 G02 G03 G33 in the 01 group which changes the G01 mode is issued Therefore if the next command is also G01 and if the feedrate is the same all that is required to be done is to specify the coordinate words If no F command is given in the first G01 command block program error P62 results 2 The feedrate for a rotary axis is commanded by min decimal point position unit F300 300 min 3 The G functions G70 G89 in the 09 group are cancelled G80 by the G01 command 31
233. n manual The list of canned cycle functions for this control unit is shown below Hole machining Operation at hole bottom Return start operation Application Z direction _ Spindle 2 direction cao o ee eee Cutting feed a Rapid feed Dai Spordaling cycle Rapid feed Drill counter p boring cycle e Rapid feed Deep hole drilling cycle Cutting feed Cutting feed Tapping cycle Yes Cutting feed Hoes Oh ee Cutting feed Boring cycle Cutting feed Rapid feed Boring cycle Cutting feed Intermittent feed Forward Cutting feed Back boring cycle Rapid feed Boring cycle Rapid traverse i Cutting feed Boring cycle Cutting feed Cutting feed Pea cll Rapid feed Stepping cycle Intermittent feed Forward Cutting feed Reverse tapping rotation cycle G Cutting feed oie Rapid feed Fine boring cycle spindle stop A canned cycle mode is canceled when the G80 or any G command in G00 G01 G02 G03 is issued The various data will also be cleared simultaneously to zero G85 Cutt G86 Cut a oom G88 Rapi Geg Cutt acts G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 G73 G74 76 149 13 Program Support Functions Fa Command format 13 1 Canned cycles Hole machining mode Hole positioning data Hole machining data Number of repetitions Spindle rotation speed Spindle rotation speed at during retract Synchronization changeover Positioning axis in position width Drillin
234. n the corner set range the feedrate is reduced the increase in the load is reduced and cutting is performed effectively However this function is valid only when finished shapes are programmed Workpiece Programmed path fe Machining allowance finished shape Workpiece surface shape Tool center path Machining allowance Max angle at inside corner Deceleration range IN 64 7 Feed Functions 7 10 Automatic corner override 1 Operation a When automatic corner override is not to be applied When the tool moves in the order of 1 2 gt 8 in Fig 1 the machining allowance at 3 increases by an amount equivalent to the area of shaded section S and so the tool load increases b When automatic corner override is to be applied When the inside corner angle 0 in Fig 1 is less than the angle set in the parameter the override set into the parameter is automatically applied in the deceleration range Ci 2 Parameter setting The following parameters are set into the machining parameters Parameter g g a Settingrange 8007 OVERRIDE 0 to 100 8008 MAX ANGLE 0 to 180 8009 DSC ZONE 0 to 99999 999mm or 0 to 3937 000 inches Refer to the Operation Manual for details on the setting method ff Automatic corner R Programmed Work surface Tool center shape path Corner R center Machining allowance Workpiece Corner R section J Machinin allowance Ea 1
235. n the A B and C functions are commanded in the same block as movement commands there are 2 sequences in which the commands are executed as below The machine specifications determine which sequence applies 1 The A B or C function is executed after the movement command 2 The A B or C function is executed simultaneously with the movement command Processing and completion sequences are required for all secondary miscellaneous functions The table below given the various address combinations It is not possible to use an address which is the same for the axis name of an additional axis and secondary miscellaneous function Additional axis name Secondary miscellaneous function RARER a a ee ll OS a eo ome cm ae Note When A has been assigned as the secondary miscellaneous function address the following commands cannot be used 1 Linear angle commands 2 Geometric commands 74 10 Spindle Functions 10 1 Spindle functions S2 digits BCD 10 Spindle Functions 10 1 Spindle functions S2 digits BCD During standard PLC specifications Ej Function and purpose The spindle functions are also known simply as S functions and they assign the spindle rotation speed In this controller they are assigned with a 2 digit number following the S code ranging from 0 to 99 and 100 commands can be designated In actual fact however it depends on the machine specifications as to how many of these 100 functions are used and
236. n to 1 000 000 mm min for input setting units of 1m The upper limit is subject to the restrictions imposed by the machine specifications Refer to the specifications manual of the machine for the rapid traverse rate settings The feedrate is valid for the GOO G27 G28 G29 G30 and G60 commands Two paths are available for positioning the interpolation type where the area from the start point to the end point is linearly interpolated or the non interpolation type where movement proceeds at the maximum speed of each axis The type is selected with parameter 1086 GOlntp The positioning time is the same for each type 7 2 Cutting feed rate Ej Function and purpose The cutting feedrate is assigned with address F and 8 digits F8 digit direct designation The F8 digits are assigned with a decimal point for a 5 digit integer and a 3 digit fraction The cutting feedrate is valid for the G01 G02 G03 and G33 commands Examples Feedrate Remarks G1 X100 Y100 F200 200 0mm min F200 or F200 000 gives the same rate G1 X100 Y100 F123 4 123 4mm min G1 X100 Y100 F56 789 56 789mm min Speed range that can be commanded when input setting unit is 1um or 10um F command range Feed rate command range Remarks 0 001 to 1000000 000 0 001 to 1000000 000 mm min a 0 0001 to 39370 0787 0 0001 to 39370 0787 inch min 0 001 to 1000000 000 0 01 to 1000000 min Note 1 A program error P62 results when there is no F com
237. nd Ts Acceleration deceleration time constant Td Deceleration check time Td Ts 0 to 14ms 29 6 Interpolation Functions ff In position width setting When the servo parameter 2224 SV024 setting value is smaller than the setting value of the GO in position width 2077 GOinps and the G1 in position width 2078 G1inps the in position check is carried out with the GO in position width and the G1 in position width In position check using the GOinps value 6 1 Positioning Rapid traverse Command to motor Outline of motor movement GO in position sv024 A stop is judged here In position check using the G1inps value Command to motor Outline of motor movement G1 in position sv024 A stop is judged here When the SV024 value is larger the in position check is completed when the motor position becomes within the specified with SV024 The in position check method depends on the method set in the deceleration check parameter Note 1 When the in position width check is carried out the in position width command in the program takes place the in position width set with the parameters such as SV024 GOinps or Glinps Note 2 When the SV024 setting value is larger than the GO in position width G1 in position width the in position check is carried out with the SV024 value 30 6 Interpolation Functions 6 2 Linear interpolation 6 2 Linear interpolation G01 Ej Functio
238. nd purpose FF Whereas the G09 exact stop check command checks the in position status only for the block in which the command has been assigned the G61 command functions as a modal This means that deceleration will apply at the end points of each block to all the cutting commands G01 to G03 subsequent to G61 and that the in position status will be checked G61 is released by high accuracy control mode G61 1 automatic corner override G62 tapping mode G63 or cutting mode G64 Command format In position check is executed in the G61 block and thereafter the in position check is executed at the end of the cutting command block is executed until the check mode is canceled 63 7 Feed Functions 7 10 Automatic corner override 7 10 Automatic corner override G62 EJ FF lY Function and purpose With tool radius compensation this function reduces the load during inside cutting of automatic corner R or during inside corner cutting by automatically applying override to the feed rate Automatic corner override is valid until the tool radius compensation cancel G40 exact stop check mode G61 high accuracy control mode G61 1 tapping mode G63 or cutting mode G64 command is issued Command format Machining inside corners When cutting an inside corner as in Fig 1 the machining allowance amount increases and a greater load is applied to the tool To remedy this override is applied automatically withi
239. nducted smoothly However during tool radius compensation a maximum of 5 blocks are pre read for the intersection point calculation including interference check The specifications of the data in 1 block are as follows The data of 1 block are stored in this buffer Only the significant codes in the significant data section are read into the pre read buffer When codes are sandwiched in the control in and control out and the optional block skip function is ON the data extending from the slash code up to the EOB code are not read into the pre read buffer The pre read buffer contents are cleared with resetting When the single block function is ON during continuous operation the pre read buffer stores the following block data and then stops operation Ef Precautions 1 2 3 Depending on whether the program is executed continuously or by single blocks the timing of the valid invalid for the external control signals for the block skip and others will differ If the external control signal such as optional block skip is turned ON OFF with the M command the external control operation will not be effective on the program pre read with the buffer register According to the M command that operates the external controls it prohibits pre reading and the recalculation is as follows The M command that commands the external controls is distinguished at the PLC and the recalculation request for PLC gt NC interface table is
240. nt When a manual interrupt is applied while the tool is moving at the measuring speed a return must be made to the position prior to the interrupt and then operation must be resumed The data commanded in G37 or the parameter setting data must meet the following conditions Measurement point start point gt R command or parameter r gt D command or parameter d When the D command and parameter d in 7 above are zero operation will be completed normally only when the commanded measurement point and sensor signal detection point coincide Otherwise program error P607 will results When the R and D commands as well as parameters r and d in 7 above are all zero program error P607 will result regardless of whether the sensor signal is present or not after the tool has been positioned at the commanded measurement point 10 The automatic tool length measurement command G37 must be commanded together with the G43H_ command that designates the offset No G43H_ G37 Z_R_D_F_ 307 15 Measurement Support Functions 15 2 Skip function 15 2 Skip function G31 kJ FF Function and purpose When the skip signal is input externally during linear interpolation based on the G31 command the machine feed is stopped immediately the remaining distance is discarded and the command in the following block is executed Command format G31 Xx Yy Zz aa Ff where a is the additional axis X Y Z Oo Axis coordinates they
241. nt surface speed control G98 G99 Initial point R point return 339 Appendix 3 Order of G Function Command Priority G code 09 Commanded G73 G89 G code G43 G44 G49 Length compensation G51 1 Program mirror image executed G73 G89 are ignored G52 Local coordinate system G53 Machine coordinate system G54 G59 Workpiece coordinate system G61 G64 Mode selection executed G73 G89 are ignored Macro call 10 G98 G99 12 G54 G59 13 G61 G65 G command commanded last is valid 340 19 14 17 G50 1 G66 G67 G96 G97 G51 1 G66 G67 are executed G43 G49 modals are updated G66 G67 G command are executed commanded G50 1 last is valid G51 1 is ignored OQ G52 is executed G50 1 G51 1 is ignored O G53 is executed G50 1 G51 1 is invalid G66 G67 are executed G54 G59 modals are updated executed G50 1 G51 1 is ignored Appendix 3 Order of G Function Command Priority G code 09 Commanded G73 G89 G code G66 G67 are executed G66 G67 1G73 G89 are Macro call commanded G73 G89 last is valid Canned cycle Absolute value incremental executed Coordinate G73 G89 are system setting G94 G95 Synchronous asynchronous G96 G97 Constant surface speed control G98 G99 Initial point R point return 10 12 G98 G99 G54 G59 G66 G67 are executed G54 G59 modals are G co
242. nt surface speed control e ee ceeceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeaeetneeseaeetaas 80 10 6 Spindle clamp speed setting G92 eeceeeseeseeceeeceeeeeseeesseeeeeeteaee eee seeeeeaaeeeeeeeeneeeeees 81 10 7 Spindle synchronization control l G114 1 sos ces sacsasayete hes tetianseevhedtendesseaviencpactecaienddates 82 10 8 Spindle synchronization control ll sorccct Sersccam acc veetionetasly Menaehdea nik eadecenn saateadia Setant ate 90 11 Tool FUNCHONS siisii aiino naana aeoe aaa ae aa ra a raa Aaaa aae Oaa Aaaa EAA EADE aanak ieee 97 11 1 Tool functions T8 digit BCD icccnc 5 3cecdes vadeunstesscoesss dees vagctadetengenesdageadetasersursoiecda be teueemasateds 97 TZ TOOL Offset FUNCTIONS uso css lesa aaa a Secs opted gah A dace ra falcata des 98 12 1 TOO OTS Ob ee aa aaa AKOS a AATA Eo aaa AAAA oae ARARE eoor 98 12 2 Tool length offset cancel G43 G44 G49 oo cececccesseecsseeeeseeeeeneeeessaeeesseeeeseeeeesaeeess 102 12 3 POOLFACIMISSCOMPSIIS ANON assis cc seca assceS Saicad ta ceg ve fs stati aetiande re cab Gaeta ahs ated gees eandeweiteats 105 12 3 1 Tool radius compensation OPEratiON 2 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeenees 106 12 3 2 Other operations during tool radius COMPENSATION cececeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteteeees 116 12 3 3 G41 G42 commands and J K deSiQnatiOn ccescceesseeeseeceeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeees 124 12 3 4 Interrupts during tool radius COMPENSATION eee eeeteeeeeee eter e
243. nter path Program path Start point Program e Start point Center of circular path 107 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 3 For outer side of corner obtuse angle 0 lt 90 Linear gt Linear Type A Linear gt Circular Type A Center A of circular Tool center path Program path Start point Start point Linear gt Linear Type B Linear gt Circular Type B Center of circular f i 7 Tool center path Program path Start point Start point Note 1 Where is no axis movement command in the same block as G41 or G42 compensation is performed perpendicularly to the next block direction 108 12 Tool Offset Functions ff Operation in compensation mode Relative to the program path G00 G01 G02 G03 the tool center path is found from the straight line circular arc to make compensation Even if the same compensation command G41 G42 is issued in the compensation mode the command will be ignored When 4 or more blocks not accompanying movement are commanded continuously in the compensation mode overcutting or undercutting will result When the MOO command has been issued during tool radius compensation pre reading is prohibited 12 3 Tool radius compensation 1 Machining an outer wall Linear gt Linear 90 lt 0 lt 180 Linear gt Linear 0 lt 0 lt 90 Program path S Point of intersection TOOI center path
244. nterpolation unit The tool is fed with the arc clamp speed F so that F AV does not exceed the tolerable acceleration deceleration speed before P interpolation AV F lt JR x AV x 60 x 1000 mm min G1bF mm min GibtL ms When the above F expression is substituted in the expression expressing the maximum logical arc radius reduction error amount AR explained in the section a Pre interpolation acceleration deceleration the commanded radius R is eliminated and AR does not rely on R i AR Arc radius reduction error amount AR lt Tp 1 K ei Tp Position loop gain time constant of 2R 60 servo system AV x 1000 Kf Feed forward coefficient T 1 KP 2R 60 F Cutting feedrate In other words with the arc command in the high accuracy control mode in logical terms regardless of the commanded speed F or commanded radius R machining can be carried out with a radius reduction error amount within a constant value To further lower the arc clamp speed to further improve the roundness the arc clamp speed can be lowered with the machining parameter 8019 R COMPEN In this case speed control is carried out to improve the maximum arc radius reduction error amount AR by the set percentage AR x 100 Ks AR Maximum arc radius reduction error amount AR lt er a mm Ks RCOMPEN After setting the R COMPEN the above AR will appear on the parameter screen RCOMPEN 0 078 50 Accuracy c
245. number code after the initial EOB code after resetting to the point where the reset command is issued 3 Data Formats 3 1 Tape codes 2 Control out control in When the ISO code is used all data between control out and control in or are ignored although these data appear on the setting and display unit Consequently the command tape name number and other such data not directly related to control can be inserted in this section This information except B in the tape codes will also be loaded however during tape loading The system is set to the control in mode when the power is witched on Example of ISO code COG00X 85000Y 64000 CUTTERS RETURN Operator information print out example Information in this section is ignored and nothing is executed 3 EOR code Generally the end or record code is punched at both ends of the tape It has the following functions a Rewind stop when rewinding tape with tape handler b Rewind start during tape search with tape handler c Completion of loading during tape loading into memory 4 Tape preparation for tape operation with tape handler lki kl 2m EOR EOB EOB EOB EOB EOR Initial block Last block 2m If a tape handler is not used there is no need for the 2 meter dummy at both ends of the tape and for the head EOR code 3 Data Formats 3 1 Tape codes ISO code R 840 Feed holes Sees 3 2 1 4 Channel No a N l
246. o of lives for each tool 0 to 4000 p minutes 0 to 9999 times 63000 Usage data Usage time or No of uses for each tool 0 to 4000 p minutes 0 to 9999 times 63500 Tool length Length compensation data set as compensation Compensation rii compen sation No absolute value compensation amount or No data increment value compensation amount method 0 to No of tool compensation sets Absolute value compensation amount 99999 999 Increment value compensation amount 99999 999 216 13 Program Support Functions Variable No Tool 13 5 User macro specifications Item Type Details Data range radius Radius compensation data set as compensation Compensation compensation No absolute value compensation amount or No data increment value compensation amount method 0 to No of tool compensation sets Absolute value compensation amount 99999 999 Increment value compensation amount 99999 999 Eri aad EJ Example of program for tool life management 1 2 3 4 5 Normal commands 101 60001 Reads the number of registered tools 102 60002 Reads the life current value 103 60009 Reads the tool selection No 60000 10 ee Designates the group No of the life data to be read 104 60004 Reads the remaining number of registered tools in group 10 105 60005 Reads the signal being executed in gr
247. o 1st spindle basic spindle with reverse run Shift phase of synchronous spindle by R command value 1 500 Change 1st spindle basic spindle rotation speed to 500 r min G113 Cancel spindle synchronization lt Operation gt Basic spindle Synchronous spindle 1000 750 500 Forward run Rotation speed 0 r min Reverse run 500 750 1000 x N Yd b Phase alignment 2nd spindle synchronous spindle i reverse run synchronization i Spindle synchronization cancel ist spindle basic spindle forward run 1st spindle basic spindle rotation speed change 2nd spindle synchronous spindle forward run 86 10 Spindle Functions Ef Cautions on programming 1 To enter the rotation synchronization mode while the basic spindle and synchronous spindle are chucking the same workpiece turn the basic spindle and synchronous spindle rotation commands ON before turning the spindle synchronous control mode ON 10 7 Spindle synchronous control I 1 1st part system 2 2nd part system M6 1st spindle chuck close M25 S2 0 2nd spindle stops at S 0 2 tems strstr ests 11 Waiting between part systems M5 S1 0 st spindle stops at S 0 M15 2nd spindle chuck close f M24 2nd spindle rotation command ON M3 1st spindle rotation command ON SSS SSS See 11 Waiting between part systems G114 1 H1 Rot
248. o longer G33 mode The converted cutting feedrate is compared with the cutting feed clamp rate when thread cutting starts and if it is found to exceed the clamp rate an operation error will result In order to protect the lead during thread cutting a cutting feed rate which has been converted may sometimes exceed the cutting feed clamp rate An illegal lead is normally produced at the start of the thread and at the end of the cutting because of servo system delay and other such factors Therefore it is necessary to command a thread length which is determined by adding the illegal lead lengths to the required thread length The spindle speed is subject to the following restriction Maximum feedrate 1 lt Rs Thread lead Where R lt Permissible speed of encoder r min R Spindle speed r min Thread lead mm or inches Maximum feedrate mm min or inch mm This is subject to the restrictions imposed by the machine specifications 10 The thread cutting start angle is designated with an integer or 0 to 360 46 6 Interpolation Functions fez Example of program 6 7 Thread cutting N110 G90 GO X 200 Y 200 S50 M3 The spindle center is positioned to the workpiece N111 Z110 center and the spindle rotates in the forward direction 6 0mm command N114 GOX 210 The tool is evaded in the X axis direction N115 Z110 MO The tool rises to the top of the workpiece and the program stops with MOO Adjust the t
249. ocal coordinate system Workpiece G54 to G59 coordinate system x 280 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 4 Basic machine coordinate system selection 14 4 Basic machine coordinate system selection G53 Ej Function and purpose The basic machine coordinate system is the coordinate system that expresses the position tool change position stroke end position etc that is characteristic to the machine The tool is moved to the position commanded on the basic machine coordinate system with the G53 command and the coordinate command that follows FF Command format Basic machine coordinate system selection G90 G53 Xx Yy Zz aa QO Additional axis Detailed description When the power is switched on the basic machine coordinate system is automatically set as referenced to the reference zero point return position which is determined by the automatic or manual reference zero point return The basic machine coordinate system is not changed by the G92 command The G53 command is valid only in the block in which it has been designated In the incremental value command mode G91 the G53 command provides movement with the incremental value in the coordinate system being selected Even if G53 is commanded the tool diameter offset amount for the commanded axis will not be canceled The 1st reference point coordinate value indicates the distance from the basic machine coordinate system 0 point to the ref
250. ocks or to advance to the next block without waiting for the miscellaneous function M S T B finish FIN signal 3003 Single block stop o o Not suppressed Suppressed Not suppressed Suppressed Note 1 3003 is cleared to zero by NC reset 206 Miscellaneous function finish signal Awaited Awaited Not awaited Not awaited 13 Program Support Functions ff Feed hold feedrate override G09 valid invalid By substituting the values below in variable number 3004 it is possible to make the feed hold feedrate override and GO9 functions either valid or invalid in the subsequent blocks 3004 Bito Biti Bit2 Contents value Feedrate override G09 check Valid Valid Valid Valid Pati vaid o invad Invalid Invalid Invalid Note 1 Variable number 3004 is set to zero by NC reset Note 2 The functions are valid when the above bits are 0 and invalid when they are 1 13 5 User macro specifications Message display and stop By using variable number 3006 the execution is stopped after the previous block has been executed and if message display data have been commanded then the corresponding message will be indicated on the operator message area Format 3006 1 TAKE FIVE TAKE FIVE Message The message should not be longer than 31 characters and it should be enclosed within round parentheses ff Mirror image By reading variable number 3007 it is possible to asce
251. ode 3 No other macro interrupt is being processed Note 1 A macro interrupt is disabled in manual operation mode JOG STEP HANDLE etc 244 13 Program Support Functions T F Outline of operation 1 2 13 10 Macro interrupt When a user macro interrupt signal UIT is input after an M96Pp1 command is issued by the current program interrupt program Op1 is executed When an M99 command is issued by the interrupt program control returns to the main program If M99Ppz is specified the blocks from the one next to the interrupted block to the last one are searched for the block with sequence number Np2 Control thus returns to the block with sequence number Np2 that is found first in the above search Current program Interrupt program Interrupt signal UIT not acceptable within User macro a user macro program interrupt signal UIT 245 13 Program Support Functions ff Interrupt type Interrupt types 1 and 2 can be selected by the parameter 1113 INT_2 13 10 Macro interrupt Type 1 e When an interrupt signal UIT is input the system immediately stops moving the tool and interrupts dwell then permits the interrupt program to run e f the interrupt program contains a move or miscellaneous function MSTB command the commands in the interrupted block are lost After the interrupt program completes the main program resumes operation from the block next to the interrupted one e f
252. ode are output from the NC system to the external output device 3 Once POPEN has been issued it will remain valid until PCLOS is issued Close command PCLOS 1 This command is issued when all the data outputs are completed The DC4 control code and code are output from the NC unit to the external output device 3 This command is used together with the open command and it should not be issued unless the open mode has been established 4 Issue the close command at the end of the program even when operation has been suspended by resetting or some other operation during data output 227 13 Program Support Functions ff Data output command DPRNT DPRNT M vi dict 2 v2 d2c2 eeereesseces l1 1 2 3 13 5 User macro specifications Character string Variable number Significant digits above decimal point Significant digits below decimal point c d lt 8 The character output and decimal output of the variable values are done with ISO codes The commanded character string is output as is by the ISO code Alphanumerics A to Z 0 to 9 and special characters can be used The required significant digits above and below the decimal point in the variable values are commanded within square parentheses As a result the variable values equivalent to the commanded number of digits including the decimal point are output in ISO code in decimal notation from the high order digits Trailing z
253. oefficient setting value Note 1 When the R COMPEN is set the arc clamp speed will drop so in a machining program with many arc commands the machining time will take longer Note 2 The R COMPEN is valid only when the arc speed clamp is applied To reduce the radius reduction error when not using the arc speed clamp the commanded speed F must be lowered 261 13 Program Support Functions ff Vector accuracy interpolation When a fine segment is commanded and the angle between the blocks is extremely small when not using optimum corner deceleration interpolation can be carried out more smoothly using the vector accuracy interpolation 13 12 High accuracy control Vector accuracy interpolation Commanded path ff Feed forward control With this function the constant speed error caused by the position loop control of the servo system can be greatly reduced However as machine vibration is induced by the feed forward control there are cases when the coefficient cannot be increased In this case use this function together with the smooth high gain SHG control function and stably compensate the delay by the servo system s position loop to realize a high accuracy As the response is smoother during acceleration deceleration the position loop gain can be increased 1 Active feed forward control Command during acceleration Kp Position deceleration before interpolation p Deion Jeep gain Active feed for
254. on G code mode YZ plane circular X axis linear Command the X Y and Z axis addresses in the G02 G03 and G19 plane selection G code mode The plane for an additional axis can be selected as with circular interpolation UY plane circular Z axis linear Command the U Y and Z axis addresses in the G02 G03 and G19 plane selection G code mode In addition to the basic command methods above the command methods following the program example can be used Refer to the section 6 4 plane selection for the arc planes selected with these command methods 42 6 Interpolation Functions EJ Example of program Example 1 6 6 Helical interpolation XY plane G03 Xx Yy Zz1 lit Jj1 PO Ffi XY plane arc Z axis linear Note If pitch No is 0 address P can be omitted Example 2 XY plane G02 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rri Ffi XY plane arc Z axis linear Example 3 G17 G03 Uu Yy Zz li Jj P2 Ff UY plane arc Z axis linear Example 4 U axis X axis G18 G03 Xx Uu Zz lit Kk Ff ZX plane arc U axis linear Note If the same system is used the standard axis will perform circular interpolation and the additional axis will perform linear interpolation 6 Interpolation Functions 6 6 Helical interpolation Example 5 G18 G02 Xx Uu Yy Zz li Jj Kk ZX plane arc U axis Y axis linear Ffi The J command is ignored Note Two or more axes can be designated for the linear interpolation a
255. on the first time If another control axis ex rotary axis additional axis is commanded in the same block as the canned cycle control axis the canned cycle will be executed after the other control axis is moved first If the No of repetitions L is not designated L1 will be set If LO is designated in the same block as the canned cycle G code command the hole machining data will be recorded but the hole machining will not be executed Example G73X__Y zZz RQ P_F lO Execute Record only code having an address When the canned cycle is executed only the modal command commanded in the canned cycle program will be valid in the canned cycle subprogram The modal of the program that called out the canned cycle will not be affected Other subprograms cannot be called from the canned cycle subprogram 10 Decimal points in the movement command will be ignored during the canned cycle subprogram 11 If the No of repetitions L is 2 or more during the incremental value mode the positioning will also be incremented each time Example G91G81X10 Z 50 R 20 F100 L3 165 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles 13 1 2 Initial point and R point level return G98 G99 Ej Function and purpose Whether to use R point or initial level for the return level in the final sequence of the canned cycle can be selected Command format Q G99 Initial level return R point level return Detailed description
256. ons range Group No Illegal e When registering the tool life management data with G10 the group No was commanded in duplicate e A group No that was not registered was designated during the TOOO0O99 command e An M code command which must be commanded independently was issued in the same block as other M code commands e One or more M code commands set in the same group were found in the same block 326 e Change the G command to that which allows inversion of the compensation direction GOO G28 G30 G33 or G53 e Exchange with a tool having a different tip point number e Turn on the G46 inversion error avoidance parameter e Change the tip point number to a legal one e Add the compensation number command to the compensation command block e Check the number of compensation number sets and correct it to a compensation number command within the permitted number of compensation sets e Check the address L Number of the G10 command and correct the number e First check the number of compensation sets and then set the address P designation to within the permitted number of sets e The tool life management data cannot be registered when counting the used data Turn the used data count valid signal OFF Review the No of registrations The maximum No of registrations is shown below No of groups go 40 40 No of tools so 40 40 1 e The group No cannot be commanded in duplicate
257. ons subject to change without notice Printed in Japan on recycled paper
258. ontrol is canceled Thus special attention should be made because the synchronous spindle may do different action than before when the spindle synchronous control is canceld 10 If the phase synchronization command command with R address is issued while the phase shift calculation request signal is ON an operation error 1106 will occur 11 If the phase shift calculation request signal is ON and the basic spindle or synchronous spindle is rotation while rotation synchronization is commanded an operation error 1106 will occur 12 If the phase synchronization command RO lt Ex gt G114 2 H1 D 2 RO is commanded while the phase offset request signal is ON the basic spindle and synchronous spindle phases will be aligned to the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle saved in the NC memory 13 If a value other than the phase synchronization command RO lt Ex gt G114 1 H1 D 2 R000 is commanded while the phase offset request signal is ON the phase error obtained by adding the value commanded with the R address command to the phase difference of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle saved in the NC memory will be used to align the basic spindle and synchronous spindle 88 10 Spindle Functions 10 7 Spindle synchronous control I 14 The phase offset request signal will be ignored when the phase shift calculation request signal is ON 15 The phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle sav
259. ool if required N116 X 200 Preparation for second thread cutting is done M3 N117 G04 X5 0 Command dwell to stabilize the spindle rotation if necessary N11 G33 240 The second thread cutting is executed 47 6 Interpolation Functions 6 7 Thread cutting 6 7 2 Inch thread cutting G33 Ej Function and purpose If the number of ridges per inch in the long axis direction is assigned in the G33 command the feed of the tool synchronized with the spindle rotation will be controlled which means that constant lead straight thread cutting and tapered thread cutting can be performed Fa Command format G33 Zz Ee Qq Zz Thread cutting direction axis address X Y Z a and thread length Ee Number of ridges per inch in direction of long axis axis which moves most decimal point command can also be assigned Qq Thread cutting start shift angle 0 to 360 ff Detailed description 1 The number of ridges in the long axis direction is assigned as the number of ridges per inch 2 The E code is also used to assign the precision lead length and whether the ridge number of precision lead length is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting The number of ridges is designated by setting the parameter 1229 set01 bit1 to 0 3 The E command value should be set within the lead value range when the lead is converted 48 6 Interpolation Functions fez Example of program Thread lead
260. ose The tape command codes used for this controller are combinations of alphabet letters A B C Z numbers 0 1 2 9 and signs These alphabet letters numbers and signs are referred to as characters Each character is represented by a combination of 8 holes which may or may not be present These combinations make up what is called codes This controller uses the ISO code R 840 Note 1 If a code not given in the tape code table in Fig 1 is assigned during operation program error P32 will result Note 2 For the sake of convenience a semicolon has been used in the CNC display to indicate the end of a block EOB IF which separates one block from another Do not use the semicolon key however in actual programming but use the keys in the following table instead CAUTION A EOB and EOR are explanatory notations The actual codes are Line feed and for ISO and End of block and End of Record for EIA ff Detailed description EOB EOR keys and displays ee ee Er Screen display End of block LF or NL End of record 1 Significant data section label skip function All data up to the first EOB after the power has been turned on or after operation has been reset are ignored during automatic operation based on tape memory loading operation or during a search operation In other words the significant data section of a tape extends from the character or
261. ositioned after a return has been made to the latest intermediate point The tool offset will be canceled during reference point return unless it is already canceled and the offset amount will be cleared 10 Control from the intermediate point to the reference zero point is ignored for reference zero point return in the machine lock status The next block is executed when the commanded axis survives as far as the intermediate point 11 Mirror image is valid from the start point to the intermediate point during reference zero point return in the mirror image mode and the tool will move in the opposite direction to that of the command However mirror image is ignored from the intermediate point to the reference zero point and the tool will move to the reference zero point 285 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions fez Example of program Example1 G28 Xx Zz 14 7 Reference zero point return Reference zero point position 1 1st operation after power i GOXx3ZZ3 has been switched on 2nd and subsequent operations 7 x 21 Intermediate point GOXx Z Return start position Rapid traverse rate V 286 Z1 Near point dog 1st operation after power has been switched on 2nd and subsequent operations Reference zero point position 1 R 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 7 Reference zero point return Example2 G29 Xx Zz R Present positio
262. ot more than 7 alphanumerics and it must begin with a letter Do not use in variable names It causes an alarm when the program is executed 13 5 User macro specifications Format SETVN n NAME1 NAME2 n Head number of variable to be named NAME1 n name variable name NAME2 n 1 name variable name Variable names are separated by a comma Detailed description 1 Once variable names have been set they will not be cleared even when the power is switched off 2 Variables in programs can be quoted by their variable names In cases like this the variables should be enclosed in square parentheses Example 1 G01X HPOINT1 NUMBER 25 3 The variable numbers data and variable names appear on the screen of the setting and display unit Example 2 Program SETVN500 A234567 DIST TOOL25 Common variables 500 12345 678 A234567 501 5670 000 DIST 502 156 500 TOOL25 518 10 000 NUMBER Common variable 502 Data 156 5 Name TOOL25 Note At the head of the variable name do not use the characters determined by the NC for use in arithmetic commands etc e g SIN COS ff Workpiece coordinate shift amount The workpiece coordinate system shift amount can be read using variables 2501 and 2601 By substituting a value in these variables the workpiece coordinate system shift amount can be changed Axis Workpiece coordinate No system shift amount
263. oup 10 Peete ie 111 61001 Reads the group 10 1 tool No valid until reset 112 62001 a Reads the group 10 1 status 113 61002 oo Reads the group 10 2 status When group No is not designated 104 60004 Reads the remaining number of registered tools in the group registered first 111 61001 wn Reads the 1 tool No in the group registered first When non registered group No is designated Group 9999 does not exist 60000 9999 Designates the group No 104 60004 104 1 When registration No not used is designated Group 10 has 15 tools 60000 10 ee Designates the group No 111 610163 wo 101 1 When registration No out of the specifications is designated 60000 10 111 61017 0 Program error P241 217 13 Program Support Functions 6 13 5 User macro specifications When tool life management data is registered with G10 command after group No is designated 60000 10 Designates the group No GTO L3 i nein Starts the life management data registration P10 LLn NNn 10 is the group No Ln is the life per tool The group 10 life data Nn is the method is registered TETAS eraa Tn is the tool No GAAS easi unani Registers the group 10 data with the G10 command 111 61001 Reads the group 10 1 tool No G10 LO casas Starts the life man
264. ous control Y432 In spindle synchronous control X42A Spindle synchronization complete X42B Chuck close Y431 Error temporary cancel Y437 Error canceled Note 1 Use the error temporary cancel only when there is still an error between the spindle and synchronization with the chuck close signal Error temporary cancel function When spindle synchronization is carried out while grasping the workpiece with the basic spindle and rotating if the chuck is closed to grasp the workpiece with the synchronous spindle the speed will fluctuate due to external factors and an error will occur If spindle synchronization is continued without compensating this error the workpiece will twist This torsion can be prevented by temporarily canceling this error Device No Signalname Abbrev Explanation Y437 Error temporary SPDRPO The error is canceled when this signal is ON cancel Note 1 Even if the chuck close signal Y431 is OFF the error will be canceled while this signal Y437 is ON Note 2 Turn this signal ON after the both chucks of basic spindle side and synchronous spindle side are closed to grasp the workpiece Turn this signal OFF if even one chuck is opened 94 10 Spindle Functions ft Phase error monitor The phase error can be monitored during spindle phase synchronization 10 8 Spindle synchronization control Il
265. peed setting 10 6 Spindle clamp speed setting G92 EJ lY Function and purpose The maximum clamp speed of the spindle can be assigned by address S following G92 and the minimum clamp speed by address Q Command format G92 Ss Qq Ss Maximum clamp speed Qq Minimum clamp speed Detailed description 1 Besides this command parameters can be used to set the rotational speed range up to 4 stages in 1 r min units to accommodate gear selection between the spindle and spindle motor The lowest upper limit and highest lower limit are valid among the rotational speed ranges based on the parameters and based on G92 Ss Qq 2 Set in the parameters 1146 Sclamp and 1227 aux11 bit5 whether to carry out rotation speed clamp only in the constant surface speed mode or even when the constant surface speed is canceled Note G92S command and speed clamp operation Oo aux11 bit5 0 aux11 bit5 1 aux11 bit5 0 aux11 bit5 Rotation spedd clamp commana Rotation speed Rotation speed P p clamp command clamp command es Rotati d Rotati d In G97_ Spindle rotation speed command AAOS PAS TATON SPSS clamp command clamp command Rotation speed clamp execution notation speed Rotation speed i clamp execution clamp execution Operation Rotati d N iati In G97 No rotation speed clamp talon Pee o roiauon clamp execution speed clamp 81 10 Spindle Functions 10 7 Spindle synchronous control I 10 7 Spindle synch
266. perating start point commanded by G117 is not on the movement path the miscellaneous function will be output once the movement has reached all the coordinate values of the operating start point In addition only the commanded axis is checked Example G117 X100 Mxx Mxx is output when X100 is reached Note The other axes are not subject to the check 6 The completion of the miscellaneous function in the previous group is checked at the operating start point and the miscellaneous function of the next group is output Thus normal PLC interfacing is possible 276 13 Program Support Functions 13 16 Miscellaneous function output during axis movement 7 A miscellaneous function issued in the same block as the block with the movement command is output before the movement and starts the movement During movement operation will not stop at the operating start point However at the end point of the block the completion of all the miscellaneous functions is checked first and then the execution of the next block is started 8 G117 should be issued in the sequence of operating start points Program error P33 occurs if the sequence of the operating start point is the reverse of the movements When operating start points coincide the miscellaneous functions are output in the sequence in which they were issued 9 When an operating start point cannot be determined by the next block movement the next operation is performed by the para
267. pindle basic spindle The function is used if a workpiece grasped by the basic spindle is to be grasped by a synchronous spindle or if the spindle rotation speed has to be changed when one workpiece is grasped by both spindles With the spindle synchronous control II selection of the spindles and synchronization start etc are all designated from the PLC Basic spindle and synchronous spindle selection Select the basic spindle and synchronous spindle for synchronous control from the PLC Device No Signal name Abbrev Explanation R157 Basic spindle Select a serially connected spindle to be selection controlled as the basic spindle 0 1st spindle 1 1st spindle 2 2nd spindle 7 7th spindle Note 1 Spindle synchronization control will not take place if a spindle not connected in serial is selected Note 2 If 0 is designated the 1st spindle will be controlled as the basic spindle R158 Synchronous Select a serially connected spindle to be spindle controlled as the synchronous spindle selection 0 2nd spindle 1 1st spindle 2 2nd spindle 7 7th spindle Note 3 Spindle synchronous control will not take place if a spindle not connected in serial is selected or if the same spindle as the basic spindle is selected Note 4 If 0 is designated the 2nd spindle will be controlled as the synchronous spindle 90 10 Spindle Functions ft Starting spindle sync
268. pothetical tool center path and point of intersection it will be canceled The compensation direction will not change 12 3 Tool radius compensation a b Hypothetical tool center path D 7 Pan N N1 G41 G1X_ N2 G40XaYbliJj In this case the point of intersection will always be obtained regardless of the compensation direction even when the commanded vector is incorrect as shown below When the I and j symbols in the above program example are incorrect Hypothetical tool center path 122 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation If the compensation vector obtained with point of intersection calculation is extremely large a perpendicular vector will be created in the block before G40 a Hypothetical tool center path 2 If the arc is 360 or more due to the details of J and K at G40 after the arc command an uncut section will occur N Uncut section iNt G42 G91 GO1X200 j N2 G02J150 N3 G40 G1X150 Y 150 l 100 J100 Program path Tool center path T Corner movement When a multiple number of offset vectors are created at the joints between movement command blocks the tool will move in a straight line between those vectors This action is called corner movement When the vectors do not coincide the tool moves in order to machine the corner although this movement is part and parcel of the joint block Consequently operation in the single block mode will exe
269. ppendix 3 Order of G Function Command Priority G code Commanded G code G00 G03 1 Positioning interpolation G10 G11 Program data setting G17 G19 Plane selection 09 G73 G89 Group 1 command is executed Group 9 is canceled G04 is executed G73 G89 are ignored G10 G11 are executed G73 G89 are ignored 10 G98 G99 12 13 14 17 G54 G59 G61 G64 G66 G67 G96 G97 G66 G67 are executed G00 G03 1 modals are updated G04 is executed Group 12 is changed G66 G67 G10 is are executed executed G10 is G54 G59 ignored modals are updated 336 19 G50 1 G51 1 O During the arc commana all axis names become mirror center data Movement with mirror shape O G04 is executed G50 1 and G51 1 are ignored G10 G11 are executed G50 1 and G51 1 are ignored Appendix 3 Order of G Function Command Priority G code 09 Commanded G73 G89 G code Inch metric changeover G27 G30 Reference point compare return G31 G31 3 Skip command is executed Thread cutting Group 9 is canceled O G37 Automatic tool length measurement G40 G42 Error P155 Tool radius F Error P155 compensation 10 12 13 G98 G99 G54 G59 G61 G64 337 14 17 G66 G67 G96 G97 G66 G67 are executed G27 G30 are G66 G67 are executed G33 modals is updated O G66 G67 are executed G37 modals is G27 G30
270. pre read buffer This function is valid even during a Sequence number search All blocks with the code are also input and output during tape storing and tape output regardless of the position of the optional block skip switch 10 3 Data Formats 3 6 Program sequence block numbers O N 3 6 Program sequence block numbers O N Ej Function and purpose These numbers are used for monitoring the execution of the machining programs and for calling both machining programs and specific stages in machining programs 1 Program numbers are classified by workpiece correspondence or by subprogram units and they are designated by the address 0 followed by a number with up to 8 digits 2 Sequence numbers are attached where appropriate to command blocks which configure machining programs and they are designated by the address N followed by a number with up to 5 digits 3 Block numbers are automatically provided internally They are preset to zero every time a program number or sequence number is read and they are counted up one at a time unless program numbers or sequence numbers are commanded in blocks which are subsequently read Consequently all the blocks of the machining programs given in the table below can be determined without further consideration by combinations of program numbers sequence numbers and block numbers Machining program Monitor display ao Block No 012345678 DEMO PROG 12345678 0 0
271. program return command Sequence number of return destination return to the block that follows the calling block if omitted Program number of return destination return to the main program at calling if omitted Sequence number to start searching of return destination the block that follows the calling block will be handled as the search start position if omitted Sequence number to finish searching of return destination the block that precedes the calling block will be handled as the search finish position if omitted Number of times after repetition number has been changed 1 if omitted ff Creating and entering subprograms Subprograms have the same format as machining programs for normal memory operation except that the subprogram completion instruction M99 P__ is entered as an independent block at the last block OAAAAAAAA Program number as subprogram Main body of subprogram Subprogram return command EOR Entry completion code 1 The above program is entered by editing operations at the setting and display unit For further details refer to the section on program editing in the Control Instructions 173 13 Program Support Functions 2 3 13 3 Subprogram control Only those subprogram numbers ranging from 1 through 99999999 designated by the optional specifications can be used No distinction between main programs and subprograms is made since they are entered in the sequence in which they were
272. ps of rapid traverse and cutting feed after nearing the workpiece keg Example of program When the following type of program is created Tool center path N1 G91 G00 G41 X 500 Y 500 D1 7 N2 1000 ae N6 N4 Go 2 300 Fi rai Do ne ute Res Fa PNA Z axis lowers F L 1 block Fy Ni j x lt Z N 2 Y With this program at the start of the N1 compensation the program will be read to the N6 block The relation of N1 and N6 can be judged and correct compensation can be executed as shown above If the above program s N4 block is divided into two G91 GOO G41 X 500 Y 500 D1 S1000 M3 Z 250 G01 Z 50 F1 Y 100 F2 In this case the four blocks N2 to N5 do not have a command in the XY plane so when the N1 compensation is started the program cannot be read to the N6 block As a result the compensation is done based only on the information in the N1 block and the compensation vector is not created at the start of compensation Thus an excessive cut in occurs as shown above 135 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation In this case consider the calculation of the inner side and before the Z axis cutting issue a command in the same direction as the direction that the Z axis advances in after lowering to prevent excessive cutting G91 G00 G41 X 500 Y 400 D1 Y100 1000 m M3 Z 250 G01 Z 50 F1 Y 100 F2 The mo
273. r use denotes that a corresponding address is not available 190 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications Argument specification II Argument specification Variable in Il address macro Argument specification Il Variable in as ees macro A 28 29 i PO YO a KO Y 3 Note 1 Subscripts 1 to 10 for l J and K indicate the order of the specified command sets They are not required to specify instructions 1 Local variables in subprograms can be defined by means of the lt argument gt designation during macro call Main program Subprogram 9900 G91 G01 X 19 COS 1 G65 P9900 A60 S100 F800 Y 19 SIN 1 F 9 To subprogram M02 Refer to the local variables and control the movement etc Local variables set by argument Local variable data table 191 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 2 The local variables can be used freely in that subprogram Main program G65 P1 A100 B50 J10 F500 Example of front surface milling To subprogram Local variables set by argument Subprogram 1 30 FUP 2 5 2 5 2 30 2 M98 H100 L 30 X A M99 N100 G1 X 1 F 9 Y 5 X 1 Y 5 M99 The local variables can be changed in the subprogram Local variable data table A 1 100 000 2 50 000 9 500 5 10 000 8 333 30 gt 3 B F J In the front s
274. radius compensation cancel command G40 should be issued BOUND DIRECT e Change the vector to that with which the At the start of G46 nose radius compensation direction is defined compensation the compensation direction e Exchange with a tool having a different tip is undefined if this shift vector is used point number 325 Appendix 2 Program Error P157 P170 P172 P173 P177 P178 P179 SIDE REVERSED During G46 nose radius compensation the compensation direction is inverted ILLEGAL TIP P During G46 nose radius compensation the tip point is illegal other than 1 to 8 NO CORR NO The compensation number DOO TOO HOO command was not given when the tool radius compensation G41 G42 G43 G46 command was issued Alternatively the compensation number is larger than the number of sets in the specifications P10 L NO ERR G10 L number error The L address command is not correct when the G10 command is issued G10 P NO ERR G10 compensation error When the G10 command is issued a compensation number not within the permitted number of sets in the specifications has been commanded for the compensation number command COUNTING LIFE Registration of tool life management data with G10 was attempted when the used data count valid signal was ON LIFE REGISTRATION OVER The No of registration groups total No of registered tools or the No of registrations per group exceeded the specificati
275. rameter registration example in Table 1 G17X__Y__ XY plane G18X_V_ VX plane G1i8U_ V__ VU plane G19Y_Z YZ plane G19Y_V_ YV plane 2 The plane will not changeover at a block where a plane selection G code G17 G18 G19 is not commanded G17X__Y__ XY plane Y Zo XY plane plane does not change 3 Ifthe axis address is omitted in the block where the plane selection G code G17 G18 G19 is commanded it will be viewed as though the basic three axes address has been omitted For the parameter registration example in Table 1 G17 XY plane G17U_ UY plane G18U_ ZU plane G18V__ VX plane G19Y__ YZ plane G19V__ YV plane 4 The axis command that does not exist in the plane determined by the plane selection G code G17 G18 G19 is irrelevant to the plane selection For the parameter registration example in Table 1 G17U_ Zs 5 If the above is commanded the UY plane will be selected and Z will move regardless of the plane If the basic axis and parallel axis are commanded in duplicate in the same block as the plane selection G code G17 G18 G19 the plane will be determined in the priority order of basic axis and parallel axis For the parameter registration example in Table 1 G17U_Y_W_ If the above is commanded the UY plane will be selected and W will move regardless of the plane Note 1 The plane set with parameter 1025 _ plane will be selected when the power is turned ON or reset 34 6 In
276. rdinate system X 100mm and Y 100mm position G91 N 3 X 100 Y50 The X axis moves to 100 mm and the Y axis to 50 0mm as an incremental value and as a result X moves to 100 mm and Y to 100 mm 5 Position Commands 5 1 Position command methods 3 Since multiple commands can be issued in the same block it is possible to command specific addresses as either absolute values or incremental values N 4 G90 X300 G91 Y100 The X axis is treated in the absolute value mode and with G90 is moved to the workpiece coordinate system 300 mm position The Y axis is moved 100 mm with G91 As a result Y moves to the 200 mm position In terms of the next block G91 remains as the modal and becomes the incremental value mode 4 When the power is turned ON it is possible to select whether you want absolute value commands or incremental value commands with the 1073 _Absm parameter 5 Even when commanding with the manual data input MDI it will be treated as a modal from that block 19 5 Position Commands 5 2 Inch metric command change 5 2 Inch metric command change G20 G21 EJ Q a Function and purpose These G commands are used to change between the inch and millimeter metric systems Command format G20 G21 G20 Inch command G21 Metric command Detailed description G20 and G21 selection is meaningful only for linear axes and it is meaningless for rotary ax
277. rdinate system is created at the G54 coordinate system 2000 2000 by 6 The G54 coordinate system and local coordinate system are matched by 8 303 15 Measurement Support Functions 15 1 Automatic tool length measurement 15 Measurement Support Functions 15 1 Automatic tool length measurement G37 Ej Function and purpose These functions issue the command values from the measuring start position as far as the measurement position move the tool in the direction of the measurement position stop the machine once the tool has arrived at the sensor cause the NC system to calculate automatically the difference between the coordinate values at that time and the coordinate values of the commanded measurement position and provide this difference as the tool offset amount When offset is already being applied to a tool it moves the tool toward the measurement position with the offset still applied and if a further offset amount is generated as a result of the measurement and calculation it provides further compensation of the present offset amount If there is one type of offset amount at this time and the offset amount is distinguished between tool length offset amount and wear offset amount the wear amount will be automatically compensated ES I Command format G37Z R DF Measuring axis address and coordinates of measurement position X Y z a where a is the additional axis This commands the distance between the measure
278. rdinate value The G49 tool length offset cancel mode is entered when the power is turned ON or when M02 has been executed Example 1 For absolute value command H01 100000 N1 G28 ZO T01 MO6 N2 G90 G92 ZO N3 G43 Z5000 H01 N4 G01 Z 50000 F500 Example 2 For incremental value Tool length offset command H01 100 HO1 100000 N1 G28 ZO T01 MO6 N2 G91 G92 ZO N3 G43 Z5000 H01 N4 G01 Z 55000 F500 3 3 x 5 102 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 2 Tool length offset cancel 2 Offset No a The offset amount differs according to the compensation type Type 1 G43 Hh When the above is commanded the offset amount h commanded with offset No h will be applied commonly regardless of the tool length offset amount tool diameter offset amount shape offset amount or wear offset amount Type 2 G43 Hh When the above is commanded the offset Wear compensation amount h commanded with offset No h will amount be as follows h Shape offset Note wear offset amount The valid range of the offset No will differ according to the specifications No of offset sets If the commanded offset No exceeds the specification range the program error P170 will occur Tool length cancel will be applied when HO is designated The offset No commanded in the same block as G43 or G44 will be valid for the following modals Example 3 G43 Zz1 Hh1 3 Tool length of
279. re cequred_ are required 5222 5223 5224 5220 sd 5284 5281 o 5304 5800 S Example 1 N1 G28 X0 YO ZO N2 5221 20 5222 20 N3 G90 GOO G54 X0 YO N10 5221 90 5222 10 ageer asine oy work coordinate N11 G90 GOO G54 XOYO Seem defined ageer asine oy S G54 work coordinate ay defined by M02 Example 2 oordinate system before change N100 5221 5221 5201 5222 5222 5202 5241 52414 5201 5242 52424 5202 5201 0 5202 0 oordinate system after change This is an example where the external workpiece offset values are added to the work coordinate G54 G55 system offset values without changing the position of the work coordinate systems 204 13 Program Support Functions ff Alarm 3000 The NC system can be forcibly set to the alarm state by using variable number 3000 13 5 User macro specifications Format 3000 70 CALLHPROGRAMMER TEL 530 70 Alarm number CALLHPROGRAMMER TEL 530 Alarm message Any alarm number from 1 to 9999 can be specified The alarm message must be less than 31 characters long The P277 user macro alarm message appears in the lt alarm gt column on diagnosis screen 1 while the alarm number and alarm message CALL PROGRAMMER TEL 530 is indicated in the lt operator message gt Example of program alarm when 1 0 lt Alarm gt P277 Macro alarm message IF
280. re is an error in the WHILE conditional DOO ENDO statement 329 Appendix 2 Program Error SETVN SNT ERR e Review the program There is an error in the SETVNO statement e The number of characters in the variable when the variable name setting was made DO END EXCESS The number of Os for DO ENDT in the WHILE conditional DOO ENDO statement has exceeded 27 DO END MMC The DO s and END s are not paired off properly WHILE GOTO TPE There is a WHILE or GOTO statement on the tape during tape operation NO MACRO ADDR A required address has not been specified in the user macro ADR A ERR The user macro does not use address A as a variable PTR OP MACRO User macro G200 G201 or G202 was specified during tape or MDI operation VAR NAME ERROR The variable names have not been commanded properly VAR NAME DUPLI The name of the variable has been duplicated NO PROG MIRR A mirror image G50 1 or G51 1 command has been issued though the programmable mirror image specifications are not provided NO CORNER R C Acommand was issued for corner rounding or corner chamfering though there are no such specifications NO ARC R C SPC Corner rounding or chamfering was specified in the arc interpolation block although corner chamfering corner rounding II is unsupported CORNER NO MOVE The block next to corner rounding chamfering is not a movement command 330 name of the SETVN statement must be 7 or
281. re returned by the dog type of return just as with the manual type In this case the return direction is regarded as the command sign direction If the return type is straight type return the return direction will not be checked For the second and subsequence returns the return is made at high speed to the reference zero point which was stored at the first time and the direction is not checked When reference zero point return is completed the zero point arrival output signal is output and also 1 appears at the axis name line on the setting and display unit screen The G29 command is equivalent to the following G00 Xx Yy ZZ aa Rapid traverse non interpolation type applies independently for each axis for the positioning from the G00 Xx2 Yy2 222 aaz reference point to the intermediate point In this case x4 Y4 Z and a are the coordinates of the G28 or G30 intermediate point Program error P430 results when G29 is executed if automatic reference zero point return G28 is not performed after the power has been switched on When the Z axis is canceled the movement of the Z axis to the intermediate point will be ignored and only the position display for the following positioning will be executed The machine itself will not move The intermediate point coordinates x4 Y1 Z1 a1 of the positioning point are assigned by the position command modal G90 G91 G29 is valid for either G28 or G30 but the commanded axes are p
282. read This means that main programs and subprograms should not be given the same numbers If they are error E11 appears during entry Registration example Subprogram A Subprogram B Subprogram C Main programs can be entered in the memory or program by MDI operation but subprograms must be entered in the memory Besides the M98 command subprogram nesting is subject to the following commands e G65 Macro call e G66 Modal call e G66 1 Modal call e G code call e Miscellaneous function call M S T etc e Macro interrupt e MDI interrupt e Automatic tool length measurement e Multi step skip function Subprogram nesting is not subject to the following commands which can be called even beyond the 8th nesting level e Canned cycles When the subprogram is to be repeatedly used it will be repeatedly executed for times provided that M98 Pp Ll is programmed 174 13 Program Support Functions fez Example of program When there are 3 subprogram calls known as 3 nesting levels 13 3 Subprogram control Main program Sub program 1 Sub program 2 Sub program 3 M98P 10 1 For nesting the M98 and M99 commands should always be paired off on a 1 1 basis 1 for 1 2 for 2 etc 2 Modal information can be rewritten according to the execution sequence without distinction between main programs and subprograms This means that after calling a subprogram attention must be paid to the mod
283. rn the power OFF once and ON again As for C6 L type T type C64 T type and C64T T type there are following restrictions A program error P34 will occur if G44 1 command is issued No data can be set to 1199 Sselect 0 is set when the NC power is turned ON Only one spindle than is selected with 21049 SPname can be commanded as S in each part system A program error P33 will occur if the SO command is issued If the S command is issued in the same as the spindle selection commands G43 1 and G44 1 which spindle the S command is valid for depends on the order that G43 1 G44 1 and S command are issued When S command precedes the G codes it follows the G43 1 G44 1 mode before S command is issued When G codes precede it follows the G43 1 G44 1 mode issued in the same block G43 1 and G44 1 commands can be issued from every part system 78 10 Spindle Functions Ra Relation with other functions 1 The following functions change after the spindle selection command 10 4 Multiple spindle control a Per rotation command synchronous feed Even if F is commanded in the G95 mode the per rotation feedrate for the selected spindle nth spindle will be applied during G43 1 mode and for the 2nd spindle during G44 1 mode b S commands S Sn constant surface speed control thread cutting Funetion omode 44 1 mode S command during G97 G96 Command con
284. rogram error P33 will occur when the Sn Command is issued Refer to 10 4 2 Spindle selection commana for details 77 10 Spindle Functions 10 4 Multiple spindle control 10 4 2 Spindle selection command Ej Function and purpose This function controls which spindle s rotation the cutting follows in addition designates the spindle to be selected when S Command is issued Q Command format Selected spindle nth spindle control mode ON Selected with parameter a 1 2 5 2nd spindle control mode ON Detailed description G43 1 and G44 1 are modal G codes The spindle control mode entered when the power is turned ON or reset depends on the parameter setting Designate the spindle No to be selected in G43 1 modal with the parameter basic specifications parameter 1199 Sselect This parameter is provided for every part system to set as follows items Details _ Setting range unit 1199 Sselect Select Select the initial condition of 0 Selected spindle control spindle control when power is mode G43 1 i turned ON or reset 1 2nd spindle control mode G44 1 21049 SPname Designate the spindle No 1st spindle 4 4th spindle selected for the G43 1 modal 1st spindle 5 5th spindle in each part system 2nd spindle 6 6th spindle 3rd spindle 7 7th spindle Reset the NC after changing 1199 Sselect and 21049 SPname parameters It is no use to tu
285. ronous control l G114 1 EJ FF Function and purpose In a machine having two or more spindles this function controls the rotation soeed and phase of one spindle basic spindle in synchronization with the rotation of the other spindle synchronous spindle The function is used when the rotation speed of the two spindles must be matched for example if a workpiece grasped by the 1st spindle is to be grasped by a 2nd spindle or if the spindle rotation speed has to be changed when one workpiece is grasped by both the 1st and 2nd spindles With the spindle synchronous control function designation of spindles and controls start stop of synchronization are commanded using G codes in the machining program Command format 1 Spindle synchronous control ON G114 1 This command designates the basic spindle and synchronous spindle and synchronizes the two designated spindles By commanding the synchronous spindle phase shift amount the phases of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle can be aligned G114 1 H_D_R_A_ H_ Basic spindle selection Synchronous spindle selection D_ R_ Spindle synchronization phase shift amount A Spindle synchronization acceleration deceleration time constant 2 Spindle synchronous control cancel G113 This command cancels the synchronous state of the two spindles rotating in synchronization with the spindle synchronous command Basic spindle selection Select the No of the spind
286. rounding or chamfering e Make the corner rounding or chamfering less than the movement distance since this distance in the following block is shorter than the corner rounding or chamfering e Recheck the program e Check the specifications NO GEOMETRIC 2 e Check the specifications There are no geometric IB specification INC ERR GEOMT The second geometric block was specified by an incremental value NO G01 GEOMT The second geometric block contains no linear command e Correct the geometric angle e Specify this block by an absolute value e Specify the G01 command NO ADRS GEOMT e Recheck the program The geometric format is invalid PL CHG GEOMT A plane switching command was executed during geometric command processing P397 ARC END EPR GEOMT In geometric IB the circular arc end point does not contact or cross the next block start point P398 NO GEOMT IB Although the geometric IB specifications are not included a geometric command is given i NO PARAM LES AGL GEOMT The angular difference between the geometric line and line is 1 or less Although the programmable parameter input specifications are not provided the command was given 331 e Execute the plane switching command before geometric command processing e Recheck the geometric circular arc command and the preceding and following commands e Check the specifications e Check the specifications Appendix 2
287. rror will occur in the path course Speed of each axis Normal mode 2002 clamp G01 clamp speed 2007 GitL Linear type acceleration deceleration time constant 2008 Git1 Exponential function type acceleration deceleration time constant 2 x O O ke om 2 a Because of the constant inclination type linear acceleration deceleration the acceleration deceleration time is reduced as the command speed becomes slower b The acceleration deceleration time constant becomes one value common for each axis in the system gt High accuracy control mode 2002 clamp G01 clamp speed 1206 G1bF Target speed 1207 GibtL Acceleration deceleration time to target speed Combined speed Gibi G1btL 2 G1bF and GtbtL are values for specifying the inclination of the acceleration deceleration time the actual cutting feed maximum speed is clamped by the 2002 clamp value 258 13 Program Support Functions 13 12 High accuracy control 2 Path control in circular interpolation commands When commanding circular interpolation with the conventional post interpolation acceleration deceleration control method the path itself that is output from the CNC to the servo runs further inside the commanded path and the circle radius becomes smaller than that of the commanded circle This is due to the influence of the smoothing course
288. rtain the status of mirror image at a particular point in time for each axis The axes correspond to the bits of 3007 When the bits are 0 it means that the mirror image function is not valid when they are 1 it means that it is valid 3007 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 nthaxis felts 4 3fea i 207 13 Program Support Functions ff G command modals Using variable numbers 4001 to 4021 it is possible to read the G modal commands which have been issued up to the block immediately before Similarly it is possible to read the modals in the block being executed with variable numbers 4201 13 5 User macro specifications a 4221 Variablenumber number Pre read Execution block block 4001 4201 nterpolation mode 4002 4202 Plane selection 4003 4203 Absolute incremental 4004 4204 No variable No Feed designation inchimetric Tool nose R compensation Tool length offset 4009 4209 _ Canned cycle 4010 4210 Return level ETE 4211 4012 4212 Work coordinate system 4013 4213 Acceleration deceleration 4214 Macro modal call Constant surface speed control 4218 No variable No Mirror image No variable No Example G28 X0 YO Z0 G90 G1 X100 F1000 G91 G65 P300 X100 Y100 M02 0300 1 4003 2 4203 G 1 X 24 Y 25 M99 208 Function G00 0 GO1 1 G02 2 G03 3 G33 33 G17 17 G18 18
289. s refer to the list 4 See below for the number of significant digits in decimal point commands Input command unit cunit 10 Movement Movement Feed rate command linear command rotary Decimal Integer Decimal Decimal Decimal part part part part aik 0 to 000 to 0 to 000 0 to 00 to 99 0 to 000 to 99999 999 99999 to 999 60000 99999 999 meter INCH 0000 to 99999 000 to 000 to 5 The decimal point command is valid even for commands defining the variable data used in subprograms 6 While the smallest decimal point command is validated the smallest unit for a command without a decimal point designation is the smallest command input unit set in the specifications 1um 10um etc or mm can be selected This selection can be made with parameter 1078 Decpt2 7 Decimal point commands for decimal point invalid addresses are processed as integer data only and everything below the decimal point is ignored Addresses which are invalid for the decimal point are D H L M N O S and T All variable commands however are treated as data with decimal points 21 5 Position Commands 5 3 Decimal point input fez Example of program 1 Example of program for decimal point valid address Specification Decimal point command 1 Decimal point division command 2 Program example When 1 1um When 1 10um 1 1mm GO0X123 45 decimal points are all mm X123 450mm X123 450mm X123 450mm points
290. s and correct the program so that it does not exceed 8 times e Specify the sequence numbers in the call block of the subprogram e When using the IC card check the program in the IC card and the number of IC card program calls e Enter the subprogram e Check the program number in the IC card e Check the specifications e Check the program variable number e Designate the sign in the variable definition of the program e Correct the program e Check the specifications NO G12 G13 SPEC e Check the specifications There are no circular cutting specifications Appendix 2 Program Error P270 NO MACRO SPEC e Check the specifications Amacro specification was commanded though there are no such command specifications P271 NO MACRO INT e Check the specifications A macro interrupt command has been issued though it is not included in the specifications P272 NC MACRO ILL e Review the program and place the An NC statement and a macro statement executable statement and macro statement in exist together in the same block separate blocks P273 MACRO OVERCALL e Review the program and correct it so that the The frequency of the macro call has macro calls do not exceed the limit imposed exceeded the limit imposed by the by the specification specification P275 MACRO ARG EX e Review the program The number of macro call argument type II sets has exceeded the limit P276 CALL CANCEL e Review the program A G6
291. s once the other part system has reached all of the start point axis coordinates Example X also has passed Z has passed pO Q i lt Movement Command point A Actual start point 6 The following operation is executed by parameters base specification parameter 1229 set01 bit5 when the start point cannot be determined by the next block movement of the other system a When the parameter is ON Operation waits until the start point is reached by the movement in the next and subsequent blocks Waiting Own part system Other part system b When the parameter is OFF The own part system starts upon completion of the next block movement Own part system G115 Other part system 7 The waiting status continues when the G115 command has been duplicated between part systems 8 9 Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of the other part system Program error P33 occurs when the G115 command is issued for 3 part systems 0 The single block stop function does not apply for the G115 block A 1 1 When the G115 command is issued continuously in 2 or more blocks the block in which it was issued last will be valid 12 A program error P32 will occur if an address other than an axis is designated in G115 command block 272 13 Program Support Functions 13 15 Start Point Designation Synchronizing Type 2 13 15
292. s the previous value 167 13 Program Support Functions 13 2 Special canned cycle 13 2 Special canned cycle G34 G35 G36 G37 1 EJ lY Function and purpose The special canned cycle is used with the standard canned cycle Before using the special canned cycle program the canned cycle sequence selection G code and hole machining data to record the hole machining data If there is no positioning data the canned cycle will not be executed and only the data will be recorded Even after the special canned cycle is executed the recorded standard canned cycled will be held until canceled If the special canned cycle is designated when not in the canned cycle mode only positioning will be executed and the hole drilling operation will not be done Bolt hole circle G34 G34 Xx Yy r JOKn X Y Positioning of bolt hole cycle center This will be affected by G90 G91 Radius r of the circle The unit follows the input setting unit and is given with a positive number J Angle 6 of the point to be drilled first The CCW direction is positive The decimal point position will be the degree class If there is no decimal point the unit will be 0 001 K No of holes n to be drilled 1 to 9999 can be designated but 0 cannot be designated When the value is positive positioning will take place in the CCW direction and when negative will take place in the CW direction If 0 is designated the alarm P221 Spec
293. second third or fourth reference zero pint via the intermediate point specified by G30 The second third and fourth reference zero point coordinates refer to the positions specific to the machine and these can be checked with the setting and display unit If G29 is specified after completion of returning to the second third and fourth reference zero points the intermediate position used last is used as the intermediate position for returning by G29 1st reference zero Intermediate point x y1 point G30P3Xx Yy G29Xx YY gt 3rd reference zero point With reference zero point return on a plane during compensation the tool moves without tool diameter compensation zero compensation from the intermediate point with a subsequent G29 command the tool moves with tool diameter compensation until the G29 command from the intermediate point Tool nose center path A 3rd reference zero point Programmed path G30P3Xx Yy4 G29Xx Yyo N i 4 x 23 Yo 289 14 Coordinates System Setting Functions 14 8 2nd 3rd and 4th reference zero point return 6 The tool length offset amount for the axis involved is canceled after the second third and fourth reference zero point returns 7 With second third and fourth reference zero point returns in the machine lock status control from the intermediate point to the reference zero point will be ignored When the designated axis reaches as far as the intermedi
294. signation Synchronizing Type 1 G115 Ej Function and purpose The part system can wait for the other part system to reach the start point before starting itself The synchronization point can be set in the middle of a block gg Command format InL1 G115 X Z C_ InL1 Synchronizing command G115 G command X Z C_ Start point Command axis and workpiece coordinate values for checking synchronization of other part system ff Detailed description 1 Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of the other part system 2 The start point check is executed only for the axis designated by G115 Example L2 G115 X100 Once the other part system reaches X100 the own part system will start The other axes are not checked 3 The other part system starts first when synchronizing is executed 4 The own part system waits for the other part system to move and reach the designated start point and then starts Own part system 1G115 Synchronized operation ii Other part system H ___ Designated start point Own part system _ J 14115 Synchronized operation Other part system H _____ j _ Designated start point 271 13 Program Support Functions 13 14 Start Point Designation Synchronizing Type 1 5 When the start point designated by G115 is not on the next block movement path of the other part system the own system start
295. spindle s phase shift amount setting amount Unit 360 7 4096 Spindle synchronous control Y432 In spindle synchronous control X42A Note 2 Spindle synchronization complete X42B Spindle phase synchronous control Y433 Spindle phase synchronization complete X42C Spindle phase i synchronization complete ON i Spindle phase Spindle phase H H synchronous control ON synchronous control OFF Spindle synchronization i complete ON i Spindle synchronization Spindle synchronous control ON control OFF Note 2 Turns OFF temporarily to change the rotation speed during phase synchronization 92 10 Spindle Functions 10 8 Spindle synchronization control Il ft Calculating the spindle synchronization phase shift amount and requesting phase offset The spindle phase shift amount calculation function obtains and saves the phase difference of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle by turning the PLC signal ON during spindle synchronization When calculating the spindle phase shift the synchronous spindle can be rotated with the handle so the relation of the phases between the spindles can also be adjusted visually If the spindle phase synchronization control signal is input while the phase offset request signal SSPHF is ON the phases will be aligned using the position shifted by the saved phase shift amount as a reference This makes aligning of the ph
296. ster R29 bit 5 Register R29 bit 6 Register R29 bit 7 Register R29 bit 8 Register R29 bit 9 Register R29 bit 10 Register R29 bit 11 Register R29 bit 12 Register R29 bit 13 Register R29 bit 14 Register R29 bit 15 No of points System variable 13 Program Support Functions Interface input signal Register R30 bit 0 Register R30 bit 1 Register R30 bit 2 Register R30 bit 3 Register R30 bit 4 Register R30 bit 5 Register R30 bit 6 Register R30 bit 7 Register R30 bit 8 Register R30 bit 9 Register R30 bit 10 Register R30 bit 11 Register R30 bit 12 Register R30 bit 13 Register R30 bit 14 Register R30 bit 15 196 variable 13 5 User macro specifications No of points System Interface input signal Register R31 bit 0 Register R31 bit 1 Register R31 bit 2 Register R31 bit 3 Register R31 bit 4 Register R31 bit 5 Register R31 bit 6 Register R31 bit 7 Register R31 bit 8 Register R31 bit 9 Register R31 bit 10 Register R31 bit 11 Register R31 bit 12 Register R31 bit 13 Register R31 bit 14 Register R31 bit 15 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 2 Macro interface by part system input Note As for the C64T system the input output signals used for this function are valid up to 3rd part system System No of Interface input signal points 1 2 3 4 6 7 R970 R1070 R1170 R1270 R1370 R1470 R1570 System No of Interface input signal points
297. stopped or the elapsing of the deceleration check time has been checked The exact stop check function is designed to accomplish this purpose Either the deceleration check time or in position state is selected with parameter 1193 inpos In position check is valid when 1193 inpos is set to 1 The in position width is set with parameter 2224 sv024 on the servo parameter screen by the machine manufacturer Command format The exact stop check command GO9 has an effect only with the cutting command G01 G03 in its particular block Example of program N001 G09 G01 X100 000 F150 The following block is started once the deceleration check time or in position state has been checked after the machine has decelerated and stopped Noo2 Y 100 000 eae t f Commanded speed NO01 Without G09 Solid line indicates speed pattern with G09 command Broken line indicates speed pattern without G09 command Fig 1 Exact stop check result 60 7 Feed Functions ff Detailed description 1 With continuous cutting feed 7 8 Exact stop check Next block Previous block Previous block Fig 3 Block joint with cutting feed in position check In Figs 2 and 3 Ts Cutting feed acceleration deceleration time constant Lc In position width As shown in Fig 3 the in position width Lc can be set into the servo parameter 2224 SV024 as the remaining distance shaded area in Fig 3 of the previous block
298. structions a M98PAAAA b G65PAAAAA lt argument gt c G66P AAAAA lt argument gt d G66 1PAAAAA lt argument gt When the parameters corresponding to c and d above are set issue the cancel command G67 either in the user macro or after the call code has been commanded so as to cancel the modal call 185 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 2 The correspondence between the XX which conducts the macro call and the program number PAAAA of the macro to be called is set by parameter 3 Up to 10 G codes from G100 to G255 can be used with this instruction G01 to 99 can also be used with parameter 1081 Gmac_P Note 1 G101 to G110 and G200 to G202 are user macro codes but if the parameters are set as the G code call codes the G code call will be the priority and these codes cannot be used for user macro I 4 These commands cannot be issued during a user macro subprogram which has been called by a G code Program example G16X100 Y100 Z100 F500 gt 5 ff Miscellaneous command macro call for M S T B code macro call The user macro subprogram of the specified program number can be called merely by issuing an M or S T B code Only entered codes apply for M but all S T and B codes apply Format M or S 3 T 5 B 5 Mx M code for macro call or S T B code Detailed description 1 The above instruction functions in the same way as the instr
299. t coordinate values workpiece 2 coordinate system are readout to 101 309 15 Measurement Support Functions ff Detailed description G31 coasting The amount of coasting from when the skip signal is input during the G31 command until the machine stops differs according to the parameter 1174 skip _F or F command in G31 The time to start deceleration to a stop after responding to the skip signal is short so the machine can be stopped precisely with a small coasting amount 15 2 Skip function F F o EO TP GO x t o Coasting amount mm G31 skip speed mm min Position loop time constant s position loop gain Response delay time s time taken from the detection to the arrival of the skip signal at the controller via PC Response error time 0 001 s When G31 is used for calculation the value calculated from the section indicated by 51 in the above equation can be compensated however 52 results in calculation error Skip signal input P Tp Area inside shaded section denotes coasting amount 8o Stop pattern with skip signal input The relationship between the coasting amount and speed when Tp is 30ms and t is 5ms is shown in the following figure Coasting amount 5 mm 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Feedrate F mm min Relationship between coasting amount and feedrate example Note When the base specification parameter 21101 add01 bit3 is set to 1 the automatic acce
300. t position i Y gt 104 104 Y axis current position AIT 1 Start angle gt 111 111 Start angle WHILE 101LT 2 DO1 101 lt No of holes 120 24 18 COS 111 2 f Note 1 121 25 1 8 SIN 111 Radius COS 111 TEA Center coordinates X gt 120 X coordinates 122 120 123 121 Radius SIN 111 121 Fiole postion IF 102EQ90 GOTO100 Center coordinates Y gt 121 422 X Eee aboe vaie 120 gt 122 123 Y axis absolute value 121 gt 123 102 90 Judgment of G90 G91 103 120 mode Note 1 104 121 mores 120 103 122 122 X axis incremental value N100 X 122Y 123 121 104 gt 123 123 Y axis incremental value j 120 gt 103 X axis current position update 101 101 1 Note 1 121 gt 104 Y axis current position update 111 14 360 101 2 END1 M99 10141 gt 101 No of holes counter up 360 deg 101 No of holes 1 111 111 Hole position angle 122 120 103 123 121 104 f Note 1 Note 1 The processing time can be shortened by programming in one block 232 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications G28 X0 YO Z0 T1 M06 G90 G43 Z100 H01 G54 G00 X0 YO G81 Z 100 R3 F100 LO M03 G65 P9920 X 500 Y 500 AO B8 R100 G65 P9920 X 500 Y 500 AO B8 R200 G65 P9920 X 500 Y 500 AO B8 R300 e Example 3 Grid After defining the hole data with the canned cycle G72
301. t to lt vacant gt Variable 0 is always used as the lt vacant gt variable and cannot be defined in the left side member 1 Arithmetic expressions 1 0 3 1 lt vacant gt 2 041 5 2 3 1 035 3 4 0 10 3 0 0 4 0 5 0 05 5 0 It should be borne in mind that lt vacant gt in an arithmetic expression is handled in the same way as 0 lt Vacant gt lt Vacant gt 0 lt Vacant gt lt Constant gt Constant lt Constant gt lt Vacant gt Constant 2 Variable quotations When undefined variables only are quoted they are ignored up to the address When 1 lt Vacant gt GO X 1 Y1000 Equivalent to GO Y1000 GO X 1 10 Y1000 Equivalent to GO X10 Y1000 3 Conditional expressions lt Vacant gt and 0 are not equivalent for EQ and NE only 0 means lt vacant gt When 101 lt Vacant gt When 101 0 101 EQ 0 101 EQ 0 0 lt Vacant gt not established 101 NEO 101 NEO lt Vacant gt 0 established 0 0 not established 101 GE 0 101 GE 0 lt Vacant gt gt lt Vacant gt established 0 gt lt Vacant gt established 101 GTO 101 GT 0 lt Vacant gt gt 0 not established 0 gt 0 not established 101 LE 0 101 LE 0 lt Vacant gt lt lt Vacant gt established 0 lt lt Vacant gt established 101 LTO 101 LTO lt Vacant gt lt 0 not established 0 lt 0 not established Note 1 EQ and NE should be
302. t xXS lt CHNADOVTOZZTARSTIQNMUOWPOOCONODONRAUON LF Line Feed or NL Control Out Control In CO0COS 0000080 Pere P Space R Carriage Return Back Space Horizontal Tab 0000000 000 A e Ir ONST I Ho Apostrophe Q SYV A BET Deletes i NULL B DEL Delete i e Under the ISO code IF or NL is EOB and is EOR e Under the ISO code CR is meaningless and EOB will not occur Code A are stored on tape but an error results except when they are used in the comment section during operation The B codes are non working codes and are always ignored Parity V check is not executed Table of tape codes 3 Data Formats 3 2 Program formats 3 2 Program formats Ej Function and purpose The prescribed arrangement used when assigning control information to the controller is known as the program format and the format used with this controller is called the word address format ff Detailed description 1 Word and address 2 3 Aword is a collection of characters arranged in a specific sequence This entity is used as the unit for processing data and for causing the machine to execute specific operations Each word used for this controller consists of an alphabet letter and a number of several digits sometimes with a sign placed at the head of the number Numerals Alphabet address Word configuration The alphabet letter at the head of the word is t
303. tation speed lt spindle rotation speed during return lt synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2 Command spindle rotation speed Spindle rotation speed during return Tap rotation speed spindle base specification parameters 3013 to 3016 Synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2 spindle base specification parameters 3037 to 3040 Maximum rotation speed spindle base specification parameters 3005 to 3008 Tap time constant spindle base specification parameters 3017 to 3020 Synchronous tap changeover time constant 2 spindle base specification parameters 3041 to 3044 157 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles ii When synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2 lt spindle rotation speed during return S Command spindle rotation speed S Spindle rotation speed during return S1 Tap rotation speed spindle base specification parameters 3013 to 3016 S2 Synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2 spindle base specification parameters 3037 to 3040 Smax Maximum rotation speed spindle base specification parameters 3005 to 3008 T1 Tap time constant spindle base specification parameters 3017 to 3020 T2 Synchronous tap changeover time constant 2 spindle base specification parameters 3041 to 3044 T3 Synchronous tap changeover time constant 3 spindle base specification parameters 3045 to 3048 158 13
304. te Work coordinate Work coordinate system 3 G56 system 2 G55 system 1 G54 Work coordinate Work coordinate Work coordinate system 6 G59 system 5 G58 AN System 4 G57 wW T Detailed description 1 The coordinate systems created by this function are as follow a Basic machine coordinate system b Work coordinate systems G54 to G59 2 The parameters related to the coordinate system all provide the distance from the zero point of the basic machine coordinate system Therefore it is decided at which position in the basic machine coordinate system the first reference point should be set and then the zero point positions of the work coordinate systems are set 3 When the automatic coordinate system setting function is executed the following functions are canceled workpiece coordinate system shift based on G92 local coordinate system setting based on G52 workpiece coordinate system shift based on origin setting and workpiece coordinate system shift based on manual interrupt 4 When a parameter has been used to select the dog type of first manual reference point return or automatic reference point return after the power has been turned ON the dog type reference point return will be executed for the 2nd and subsequent manual reference point returns or automatic reference point returns CAUTION A If the workpiece coordinate offset amount is changed during automatic operation including single block operation the c
305. ted and instead call another program and execute it This is called the user macro interrupt function Use of this function allows the program to operate flexibly enough to meet varying conditions For setting the parameters of the function refer to the Operation manual and the machine parameters in Appendix 1 Command format User macro interrupt enable User macro interrupt disable Interrupt program number Interrupt sequence number The user macro interrupt function is enabled and disabled by the M96 and M97 commands programmed to make the user macro interrupt signal UIT valid or invalid That is if an interrupt signal UIT is input from the machine side in a user macro interrupt enable period from when M96 is issued to when M97 is issued or the NC is reset a user macro interrupt is caused to execute the program specified by P__ instead of the one being executed currently Another interrupt signal UIT is ignored while one user macro interrupt is being in service It is also ignored in a user macro interrupt disable state such as after an M97 command is issued or the system is reset M96 and M97 are processed internally as user macro interrupt control M codes Interrupt enable conditions A user macro interrupt is enabled only during execution of a program The requirements for the user macro interrupt are as follows 1 An automatic operation mode memory or MDI has been selected 2 The system is running in automatic m
306. tern gt Speed Commanded speed Arc clamp speed Arc deceleration speed Corner deceleration speed Sd 265 13 Program Support Functions 13 13 Synchronizing operation between part systems 13 13 Synchronizing operation between part systems CAUTION A When programming a multi part system carefully observe the movements caused by other part systems programs Ej Function and purpose The multi axis multi part system complex control NC system can simultaneously run multiple machining programs independently The synchronizing between part systems function is used in cases when at some particular point during operation the operations of part systems 1 and 2 are to be synchronized or in cases when the operation of only one part system is required Part system 1 machining Part system 2 machining program program Simultaneous and independent operation lt Synchronized operation Simultaneous and independent operation lt Synchronized operation Part system 2 operation only part system 1 waiting lt Synchronized operation Simultaneous and independent operation 266 13 Program Support Functions 13 13 Synchronizing operation between part systems gg Command format 1 Command for synchronizing with nth part system InLl n Part system number Synchronizing number 01 to 9999 1 2 lt gt Synchro nized operation
307. terpolation Functions 6 4 Circular interpolation 6 4 Circular interpolation G02 G03 Ej Function and purpose These commands serve to move the tool along an arc ES I Command format G02 G03 Xx Yy li Jj Kk Ff G02 Clockwise CW G03 Counterclockwise CCW Xx Yy End point li Jj Arc center Ff Feedrate For the arc command the arc end point coordinates are assigned with addresses X Y or Z or parallel axis X Y Z and the arc center coordinate value is assigned with addresses J or K Either an absolute value or incremental value can be used for the arc end point coordinate value command but the arc center coordinate value must always be commanded with an incremental value from the start point The arc center coordinate value is commanded with an input setting unit Caution is required for the arc command of an axis for which the input command value differs Command with a decimal point to avoid confusion 35 6 Interpolation Functions ff Detailed description 1 2 3 6 4 Circular interpolation G02 or G03 is retained until another G command G00 G01 or G33 in the 01 group that changes its mode is issued The arc rotation direction is distinguished by G02 and G03 G02 Clockwise CW G03 Counterclockwise CCW G17 X Y plane G18 Z X plane G19 Y Z plane An arc which extends for more than one quadrant can be executed with a single block command The following information is
308. ters per system Parameter Data Parapet Detats NNo paa onl ic le i Remarks 8305 Z Z axis chuck barrier 1176 99999999 x 2 Interpolation range 5 unit 8306 Z Z axis chuck barrier 1180 99999999 x 2 Interpolation Barrier range 6 unit 322 Appendix 2 Program Error Appendix 2 Program Error The message in bold characters appears on the screen These alarms occur during automatic operation and the causes of these alarms are mainly program errors which occur for instance when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared EXCS AXIS NO The number of axis addresses commanded in the same block exceeds the specifications AXIS ADR ERROR The axis address commanded by the program and the axis address set by the parameter do not match DIVISN ERROR An axis command which cannot be divided by the command unit has been issued PARITY H The number of holes per character on the paper tape is an even number for EIA codes and an odd number for ISO codes PARITY V The number of characters per block on the paper tape is odd ADDRESS ERROR An address not listed in the specifications has been used FORMAT ERROR The command format in the program is not correct G CODE ERROR A Gcode not listed in the specifications has been used CMD VALUE OVER The setting range for the addresses has been e
309. the corner rounding block does not have a linear command 7 Program error P383 results when the movement amount in the corner rounding block is less than the R value 8 Program error P384 results when the movement amount in the block following the corner rounding block is less than the R value 240 13 Program Support Functions 13 8 Circle cutting 13 8 Circle cutting G12 G13 Ej Function and purpose Circle cutting starts the tool from the center of the circle and cuts the inner circumference of the circle The tool continues cutting while drawing a circle and returns to the center position Fa Command format G12 G13 li Dd Ff G12 Clockwise CW G13 Counterclockwise CCW Radius of circle incremental value the symbol is ignored D Offset No The offset No and offset data are not displayed on the setting and display unit F Feedrate fe Detailed description 1 The symbol for the offset amount indicates reduction and indicates enlargement 2 The circle cutting is executed on the plane G17 G18 or G19 currently selected Offset amount symbol Offset amount symbol Y N d1 offset amount N i For G12 tool center path i i 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt 5 gt 6 gt 7 gt 0 For G13 tool center path d1 offset amount 0 gt 7 gt 6 gt 5 gt 43332 3130 241 13 Program Support Functions EJ Example of program Example 1 G12 15000 D01 F100 Input set
310. the number of codes from the first significant code to the EOB in the significant data section in the vertical direction of the tape is an odd number that is when the number of characters in one block is odd When a parity V error is detected the tape stops at the code following the EOB Note 1 Among the tape codes there are codes which are counted as characters for parity and codes which are not counted as such For details refer to the Table of tape codes in 3 1 Tape Codes Note 2 Any space codes which may appear within the section from the initial EOB code to the address code or code are counted for parity V check 12 3 Data Formats 3 8 G code lists Ej Function and purpose G code A 00 01 02 03 04 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 A 18 A19 A 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 1 30 2 30 3 30 4 30 5 30 6 31 31 1 31 2 31 3 32 33 Group 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 02 02 06 06 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 3 8 G code lists Positioning Linear interpolation Circular interpolation CW clockwise Circular interpolation CCW counterclockwise Dwell Exact stop check Program parameter input compensation input Program parameter input cancel Circular cut CW clockwise Circular cut CCW counterclockwise Plane selection X Y Plane selection Z X Plane selection Y Z Inc
311. ting is executed in the state shifted to the direction opposite of the cutter The shift amount is designated as shown below with addresses I J and K Tool during cutting z Tool after cutting E gt For G17 J For G18 K Spindle orient Nt j N For G19 J K position Machining hole The shift amount is executed with linear interpolation and the feed rate follows the F command Command I J and K with incremental values in the same block as the hole position data J and K will be handled as modals during the canned cycle Note Ifthe parameter 1080 Dril_Z which fixes the hole drilling axis to the Z axis is set the shift amount can be designated with address Q instead of and j In this case whether to shift or not and the shift direction are set with parameter 8207 G76 87 IGNR and 8208 G76 87 The symbol for the Q value is ignored and the value is handled as a positive value The Q value is a modal during the canned cycle and will also be used as the G83 G73 and G76 cutting amount 160 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles h G88 Boring Program G88 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ff Pp 1 GO XXx4 Yy 2 GO Zr 3 G1 ZZ Ff 4 G4 Pp 5 M5 Spindle stop 6 Stop when single block stop switch is ON 7 Automatic start switch ON 8 eee mode GOZ z 1 G99 mode GOZ z G98 G99 9 M3 Spindle forward rotation mode mode The operation stops at after the
312. ting unit 0 01 When offset amount is 10 00mm 13 8 Circle cutting 10 000m Offset 50 000m _ Radius Ef Cautions 1 If the offset No D is not issued or if the offset No is illegal the program error P170 will occur 2 If Radius l offset amount is 0 or negative the program error P233 will occur 3 If G12 or G13 is commanded during diameter compensation G41 G42 the diameter compensation will be validated on the path after compensating with the D commanded with G12 or G13 4 If an address not included in the format is commanded in the same block as G12 and G13 a program error P32 will occur 242 13 Program Support Functions 13 9 Program parameter input 13 9 Program parameter input G10 G11 Ej Function and purpose The parameters set from the setting and display unit can be changed in the machining programs The data format used for the data setting is as follows Fa Command format G10 L50 Data setting command P major classification number N data number H bit type data P major classification number A axis number N data number D byte type data P major classification number A axis number N data number S word type data P major classification number A axis number N data number L 2 word type data G11 Data setting mode cancel data setting completed There are 8 types of data formats according to the type of parameter axis common and axis independent and data type as liste
313. tion decimal points will be ignored Designation of cut amount for each cutting pass with G73 or G83 or designation of the shift amount at G76 or G87 incremental value Designation of R point position absolute value or incremental value Designation of feed rate for cutting feed Designation of number of repetitions 0 to 9999 Designation of shift amount at G76 or G87 incremental value The shift amount is designated with the Q address depending on the parameter setting Spindle rotation speed command Spindle rotation speed designation for synchronous tap retract Synchronous asynchronous tap cycle selection 151 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles 5 Difference between absolute value command and incremental value command For absolute value For incremental value Workpiece Workpiece 6 Feed rate for tapping cycle and tapping retract The feed rates for the tapping cycle and tapping retract are as shown below a Selection of synchronous tapping cycle asynchronous tapping cycle coe eee G84xxx RXX Control parameter Synchronous e nchronous tapping asynchronous Asynchronous w No designation on EEE a O is irrelevant to the setting b Selection of asynchronous tapping cycle feed rate G94 G95 Control parameter F command value Feed designation F1 a o A F Fdesignation Other than FO to Per minute feed F8 FO to F8 no decimal point F1 digit feed F designation
314. to 999999 um Detailed description 1 Once this command has been issued the GOO mode is retained until it is changed by another G function or until the G01 G02 G03 or G33 command in the 01 group is issued If the next command is GOO all that is required is simply that the coordinate words be specified In the GOO mode the tool is always accelerated at the start point of the block and decelerated at the end point Refer to Note4 of Example of program If multiple axes are controlled the next block will be executed after confirming that the position error amounts of all the moving axes become within the specified in position width for each part system Any G command G72 to G89 in the 09 group is cancelled G80 by the GOO command Whether the tool moves along a linear or non linear path is determined by parameter but the positioning time does not change a Linear path This is the same as linear interpolation G01 and the speed is limited by the rapid traverse rate of each axis b Non linear path The tool is positioned at the rapid traverse rate independently for each axis Refer to Operation during in position check for the programmable in position check positioning command CAUTION The commands no value after G will be handled as G00 25 6 Interpolation Functions fez Example of program 6 1 Positioning Rapid traverse Start poin 150 100 150 G91 G00 X 27
315. to G89 macro call is commanded as a hole position command G81 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 G65Pp1 Xx1 Yy1 lit Jj1 Aa1 Bb1 x1 X axis hole position f M Subprogram is y1 Y axis hole position on next page i1 X axis interval j1 Y axis interval a1 No of holes in X direction b1 No of holes in Y direction G28 X0 YO ZO T1 M06 G90 G43 Z100 H01 G54 GOO XO YO G81 Z 100 R3 F100 LO M03 G65 P9930 X0 YO I 100 J 75 A5B3 G84 Z 90 R3 F250 M03 G65 P9930 X0 l 100 J 75 A5B3 233 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 09930 Subprogram 101 24 102 25 Start point X coordinates x 101 101 X axis start point Start point Y coordinates yi gt 102 102 Y direction interval X axis interval 103 103 X direction interval 103 4 Y axis interval j gt 104 106 No of holes in No of holes in Y direction b gt 106 Y direction 104 5 No of holes in Y direction N 106 2 106 gt 0 END Y direction drilling completion check No of holes in X direction set WHILE 106GTO DO1 No of holes in Y direction 105 1 check WHILE 105GTO DO X 101 Y 102 Positioning drilling 101 103 101 X coordinates update 105 1 gt 105 No of holes in X direction 1 G90 X 101 Y 102 101 101 108 105 105 1 Note 1 END2 101 103 gt 101 X coordinates revision 101 101 103 102 104 gt 1
316. to set the basic spindle and the synchronous spindle or when the spindle synchronous control signal Y432 is turned ON with R resister value illegal 16 The phase shift amount saved in the NC is held until the next phase shift is calculated This value is saved even when the power is turned OFF 17 Synchronous tapping can not be used during spindle synchronous mode 96 11 Tool Functions 11 1 Tool functions T8 digit BCD 11 Tool Functions 11 1 Tool functions T8 digit BCD Ej Function and purpose The tool functions are also known simply as T functions and they assign the tool numbers and tool offset number They are designated with a 8 digit number following the address T and one set can be commanded in commanded one block The output signal is an 8 digit BCD signal and start signal When the T functions are commanded in the same block as movement commands there are 2 sequences in which the commands are executed as below The machine specifications determine which sequence applies 1 The T function is executed after the movement command 2 The T function is executed simultaneously with the movement command Processing and completion sequences are required for all T commands 97 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 1 Tool offset 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 1 Tool offset Ej Function and purpose The basic tool offset function includes the tool length offset and tool diameter compensation Each offset amount
317. trol for Command control for constant surface speed control the selected spindle the 2nd spindle Upper limit Lower limit of spindle nth spindle rotation speed command during Note 1 constant surface speed control G92 S_Q Thread cutting Note 1 The spindle selected during G43 1 mode depends on the parameter 21049 SPname 2 The Sn Command can be used to command the other spindle even if it is commanded during G43 1 or G44 1 mode Note that the rotation speed designation will be applied for such command even if the G96 mode is ON Example When SPname 0 Rotation speed 1st spindle 2nd spindle 1000 r min 0 r min 100 m min 2500 r min 200 m min 3000 r min 4000 r min Note 2 The constant surface speed control will be switched to the 2nd spindle by G44 1 command Therefore the 1st spindle retains its rotation speed as that of G44 1 200 command The 1st spindle rotation speed will be 3000 r min when S1 3000 command is issued 2000 r min 79 10 Spindle Functions 10 5 Constant surface speed control 10 5 Constant surface speed control G96 G97 10 5 1 Constant surface speed control FF Function and purpose These commands automatically control the spindle speed in line with the changes in the radius coordinate values as cutting proceeds in the diametrical direction and they serve to keep the cutting point speed constant during the cutting Command
318. ttINg e Aae a aa aae aa aaa naa Ea Eaa cobain ra aa aaae Ta in 45 6 7 1 Constant lead thread cutting G33 oo eee ecececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeessaeeeseeesnesesssaeeeees 45 6 7 2 Inch thread cutting G33 xs cecees tercecies tdecesssecaseessenedasess adges tas teres td anioxsdedevesesecenhed evetedeten 48 6 8 Unidirectional positioning GGG 4 cisk aceite aw mehr cenae nese 49 T Feed FUNCTIONS ivcisiesccierescscccetsivstensesczsccexessaccecsssccceecssssaccetassseeterdexesceaasaascerscecescoutssseucereseccetateats 51 FA Rapid averse rat sics ulate cag ean die aa A en eaten 51 7 2 Cutting feed AC 26 ca ceetatc Mita ett aareaiestta sete arene toad tre cetacn dante sagncttarescecthh pagctermtacse sama acai 51 TAS ME PIQUE TOG EE E A A T E AA A A 52 74 Synchronous feed G94 GOS cerasina a a ee a Ena 54 7 5 Feedrate designation and effects on control aX eS sssseresserrererrrretrrrtnsnettrerrnnn terene 56 7 6 Automatic acceleration deceleration ccecccesececcseeceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesesenseneeeneeeneeees 59 Tick Opes clamp siaa a aad a a a a Deanna 59 7 8 Exact stop check GO9 sscsccccserecedessenecdieli ines ee oh aka aceon ea a E eddies 60 7 9 Exact stop check mode G61 cis cic cc tvisttieceste eran ara ae lanes 63 7 10 Automatic corner override ENa A AE E AE E AT TT 64 7 11 Tapping mode G63 che case sist taser aaah caster dacs cans sacateeecusis spas deuseeceseche gud ameeeeee eee aetnene 69 7 12 Cutting mode
319. ttern e When r2 1 the synchronous tapping mode will be entered and when r2 0 the asynchronous tapping mode will be entered e When G84 is executed the override will be canceled and the override will automatically be set to 100 e Dry run is valid when the control parameter GOO DRY RUN is on and is valid for the positioning command If the feed hold button is pressed during G84 execution and the sequence is at 3 to 6 the movement will not stop immediately and instead will stop after 6 During the rapid traverse in sequence 1 2 and 9 the movement will stop immediately e The operation stops at after the 1 2 and 9 commands during single block operation e During the G84 modal the Tapping NC output signal will be output e During the G84 synchronous tapping modal the M3 M4 M5 and S code will not be output 156 13 Program Support Functions 13 1 Canned cycles This function allows spindle acceleration deceleration pattern to be approached to the speed loop acceleration deceleration pattern by dividing the spindle and drilling axis acceleration deceleration pattern into up to three stages during synchronous tapping The acceleration deceleration pattern can be set up to three stages for each gear When returning from the hole bottom rapid return is possible depending on the spindle rotation speed during return The spindle rotation speed during return is held as modal information i When tap ro
320. ubprogram is executed The number of times the subprogram is executed is 41 times with each call The lt argument gt is the same as for a simple call Format ____ lt argument gt Program No No of repetitions Detailed description 1 When the G66 command is entered the specified user macro subprogram will be called after the movement command in the block with the movement commands has been executed until the G67 cancel command is entered 2 The G66 and G67 commands must be paired in the same program A program error will result when G67 is issued without the G66 command Example Drill cycle N1 G90 G54 GO XOY 0Z0 N2 G91 GOO X 50 Y 50 Z 200 N3 G66 P9010 R 10 2 30 F 100 O 9010 N4 X 50 Y 50 Nio CoD Z AGMO L N5 X 50 N20 G09 G01 Z 26 F 9 S5 o subprogram after axis command execution N30 G00 Z 18 26 A Wee voo 2 al Argument R 4 N30 N5 wf N20 Argument Z teh g ipl 1g Argument F Note 1 After the axis command is executed in the main program the subprogram is executed Note 2 The subprogram is not executed in the blocks following G67 184 13 Program Support Functions ff Modal call B called after the every block The specified user macro subprogram is called unconditionally for each command block which is assigned between G66 1 and G67 and the subprogram is executed the number of times designated with L address 13 5 User macro specifications
321. uctions below and parameters are set for each M code to determine the correspondence with the instructions Same for S T and B codes a M98 PAAAA b G65 PAAAA Mes M98 M are not output Cc G66 P AAAA M d G66 1PAAAA Me When the parameters corresponding to c and d above are set issue the cancel command G67 either in the user macro or after the call code has been commanded so as to cancel the modal call 2 The correspondence between the M which conducts the macro call and the program number PAAAA of the macro to be called is set by parameter Up to 10 M codes from MOO to M95 can be entered Note that the codes to be registered are the codes basically required for the machine and codes excluding MO M1 M2 M30 and M96 to M99 3 As with M98 it is displayed on the screen display of the setting and display unit but the M codes and MF are not output 186 13 Program Support Functions 4 13 5 User macro specifications Even if the miscellaneous command entered above is issued during a user macro subprogram called by the M code macro call will not result and it will be handled as an ordinary miscellaneous command All S T and B codes call the subprograms in the prescribed program numbers of the corresponding S T and B functions A maximum of 10 M codes can be set However when not setting all 10 Set the parameters as shown below MACRO lt Code gt lt Type gt lt Program No gt
322. unction and purpose Until now trouble such as the following occurred when using control 1 Corner rounding occurred at the corners that linear and linear are connected because the following command movement started before the previous command finished Refer to Fig 1 2 When cutting circle commands an error occurred further inside the commanded path and the resulting cutting path was smaller than the commanded path Refer to Fig 2 A Commanded path Commanded path Ne Actal path Actual path Fig 2 Radius reduction error Fig 1 Rounding at linear corners sane g ounding at in circle commands This function controls the operation so the lag is eliminated in control systems and servo systems With this function machining accuracy can be improved especially during high speed machining and machining time can be reduced The high accuracy control function is configured of the following functions 1 Pre interpolation acceleration deceleration linear acceleration deceleration 2 Optimum speed control 3 Vector accuracy interpolation 4 Active feed forward 5 Arc entrance exit speed control 256 13 Program Support Functions ES I Command format G61 1 Ffi G61 1 High accuracy control mode 13 12 High accuracy control fi Feedrate The high accuracy control mode is validated from the block containing the G61 1 command G64 G61 1 The high accuracy control mode is canceled with one of the fo
323. ur Besides being used to designate the offset amounts for tool radius compensation the D codes are also used to designate the offset amounts for tool position offset Changing the offset amounts Offset amounts are normally changed when a different tool has been selected in the compensation cancel mode However when an amount is changed in the compensation mode the vectors at the end point of the block are calculated using the offset amount designated in that block Offset amount symbols and tool center path If the offset amount is negative the figure will be the same as if G41 and G42 are interchanged Thus the axis that was rotating around the outer side of the workpiece will rotate around the inner side and vice versa An example is shown below Normally the offset amount is programmed as positive However if the tool path center is programmed as shown in a and the offset amount is set to be negative the movement will be as shown in b On the other hand if the program is created as shown in b and the offset amount is set to be negative the movement will be as shown in a Thus only one program is required to execute machining of both male and female shapes The tolerance for each shape can be randomly determined by adequately selecting the offset amount Note that a circle will be divided with type A when compensation is started or canceled Workpiece Tool center path G41 offset amount or G
324. urface milling example argument J is programmed as the milling pitch 10 mm However this is changed to 8 333mm to create an equal interval pitch The results of the No of reciprocation data calculation is set in local variable 30 192 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 3 Local variables can be used independently on each of the macro call levels 4 levels Local variables are also provided independently for the main program macro level 0 Arguments cannot be used for the level 0 local variables Main level 0 1 0 1 2 0 2 3 0 3 G65 P1A1 B2 C3 M02 Local variables 0 1 0 100 2 0 200 3 0 300 O1 macro level 1 Y G65 P10A10 B20 C30 S M99 Local variables 1 A 1 1 000 O10 macro level 2 G65 P100A100 B200 M99 Local variables 2 A 1 10 000 B 2 20 000 C 3 30 000 D 7 Z 26 32 0100 macro level 3 Local variables 3 A 1 100 000 B 2 200 000 C 8 Z 26 32 The status of the local variables appear on the setting and display unit Refer to the Operation Manual for details 193 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications ff Macro interface inputs 1000 to 1035 1200 to 1295 PLC gt NC The status of the interface input signals can be ascertained by reading out the values of variable numbers 1000 to 1035 1200 to 1295 A variable value which has been read
325. us feed mode ES Command format Per minute feed mm min asynchronous feed F1 1mm min Per revolution feed mm rev synchronous feed F1 0 01mm rev The G95 command is a modal command and so it is valid until the G94 command per minute feed is next assigned 1 The F code command range is as follows The movement amount per spindle revolution with synchronous feed per revolution feed is assigned by the F code and the command range is as shown in the table below Metric input Te 00001mm system Command F mm min E mm rev F mm min E mm rev Minimum 1 1 00 1 0 01 1 1 000 1 0 01 command unit 1 1 00 1 1 00 1 1 000 1 1 00 0 01 to 1000000 00 0 001 to 999 999 0 001 to 100000 000 0 0001 to 99 9999 Inch input B 0 0001 inch C 0 00001inch system Command F inch min E inch rev F inch min E inch rev address Minimum 1 1 000 1 0 001 1 1 0000 1 0 001 command unit 1 1 000 1 1 000 1 1 0000 1 1 000 Command 0 0001 to 0 001 to 100000 0000 0 0001 to 999 9999 40000 00000 0 00001 to 99 99999 2 The effective speed actual movement speed of machine under per revolution feed conditions is given in the following formula Formula 1 FC F x Nx OVR Formula 1 Where FC Effective rate mm min inch min F Commanded feedrate mm rev inch rev N Spindle speed r min OVR Cutting feed override W
326. ve sets of square parentheses may be used 543 120 2 15 3 100 520 125 128 130 132 Note 3 There are no restrictions on the number of characters and number of variables for variable definition Note 4 The variable values should be within a range form 0 to 99999999 If this range is exceeded the arithmetic operations may not be conducted properly Note 5 The variable definitions are valid from the moment that the variables are actually defined 1 100 5a ec ceeeeeeeeeees 1 100 Valid from the next command 1 200 2 1 200 1 200 2 400 Valid from the next command 3 1 3003 3 500 Valid from the next command Note 6 Variable quotations are always regarded as having a decimal point at the end When 100 10 then X 100 is treated as X10 179 13 Program Support Functions 13 5 User macro specifications 13 5 User macro specifications 13 5 1 User macro commands G65 G66 G66 1 G67 Ej Function and purpose By combining the user macros with variable commands it is possible to use macro program call arithmetic operation data input output with PLC control decision branch and many other instructions for measurement and other such applications O Main program O Macro program Macro call instruction Macro programs use variables arithmetic instructions and control instructions to create subprograms which function to provide special purpose control Th
327. vement is correctly compensated as the same direction as the N6 advance direction is commanded in N2 136 12 Tool Offset Functions 12 3 Tool radius compensation 12 3 8 Interference check Ej Function and purpose 1 Outline A tool whose radius has been compensated with the tool radius compensation function by the usual 2 block pre read may sometimes cut into the workpiece This is known as interference and interference check is the function which prevents this from occurring There are three types of interference check as indicated below and each can be selected for use by parameter Function Parameter Operation Interference check 8102 OFF alarm function 8103 OFF Interference check 8102 ON avoidance function 8103 OFF Interference check 8103 ON Cutting proceeds unchanged even when it occurs invalid function Use this for microscopic segment programs Note 8102 COLL ALM OFF interference check avoidance 8103 COLL CHK OFF interference check invalid ff Detailed description Example Avoidance path Outer diameter uO of tool N G41 N1 G90 G1 X50 N2 X70 Y 100 N3 X120 YO 1 With alarm function The alarm occurs before N1 is executed and so using the edit function N1 can be changed as below and machining can be continued N1 G90 G1 X20 Y 40 2 With avoidance function The intersection point of N1 and N3 is calculated and the interference avoi
328. ward control Kv Speed loop gain M Motor S Segment Command during acceleration deceleration after interpolation Machine error compensation amount 262 13 Program Support Functions 13 12 High accuracy control 2 Reduction of arc radius reduction error amount using feed forward control With the high accuracy control the arc radius reduction error amount can be greatly reduced by combining the pre interpolation acceleration deceleration control method above mentioned and the active feed forward control SHG control The logical radius reduction error amount AR in the high accuracy control mode is obtained with the following expression Active feed forward control SHG control active feed forward control 1 2 2 F 2 Kf s R Tp 1 aD AR lt R Arc radius mm F Cutting feedrate mm min Tp Position loop time constant s Kf Feed forward coefficient By setting Kf to the following value the delay elements caused by the position loop in the servo system can be eliminated and the logical AR can be set to 0 Kf 1 Feed forward gain 100 The equivalent feed forward gain to set Kf to 1 can be obtained with the following expression 2 359 PGN1 for conventional conte 50 2 x PGN1 for SHG control The feed forward gain can be set independently for GOO and G01 Path for pre interpolation acceleration deceleration control method Kf 1 Path for pre interpolation
329. when the next block is started The in position width is designed to reduce the roundness at the workpiece corners to below the constant value Next block Previous block To eliminate corner roundness set the servo parameter 2224 SV024 to zero and perform an in position check or assign the dwell command G04 between blocks 61 7 Feed Functions 7 8 Exact stop check 3 With deceleration check a With linear acceleration deceleration Previous block Next block Ts Acceleration deceleration time constant Ts Td Deceleration check time Td Td Ts 0 14ms b With exponential acceleration deceleration Previous block Ts Acceleration deceleration time constant Td Deceleration check time Td 2 x Ts 0 14ms Previous block Next block Ts Acceleration deceleration time constant Td Deceleration check time Td 2 x Ts 0 14ms The time required for the deceleration check during cutting feed is the longest among the cutting feed deceleration check times of each axis determined by the cutting feed acceleration deceleration time constants and by the cutting feed acceleration deceleration mode of the axes commanded simultaneously Note 1 To execute exact stop check in a fixed cycle cutting block insert command G09 into the fixed cycle subprogram 62 7 Feed Functions 7 9 Exact stop check mode 7 9 Exact stop check mode G61 Ej Function a
330. which numbers correspond to which functions and thus reference should be made to the instruction issued by the machine manufacturer When a number exceeding 2 digits is assigned the last 2 digits will be valid When S functions are commanded in the same block as movement commands there are 2 sequences in which the commands are executed as below The machine specifications determine which sequence applies 1 The S function is executed after the movement command 2 The S function is executed simultaneously with the movement command Processing and completion sequences are required for all S commands from S00 to S99 10 2 Spindle functions S6 digits Analog Ej Function and purpose When the S6 digits function is added commands with a 6 dight number following the S code can be designated Other commands conform to the S2 digits function By assigning a 6 digit number following the S code these functions enable the appropriate gear signals voltages corresponding tot he commanded spindle speed r min and start signals to be output If the gear step is changed manually other than when the S command is being executed the voltage will be obtained from the set speed at that gear step and the previously commanded speed and then will be output The analog signal specifications are given below 1 Output voltage 0 to 10V 2 Resolution 1 4096 27 3 Load conditions 10kQ 4 Output impedance 22
331. will vary along with the tool movement 57 7 Feed Functions 7 5 Feedrate designation and effects on control axes Example When the feed rate is designated as f and Linear X and rotary axes are to be controlled simultaneously In the X axis incremental command value is x and the C axis incremental command values is c N Size is fixed for fc but direction varies Both size and direction vary for ft fc ar Size and direction are fixed for fx E X fx f x EEE COE ITE GIN EUs Ana anced ith 1 Cc o fx A Sag ee 2 If the speed in the tool advance direction at start point P1 is ft and the component speeds in the X axis and Y axis directions are ftx and fty respectively then these can be expressed as _rein A ftx rsin 180 0 x 180 Olek e E AVAIL ENE E VAILE T 4 fty rcos 35 8 x FoS ss Ee NNE E E E a aD 5 Where r is the distance between center of rotation and tool in mm units and 6 is the angle between the P1 point and the X axis at the center of rotation in units The combined speed ft according to 1 2 3 4 and 5 is ft Vi fty 2 of gt T nmerecC 2 5 VE AY 6 Vx 07 Consequently feedrate f designated by the program must be as follows f ike et men er 7 2 T T 2 xX x ecersin 180 0 90 80 ft in formula 6 is the speed at the P1 point and the value of 6 changes as the C axis rotates which means that the value of ft will
332. xceeded PRGRAM END ERR EOR has been read during tape and memory operation PROG NO ZERO A zero has been designated for a program number or sequence number NO SPEC ERR A command not found in the specifications was issued PREREAD BL ERR When executing tool radius compensation there was an error in the pre read block so the interference could not be checked 323 e Divide the alarm block command into two e Check the specifications e Revise the axis names in the program e Check the program e Check the paper tape e Check the tape puncher and tape reader e Make the number of characters per block on the paper tape even e Set the parameter parity V selection off e Check and revise the program address e Check the specifications e Check the program e Check and correct the G code address in the program e Check the program e Enter the M02 and M30 commands at the end of the program e Enter the M99 command at the end of the subprogram e The program numbers are designated across a range from 1 to 99999999 e The sequence numbers are designated across a range from 1 to 99999 e Check the specifications e Review the program Appendix 2 Program Error OVER CMP LENG The commanded movement distance is too long 2 was exceeded F CMD NOTHING No feedrate command has been issued ARC ERROR There is an error in the arc start and end points as well as in the arc center
333. xis 44 6 Interpolation Functions 6 7 Thread cutting 6 7 Thread cutting 6 7 1 Constant lead thread cutting G33 Ej Function and purpose The G33 command exercises feed control over the tool which is synchronized with the spindle rotation and so this makes it possible to conduct constant lead straight thread cutting and tapered thread cutting Multiple thread screws etc can also be machined by designating the thread cutting angle Fa Command format G32 Zz Ff Qq Normal lead thread cutting commands Zz Thread cutting direction axis address X Y Z a and thread length Ff Lead of long axis axis which moves most direction Qq Thread cutting start shift angle 0 to 360 G33 Zz Ee Qq Precision lead thread cutting commands Zz Thread cutting direction axis address X Y Z a and thread length Ee Lead of long axis axis which moves most direction Qq Thread cutting Detailed description 1 The E command is also used for the number of ridges in inch thread cutting and whether the ridge number or precision lead is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting Precision lead is designated by setting the parameter 1229 set 01 bit 1 to 1 2 The lead in the long axis direction is commanded for the taper thread lead When a lt 45 lead is LZ When a gt 45 lead is LX When a 45 lead can be in either LX or LZ Thread cutting Metric input oa a Command address E mm rev
334. y bit of 32 bits 3 Multiplication arithmetic i j k Multiplication i j k Division i j MOD k Remainder i j AND k Logical product at every bit of 32 bits 4 Functions i SIN k Sine i COS k Cosine i TAN k Tangent sin cos used for tan i ATAN j Arctangent ATAN or ATN may be used i ACOS j Arc cosine i SQRT k Square root SQRT or SQR may be used i ABS k Absolute value i BIN k Conversion from BCD to BIN i BCD k Conversion from BIN to BCD i ROUND k Rounding off ROUND or RND may be used i FIX k Discard fractions less than 1 i FUP k Add for fractions less than 1 i LN k Natural logarithm i EXP k Exponent with e 2 718 as bottom Note 1 A value without a decimal point is basically treated as a value with a decimal point at the end 1 1 000 Note 2 Offset amounts from 10001 and work coordinate system offset values from 5201 are handled as data with a decimal point Consequently data with a decimal point will be produced even when data without a decimal point have been defined in the variable numbers Example Common variables 101 1000 after execution Ls 101 1000 000 10001 101 102 10001 102 1000 000 Note 3 The lt formula gt after a function must be enclosed in the square parentheses 219 13 Program Support Functions ff Sequence of arithmetic op
335. y in 2 or more blocks the block in which it was issued last will be valid 12 A program error P32 will occur if an address other than an axis is designated in G116 command block 275 13 Program Support Functions 13 16 Miscellaneous function output during axis movement 13 16 Miscellaneous function output during axis movement G117 Ej Function and purpose This function controls the timing of the miscellaneous function to be output The miscellaneous function is output when the position designated in axis movement is reached Command format FF G117 X_Z_M_S_T_ 2ndM _ XZ Start point of operation M_S_T_ 2ndM __ Miscellaneous function Detailed description 1 This command is issued independently immediately before the block with the movement command that activates the miscellaneous function 2 Single block stop does not apply to this command 3 The maximum number of groups to which the miscellaneous functions in the G117 block can be issued is as follows M commands 4 sets S commands 2 sets T commands 1 set 2nd miscellaneous function 1 set 4 This command can be issued in up to two consecutive blocks When issued in three or more consecutive blocks the last two blocks will be valid Example G117 Xx1 Zz1 Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4 G117 Xx2 Zz2 Mm5 Mm6 Mm7 Mm8 G01 X200 Z200 Mm1 End point 200 200 Mm2 Mma Mm5 Mm4 Mm6 Mm7 Start point Mm8 5 When the o

machining center/transfer machine type

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents